7ztwa0002

Foreword
The first purpose of marine electronics equipment is to be used for the safety of life at sea, and
secondarily, it should satisfy users' demands for their executing shipping and ship management and
preserving their property. That is, navigation equipment have such purposes and responsibility.
Therefore, engineers concerned with production of marine electronics equipment and sales
engineers of products will make efforts to supply in expensive and high-quality products to users to
the best of their abilities. Service engineers will try to maintain the functions of the products and to
have users recognize the value of their services. Consequently, at least such three efforts should be
made together. Especially service engineers being in final contact with users should be familiar with
technical skills, knowledge and rules which are on the basis of accumulative experiences and
radio-electronics, and should always satisfy users.
This handbook has been covers the newest rule and basic technology data. This handbook is
necessarily used by service engineers all over the world, persons concerned with sales, and the
persons concerned widely engaged in this field hopefully use this as an indispensable handbook as
well.
November, 2009
Marine Engineering Department

General Manager
Makoto Kawaguchi
Contents
A. General Information (before you begin)
1. Cautions for High Voltage ................................................................................................ A- 1
2. What to do for Electric Shock .......................................................................................... A- 2
3. When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped, Give a (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) A- 3
4. When both pulse and breathing have stopped, Give a (Cardiac massage) .................... A- 4
5. Observance of safety routine rules at work ..................................................................... A- 5
6. Things taken into account at work ................................................................................... A- 7
B. GMDSS
1. Enter into Force ................................................................................................................ B- 1
2. Background of GMDSS Introduction ............................................................................... B- 1
3. Outline of GMDSS Introduction ....................................................................................... B- 1
4. Image of GMDSS operation ............................................................................................. B- 3
5. Function and Advantage of GMDSS ................................................................................ B- 4
6. Terms on GMDSS ............................................................................................................ B- 5
7. Range of the application of SOLAS treaty ...................................................................... B- 7
8. Carriage Requirements for Ship Station of SOLAS Ship ................................................. B-10
9. Maintenance etc. of Radio Equipment ............................................................................. B-14
10. Duplication of Equipment ................................................................................................. B-15
11. Emergency Source of Electrical Power and Reserve Power .......................................... B-16
12. Assignment of Mariners for Radio Part on board ............................................................ B-18
13. Frequency used in GMDSS ............................................................................................. B-19
14. JRC Products for Type Approval by Countries, Classification Societies and Others ...... B-20
15. Radiocommunication-related Qualification Certificate of Liberia Flag Ships .................. B-25
16. Radiocommunication-related Qualification Certificate of Panama Flag Ships ................ B-26
17. DSC (Digital Selective Calling) ........................................................................................ B-27
18. EGC (Enhanced Group Call) ........................................................................................... B-30
19. NAVTEX ........................................................................................................................... B-32
20. Satellite EPIRB ................................................................................................................ B-36
21. INMARSAT System .......................................................................................................... B-43
22. NBDP (Shortwave Narrow-band Direct Printing System) ................................................ B-53
23. SART (Search & Rescue Radar Transponder ) ............................................................... B-54
24. MSI (Maritime Safety Information Service) ...................................................................... B-56
25. Main Classification table .................................................................................................. B-57
C. Radiocommunications
1. Abbreviation for International Telex Communication ....................................................... C- 1
2. Phonetic alphabets list ..................................................................................................... C- 2
3. DSC / NBDP Station Frequency List ................................................................................ C- 3
4. Weather Facsimile ........................................................................................................... C- 5
5. MF/HF Radio Equipment ................................................................................................. C- 9
6. International VHF (for Maritime Mobile Communication) ................................................ C-11
7. Two way VHF Radio Equipment ...................................................................................... C-22
8. Shipborne 400 MHz Communication Equipment UHF Transceiver ................................ C-23
9. Interface Standards .......................................................................................................... C-24
D. Navigation and Fishing System

1. Positioning System Used Now ......................................................................................... D- 1
2. GPS (Global Positioning System) .................................................................................... D- 2
3. GPS Compass ................................................................................................................. D- 4
4. Marine Radar ................................................................................................................... D- 6
5. Raster Scan Radar .......................................................................................................... D-28
6. Target Tracking System ................................................................................................... D-33
7. AIS Superimposition Display ........................................................................................... D-38
8. ECDIS and INS ................................................................................................................ D-42
9. Echo Sounder .................................................................................................................. D-52
10. Fish Finder ....................................................................................................................... D-58
11. SONAR ............................................................................................................................. D-66
12. Doppler Log / Doppler Sonar ........................................................................................... D-73
13. Doppler Log / Doppler Sonar Adjustment Procedure ...................................................... D-75
14. Doppler Finder (Current Meter) ....................................................................................... D-80
15. Color Plotter ..................................................................................................................... D-83
16. AIS (Automatic identification system)................................................................................ D-85
17. VDR / S-VDR ..................................................................................................................... D-88
E. General Materials
1. Grouping of Radio frequency by Frequency Band .......................................................... E- 1
2. International Conventions related to Maritime management ........................................... E- 1
3. Abbreviation used in this document ................................................................................. E- 2
4. Method of Error expression ............................................................................................. E- 4
5. Marine Storage Battery Etc. ............................................................................................. E- 6
6. Standing Wave and SWR ................................................................................................ E-10
7. Marine Cables .................................................................................................................. E-11
8. Current rating and Voltage drop of Cable ........................................................................ E-19
9. High Frequency Cable ..................................................................................................... E-22
10. Attenuation curves of High Frequency cables ................................................................. E-24
11. List of Cables provided by JRC and Special Cable ......................................................... E-25
12. Logic Circuit IC ................................................................................................................. E-36
13. Decibel (DB) Calculation Table ........................................................................................ E-40
14. Decibel Conversion Table ................................................................................................ E-41
15. Capacitance of Various Antennas .................................................................................... E-42
16. Configuration Factor of Antenna ...................................................................................... E-43
17. Battery List (exclusively used for each Product) ............................................................. E-44
18. Conversion Table for Various Units .................................................................................. E-52
19. Organization of IMO ......................................................................................................... E-53
20. Organization of ITU-R ...................................................................................................... E-54
21. Measures for Environment ............................................................................................... E-55
22. Maintenance Guideline of Ship Electronic Device ........................................................... E-62
A. General Information
(Before you begin)
1. Cautions for high voltage
High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the
electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any danger during normal
operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance, inspection and adjustment of their
internal components. (Maintenance, check-up and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are
prohibited except by maintenance specialists.)
High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death
from electric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may sometimes lead to a death from
electric shock. When you touch any parts inside these devices, before doing so, you should make
it a rule to turn off the power switch to prevent such an accident caused by electric shock, and
discharge capacitors with a wire surely earthed on an end and make sure that internal parts are no
longer charged. Furthermore, when doing so, wearing dry cotton gloves protect you from such
danger. It is also necessary to put one of your hands in the pocket and not to use both your hands
at the same time.
It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent secondary accidents once you
were electrically shocked. If you are injured from electric shock, you disinfect the burn sufficiently
and give medical treatment to it promptly.
A-1
2. What to do for Electric Shock
When finding a victim of electric shock, you should call a person(s) near there, and turn off the
power source and earth the circuit immediately. If it is impossible for you to turn off the circuit
immediately, you should move the victim away promptly using insulators such as dry wood plate
and cloth without touching the victim directly.
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center
in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration may recover breathing. When
shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity.
First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, you should not move the
victim and practice artificial respiration on the victim immediately. Once respiration is started, it
should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Tell the accident to persons near there loudly and ask them to gather.
(2) Do not touch the victim confusedly as result of the accident, or rescuer may also get an
electric shock.
(3) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from the electric line.
(make sure whether places near there is safe.)
(4) Try to contact persons or offices concerted (Clinic, hospital, doctor, emergency call, etc.)
(5) Lay the victim on his back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(6) - a Feel the victim’s pulse.

-b Fell the victim’s heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.
-c Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face.
-d Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(7) Open the victim’s mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum if any. Keep
his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the
tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a
screwdriver and insert a towel in this mouth.)
(8) Then, clean the victim’s mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside the
mouth.
A-2
3. When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
Give a ( Mouth-to-mouth respiration ) Fig. 1
(1) Tilt the victim’s head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be inserted his neck.)
(2) Push the victim’s jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) Pinch the victim’s nostrils and take a deep breath, cover the victim’s mouth completely with
yours and blow into the victim’s mouth strongly. Take a deep breath again and blow into the
victim’s mouth. Continue this 10 to 15 times a minute (blocking his nostrils).
(4) Practicing artificial respiration, carefully watch whether the victim has recovered his natural
breathing, soon after the victim recovered, stop respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim’s mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of the victim’s
nostrils and take a deep breath and blow into it, blocking the victim’s other nostril and mouth
completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, the victim may try to stand up suddenly, but let the
victim lie calmly and serve the victim with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep the victim
warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)
Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head
(1) Raise the victim’s head. Support

①
his forehead with one of your hand and
his neck with the other hand. → ①
When you tilt his head backward, the
victim, in most cases, opens his mouth
to the air. This makes mouth-to-mouth
respiration easy.
② (2) Cover his mouth as widely as

possible with yours and press your
cheek against his nose → ②
Or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers
to prevent air from leaking. → ③
(3) Blow into lung.

Blowing into mouth until his breast
③ swells. Blow into his mouth as quickly
as possible 10 times at first.
Fig. 1 Mouth-to-mouth respiration
A-3
4. When both pulse and breathing have stopped
Give a (Cardiac massage) Fig. 2
When pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is heard, cardiac
arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed.
(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of his breastbone
and compress his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his breast so that it is
dented about 2 cm (Repeat compressing his beast 50 times / minute or so).
(Cardiac massage)
(2) In case of one rescuer,
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly, and
repeat his combination.
(3) In case of two rescuers,
One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow into his mouth
once, and they shall repeat this combination. (Perform the cardiac massage and
mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(4) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned to normal, stop
he artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and
calm while watching him carefully. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)
① ②
③
④
Fig. 2 Cardiac massage
A-4
5. Observance of Safety Routine Rules at Work
1 Working clothes Wear long sleeve jacket and button the wristbands, regardless
of heat and cold, and not be untidily dressed.
Wear safety hat/helmet, safety belt, gaiters and a hard hat, a
security zone, a gaiter, safety shoes at the shipyard in particular
2 Protective goods Make sure of safety before use of protective goods.
Safety belt Use a safety belt above the height of 2 m
Put a sling hook of safety belt on place 2 m higher than waist

At work at higher places or in shipyards, wear safety hat or
Safety hat or helmet
helmet and tighten a chin belt.
Gap between inner clothes of helmet and helmet is at least 25
mm.
Protective glasses and earplug Put on dust-proof glasses against dust while grinding or chipping
and put on earplug at noisy places.
3 Check / maintenance of Check your own tools by yourself before use of it and make sure
appliance / tools whether it is safe.
Use proper tools and do not use temporary tools.

Always clear up things around you and set up it in order and clear
4 Clear and put up in order
up after work is finished.
5 Passage Do not pass through under Cargo handling places and container
yards and Crane etc.
Walk along the proper passage in shipyards or customer’s yards
etc.
6 Work at high places Use a safety belt surely.
Be careful enough not to drop your tools below.
7 Transportation Do not lift heavy equipment etc. over 30 kg alone.

While transporting by crane onboard ships, on windy days, obey
orders of site supervisors.
While climbing up or down ladders, with tools etc. in knapsack,
use both hands.
8 Work onboard ships carrying Do not transmit radio waves during cargo handling.
dangerous cargos(Tanker etc.) Do not put on hobnailed shoes.
Do not smoke at nonsmoking areas.
9 Work at ship’s bottom Make sure whether gaser are not exist by using gas (oxygen
etc) measuring devices.
At least two persons work together for emergency case.
Use worklights with metal-protective gaurd and bring flashlight(s).

Take safety lectures of each shipyard and work in accordance
10 Work in shipyards
with shipyard safety rules.
Before starting work, decide a leader of work and obey his
11 Group work
orders.
Work together in harmony communicating with each other if
dangerous situation may exist.
A-5
12 Use of mobile phone If use of mobile phone onboard ships carrying dangerous cargo
etc. is restricted, obey rules of the ship.
Do not use mobile phone during driving. If telephoning is needed,
use hands-free phone not to disturb driving.
If a mobile phone is used at high place, fall-preventing
mechanism is applied to it.
13 Driving a car Check a car before driving
brake, lights, remaining amount of gasoline.
Observance of traffic rules
Use sheet belts and keep regulation speed.
Drive into company’s facilities or factory
Indicate Driving-Permission-in-yard and keep the company’s
traffic rules.
14 Use of data terminal equipment Use a camera after obtaining permission. (In particular onboard
ships carrying dangerous cargos, use flash after obtaining
permission.)
While downloading data from VDR etc. and updating software of
AIS, ECDIS and others, be careful of management of PC and
media and data in PC etc are possibly minimized not to lose data
brought in.
15 Smoking Do not smoke in smoking-restricted areas, and neither smoking
while walking nor working with a cigarette in your mouth is never
permitted.
Be fully careful of the fire after smoking.
A-6
6. Things taken into account at work
There are many things to know at work at radio stations. The followings below are especially
important.
6-1 Observance of Radio regulations and rules concerned
6-2 Observance of rules

You should not only observe the regulations and rules above, but you should also observe
rules of each port or each ship. Especially onboard ships which carry dangerous cargos,
when fire work is carried out and radio waves are transmitted or work is done on open deck
such as compass deck, permission should be obtained before work is started.
6-3 No permission to transmit radio waves by unqualified persons

When transmissions of radio waves are needed during repairing or maintenance, work should
be carried out under observation of ship’s qualified persons.
6-4 Dummy antenna may be used during adjustment of transmitters if possible.
6-5 Whatever equipment may be operated, distress signals should not be

transmitted even through dummy antenna. ( Note 1 )
If distress signals were transmitted by accident, nearby Competent Authority’s Radio station
or Coast Radio Stations should be immediately informed of what happed.
Contents to be informed
① Ship’s name
② Call sign
③ the time of transmission and the time of ceasing transmitting
④ the reason why erroneously transmitted
Note1 : When maintenance or test of EPIRBs is carried out onboard ships, and radio wave
shielded confined room such as engine control room etc. should be used not to transmit radio
wave outside the ship (If an antenna is there, it should be removed temporally.) and stop
transmission soon after test is over.
MEMO
A-7
B. GMDSS
About GMDSS rule－
The content described in this chapter is based on Japanese rule. There are many rules
in common, but for your sake,it is best to contact with a Competent Authority or a
classification authority, since some points do differ depending on the country and /
orclassification authority. Please refer the document issued by IMO and SOLAS.
1. Entery into Force

The Conference of Contracting Government to SOLAS for amendment to the 1974 SOLAS
Convention (for introduction of GMDSS) and the 1978 Protocol was held in the headquarters of
IMO in London, from 31 October to 11 November, in 1988, and the draft amendment was adopted.
This Convention entered into force on 1 February, 1992.
2. Background of GMDSS Introduction

Background of introduction of GMDSS is as follows. In the 25th MSC (Maritime Safety
Committee) held in 1972, MSC determined to consider the developments of maritime distress and
safe system, and discussion of developmets of it was started at the 19th Sub-Committee on
Radiocommunication (COM) in 1978. Study on it and discussion were continued for the long
term of about 10 years until the 34th COM held in January, 1988. Finally, in the 55th MSC held in
April, 1988, the agreement of the requirements to a vessel, such as performance standards and
requirements for operation and installation of GMDSS equipment, was reached on the whole as
the amendments to the SOLAS Convention.
The present distress and safe system sends alerts (signals) for mainly asking other vessels
navigating near the own ship for rescue, and is a rescue system between vessels chiefly. The
radio voice telecommunication by 2182kHz and 156.8MHz for all ships not less than 300 GT, or
Morse telegraphic communication by 500kHz for all ships not less than 1600 GT, was required to
be fitted with according to the 1974 SOLAS Convention.
However, the following restriction or limitationhas been found.
(a) Since there were some kinds of restrictions or limitations, such as a short range
communication of 100-150 nautical miles, transmission by hand, hearing by ears,etc.
it was difficult to keep communicating rapidly and without fails.
(b) As different systems are required on the basis of ship’s type or size, communication between
ships was sometimes not possible.
Therefore, the necessity for modernization of these systems came out.
Moreover, In order to secure victims in the sea quickly and effectively, the international Convention
(International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue, 1979:SAR Convention), aiming at
establishing cooperation between neighboring states for carrying out search and rescue, was
adopted.
In order to employ effectively the search and rescue schemes specified in the SAR
Convention, the necessity of supportive and effective communication for distress and safety
navigation has been recognized, and development and introduction of GMDSS were surely made.
And IMO has tried to introduce a new comprehensive system, considering the coming future, for
developing a global maritime distress alert system by introducing the latest techniques in
Radiocommunication which has been rapidly progressing.
3. Outline of GMDSS Introduction

As mentioned above, GMDSS equipment of which operation mainly used to depend on
manual operation has changed to automatically-operated equipment and it has been operated
through land and the seas, and then, even if ships come across the distress in any sea, distress
alert signals transmitted from them can be received by not only ships navigating nearby but also
by land search and rescue stations without fails. Accordingly, a communication link will be
B-1
established as a link on line through ship and Rescue Coordination Center on land. Consequently,
more effective communication and search and rescue operation in distress has been possible.
For that purpose, it is necessary to install equipment which enables equipment to be much
more easily operated and exchange various information quickly. That is, the ships for 1974 SOLAS
Convention are equipped with commonly required minimum equipment, and also in accordance
with the sea areas (divided into 4 sea areas) in which each ship navigate, by using INMARSAT
Ship Earth Station, Satellite communication equipment of EPIRB,etc. using INMARSAT
Geostationary Satellite system, radio system using automation technology by the new radio
telecommunication technology using digital selective calling (DSC) and narrow band direct printer
telegraphy (NBDP) and using digital technologies, and land-based communication system using
HF Radio Telephone (RT) ,etc. , even if ships are navigating in any sea area, they can transmit
and receive distress and safety signals to and from ships navigating nearby and land search and
rescue stations Therefore, also in the International Telecommunication Union (ITU), amendments
to Radio Regulation (R. R.), about the frequency used for this system and the management
procedure of the system, was adopted in World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile
Services (Geneva, 1987) held in Geneva in September, 1987 and resolution and guideliene,etc.
were also adopted.
B-2
4. Image of GMDSS operation
Polar oribit satellite
Geostationary
satellite
LUT (Local
Users Terminal)
Land Earth
Station
Ship in distress
Rescue vessel
(SAR organization)
RCC (Rescue
Coordination Center)
Other RCC(s)
Shore Radio
Station
Ship
(normally navigating)
Ship normally navigating
(Rescue vessel)
Communication patterns in GMDSS operation

F1: alert from ship to land (INMARSAT, DSC, and EPIRB)
F2: alert from land to ship (INMARSAT, DSC and EPIRB)
F3: alert from ship to ship (DSC)
F4: communication for cordination (NBDP, R/T)
F5: on-site communication (R/T)
F6: locating (radar transponder, radar)
F7: alert for navigation (INMARSAT, NBDP and R/T)
F8: general communication (INMARSAT, NBDP and R/T)
F9: Bridge-to-Bridge Communication (R/T)
B-3
5. Function and Advantage of GMDSS
Communication
Communication area Communication methods Advantage
Type
Distress report Wrecked ships VHF (Ch 70) & MF (2182kHz), - Not only ships navigating
ship DSC nearby but land stations
can be notified without fail.
VHF/MF/HF DSC, NBDP, and
Land
Stations Radiotelephony - Stations can be linked
automatically and rapidly
INMARSAT TLX without fail
Satellite EPIRB
Search & Rescue headquarters VHF/MF/HF DSC, NBDP, and - Since the minimum
Rescue Radiotelephony communicable range is
Communication 100-150 nautical miles,
Rescue boat Ships and land stations
may be unable to be
notified other than ships
Ships INMARSAT TLX navigating nearby and
navigating close near land station.
nearby
On-site Wrecked ship
Communication
Rescue boat
Ships
navigating
nearby
Communication ships ships - Communications can be
in general established between ships
in any seas in the world
Land and/or land stations
Stations anytime.
Homing signal Wrecked ship Satellite EPIRB - Since the position of a

Radar Transponder wrecked ship is known
correctly, prompt Search &
Rescue activities can be
Rescue boat performed.
Ships
navigating
nearby
Bridge to Ships Ships mainly VHF Radiotelephony
Bridge ---
communication
Marine safety Land Ships - Information about safety
NAVTEX
Information Station navigation, such as
EGC
broadcast weather information, is
MSI
obtained.
B-4
6. Terms on GMDSS
6-1 Bridge-to-bridge communications
Safety communications between ships from the position from which the ships are normally
navigated.
6-2 General radiocommunications

Operational and public correspondence traffic, other than distress, urgency and safety messages,
conducted by radio.
6-3 DSC ( Digital selective calling )

A technique using digital codes which enables a radio station to establish contact with, and
transfer information to, another station or group of stations. VHF, MF and MF/HF bands are used.
6-4 INMARSAT Ship Earth Station

The radio station installed in a ship in order to perform direct highly qualified communication
between a ship and a ship or between land (telephone and telex subscribers) and a ship
through the INMARSAT geostationary satellite.
There is standard C type (only telex communication and e-mail communication) using an
omnidirectional antenna, besides the standard B type (telex, telephone communication and
facsimile/data communication by telephone communication line(9600bps)) using a directinal
antenna. C type has been further developed aiming at the miniaturization in INMARSAT Ship
Earth Station of which the duty of installation is imposed by GMDSS.
6-5 NBDP ( Narrow Band Direct Printing telegraphy )

It performes automatical telefax communication with shore radio stations and with other ships,
connecting SSB radio equipmet
6-6 NAVTEX receiver

NAVTEX system is one of functions in WWNWS (World-Wide Navigational Warning Service)
which was established by IMO and IHO (International Hydrographic Organization).
NAVTEX receiver receives automatically and print the information, relating to navigation, weather
and Search/Rescue, broadcasted on the globally coordinated frequency (English: 518 kHz, Native
language: 490 kHz) from shore station to the ships navigating within the sea areas 400NM away
from shores.
It receives the information broadcasted from the International NAVTEX service.
According to the revised performance standards for NAVTEX, NAVTEX installed on or after 1 July
2005 is permitted to receive two NAVTEX signals (518KHz+490KHz or 518KHz+4209.5KHz)
simultaneously and its output data can be displayed on a screen.
6-7 MSI ( Maritime Safety Information ) receiver

Navigational and meteorological warnings, meteorological forecasts and other urgent safety
related messages broadcasted to ships. As MSI receivers, there are NAVTEX reviver,
INMARSAT EGC receiver and MF band MHI receiver.
6-8 EGC ( Enhanced Group Call )

Highly qualified INMARSAT group receiver (EGC:Enhanced Group Call)
It can recive automatically the information transferred through INMARSAT by adding the receiver
of exclusive use to INMARSAT Ship Earth Station.
6-9 Locating
Finding of ships, aircraft, units or persons in distress.
6-10 HF band MSl receiver

It receives information of MSI broadcasted on HF band, using NBDP. In GMDSS, it can use
depending on conditions.
B-5
6-11 Polar orbiting satellite service
A service is based on polar orbiting satellites which receive and relay distress alerts from satellite
EPIRBs and which provides their position.
6-12 Satellite EPIRB: Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon using

satellite
When a ship sinks, Radio Beacon is automatically released and floats on the sea-surface free (or
in the lifeboat) and is automatically activated, and transmit a distress alert to land statins through
the polar orbiting satellite service. There is an L band EPIRB which used the COSPAS/SARSAT
satellite in this satellite EPIRB.
6-13 Radar Transponder for Search and Rescue

When a ship is wrecked or sinks, Radar Transponder is automatically released and floats on the
sea-surface free (or in the lifeboat) and is automatically activated or is carrried by one person in
any survival claft and transmits automatically homing signals. In addition, it receives radar signals
(9GHz band) radiated from ships and reflects the responding signals, and then when any ship
receive the reflected signal from the transponder, its radar display indicates the wrecked ship
position on its radar display.
6-14 AIS ( Automatic Identification System )

AIS identifies ships automatically using VHF radio device.
AIS broadcasts navigational information of own ship’s position, course, speed etc. and ship’s
name or cargo etc. by TDMA method periodically with VHF band. In addition, AIS receives always
such information broadcasted from other ships and display those data. Two frequencies for the
high seas are used (CH 87B 161.975MHz, CH 88B 162.025MHz).
6-15 SSAS ( Ship Security Alert System )

In the case that harmful attacks such as terrorism etc. are given to a ship, a SSAS installed the
ship transmits a security alert to the shore to indicate to a competent authority that the security of a
ship is under threat or has been compromised. It is expected that the Maritime security will be
much more developed by introducing this system.
6-16 VDR ( Voyage Data Recorder )

VDR records information concerning ship’s position, course, speed, physical status, conversarion
in the bridge etc. to identify the cause(s) of an incident. VDR is for new constructed ships, and
S-VDR (Simplified-Voyage Data Recorder) is isntalled on board exsisting cargo ships. The
performance standards of S-VDR is relaxed in comparison with VDR and it is positioned as a
simplified VDR as the name shows.
6-17 LRIT ( Long Range Identification and Tracking of ships )

LRIT transmits automatically the ship’s identity, position etc. to the data center on the land.
As a result, it is expected to be possible to grasp the status of ships all over the world.
Amendments to SOLAS chapter V was adopted by IMO MSC. 81 held in May 2006 and ships
noted below are required to be fitted with LRIT according to the amendments. The amendments
has already entered into force on 1 Jan 2008. The LRIT Carriage requirements applies to
Mandatory ships on or after 31 December 2008.
Note: passenger ships (including high-speed passenger craft), cargo ships (including high-speed
craft) of 300 gross tonnage and upwards, mobile offshore drilling units.
B-6
7. Range of the application of SOLAS ( Safety of Life at Sea )
treaty
7-1 Application
Unless expressly provided otherwise, the present regulations apply only to ships engaged on
international voyages.
Exceptions:
1. Ships of war and troopships.
2. Cargo ships of less than 500 gross tonnage.
3. Ships not propelled by mechanical means．
4. Wooden ships of primitive build.
5. Pleasure yachts not engaged in trade.
6. Fishing vessels.
＊ The details refer to a Regulation 1 Application Regulation 3
7-2 Requirements for ships and life-saving appliances

All passenger ships and all cargo ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards.
life-saving appliances: Two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus and Radar transponders
＊ The details refer to a CHAPTER Ⅲ Requirements for ships and life-saving appliances
Regulation 6 Communications
7-3 Radiocommunications
Unless expressly provided other wise, this chapter applies to all ships to which the present
regulations apply and to cargo ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards．
＊ The details refer to a CHAPTER IV Radiocommunications Regulation 1 Application
7-4 Terms and definitions

1. Sea area A1 means an area within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one VHF
coast station in which continuous DSC alerting is available，as may be defined by a
Contracting Government.＊＊＊
2. Sea area A2 means an area，excluding sea area Al，within the radiotelephone coverage
of at least one MF coast station in which continuous DSC alerting is available，as may be
defined by a Contracting Government．＊＊＊
3. Sea area A3 means an area，excluding sea areas Al and A2，within the coverage of an
INMARSAT geostationary satellite in which continuous alerting is available．
4. Sea area A4 means an area outside sea areas Al，A2 and A3．
＊ The details refer to a CHAPTER IV Radiocommunications Regulation 2
7-5 Safety of navigation

1. Unless expressly provided otherwise，this chapter shall apply to all ships on all voyages，
except：
1) warships，naval auxiliaries and other ships ・・・・・・・・・・・・
2) ships solely navigating the Great Lakes of North America and ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
2. The Administration shall determine to what extent the provisions of regulations 15，16，17，
18，19，20，21，22，23，24，25，26，27 and 28 do not apply to the following categories of
Ships：
1) ships below 150 grosstonnage engaged on any voyage；
2) ships below 500 grosstonnage not engaged on international voyages；and
3) fishing vessels．
＊ The details refer to a CHAPTER V Safety of navigation Regulation 1 Application
B-7
7-6 Reference
Carriage requirements for shipborne navigational systems and equipment
1. All ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards and passenger ships irrespective of size
shall, ・・・・・・・・・・
Echo sounder / Radar (9GHz) / ATA / Speed log / THD (300-500 gross tonnage)
2. All ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards engaged on international voyages and cargo
ships of 500 gross tonnage and upwards not engaged on international voyages and
passenger ships irrespective of size shall be fitted with an automatic identification system
(AIS)，as follows：
3. All ships of 3000 gross tonnage and upwards ・・・・・・・・・・
3GHz Radar 1 set + 9GHz Radar 1 set, ATA 2 sets
4. All ships of 10,000 gross tonnage and upwards ・・・・・・・・・
ARPA 1 set
5. All ships of 50,000 gross tonnage and upwards ・・・・・・・・
a speed and distance measuring device，or other means，to indicate speed and distance
over the ground in the forward and athwartships direction.
＊ The details refer to a CHAPTER V Safety of navigation Regulation 19
Voyage data recorders (VDR)

1.To assist in casualty investigations，ships, when engaged on international voyages，sbject
to the provisions of regulation 1.4，Shall be fitted with a voyage data recorder （VDR） as
follows：
1) passenger ships constructed on or after 1 July 2002；
2) ro – ro passenger ships constructed before 1 July 2002 not later than the first survey on or
after 1 July 2002；
3) passenger ships other than ro – ro passenger Ships constructed before 1 July 2002 not
later than 1 January 2004；and
4) ships, other than passenger ships，of 3,000 gross tonnage and upwards constructed on or
after 1 July 2002．
2.To assist in casualty investigations，Cargo ships，when engaged on international voyages，
shall be fitted with a VDR which may be a simplified voyage data recorder （S－VDR）
as follows：
1) in the case of cargo ships of 20,000 gross tonnage and upwards constructed before
1 July 2002，at the first scheduled dry – docking after 1 July 2006 but not later than 1 July
2009；
2) in the case of cargo ships of 3,000 gross tonnage and upwards but less than 20,000
gross tonnage constructed before 1 July 2002，at the first scheduled dry - docking after
1 July 2007 but not later than 1 July 2010；and
3) Administrations may exempt cargo ships from the application of the requirements of
subparagraphs .1 and .2 when such ships will be taken permanently out of service within
two years after the implementation date specified in subparagraphs .1 and .2 above.
3.Administrations may exempt ships，other than ro – ro passenger ships，constructed before
1) July 2002 from being fitted with a VDR where it can be demonstrated that interfacing a
VDR with the existing equipment on the ship is unreasonable and impracticable.
＊ The details refer to a CHAPTER V Safety of navigation Regulation 20
B-8
B-9
8. Carriage Requirements for Ship Station of SOLAS Ship
8-1 Radio equipment to be fitted on board
SOLAS ship: engaged on International voyage + (Passenger ships, Cargo ships of 300 GT or upwards) etc.
Gross tonnage (GT)
20 100 150 300 500 1,000 3,000 10,000 50,000

Navigation Ship
No. Equipment Remarks 1 Remarks 2
Area Type
Number of sets
Auxiliary system
Passenger Maintenance requirements
VHF (incl. DSC) + VHF DSC
1 A1 A2 A3 A4 ship 1set 1set 1. A1,A2: one among auxiliary system, land
listening watch receiver
Cargo ship maintenance and onboard maintenance is
① selected.
A1 A4 : only when Inmarsat ship station is
MF Radio equipment (incl. DSC） 2. A3,A4: two among auxiliary system, land
Passenger selected in A3 sea area
2 + MF DSC listening watch 1set 1set maintenance and onboard maintenance are
①
receiver A2 A3 ship selected
Cargo ship 3. Auxiliary system
A1 A2 - Alternative apparatus: not necessary 1) VHF (incl. DSC) , unnecessary DSC
MF/HF Radio equipment (incl. when Inmarsat ship station (B,C type)+ listening watch receiver.
3 DSC+NBDP）+ MF/HF DSC Passenger 1set 1set 2) MF/HF Radio equipment (incl. DSC+NBDP)
A3 A4 ship MF Radio apparatus are equipped on
Listening watch receiver board a ship navigating in A3 sea area + MF/HF DSC listening watch receiver or
Cargo ship INMARSAT(INM-B or INM-C).
A1 A2 A4 - if equipped as an alternative to existing
MF/HF Radio apparatus, MF Radio
4 Inmarsat Ship Earth staton Passenger 1set 1set apparatus is necessary.
A3 ship - if equipped as an Auxiliary apparatus, it is
B-10
an auxiliary apparatus of MF/HF.
Cargo ship
Passenger Other than 518kHz, 490kHz 、 4209.5kHz Entered into force on 1 July 2005
5 NAVTEX Receiver A1 A2 A3 A4 ship 1set were added
Cargo ship
Passenger EGC is not necessary when naviagtng only
6 EGC A1 A2 A3 A4 ship 1set in a NAVTEX reception area.
Cargo ship
Passenger *COSPAS/SARSAT system is equipped.
7 Sattelite EPIRB A1 A2 A3 A4 ship 1set *Inmarsat system is not accepted for use in
Cargo ship A4 area.
It can be equipped instead of satellite
8 VHF EPIRB A1 1set
EPIRB.
Passenger ② : more than 1/4 sets to the number of life
Radar Transponder (Search and 2set②
9 A1 A2 A3 A4 ship boats are to be added.
rescue locating devices)
Cargo ship 1-2 set 1set 2set → → → →
Passenger ③ : For two-way radiocommunications For a high-speed rescue boats fitted with
Two-way Radiotelephone 3set③
10 A1 A2 A3 A4 ship between ship and airplane, a mandatory system, a hands-free two-way
apparatus radiotelephony set is to be added. radiotelephony is required.
Cargo ship 2-3 sets 2set 3set → → → →
Passenger * A radiotelephony set is to be added for
AIS (Automatic Identification
11 A1 A2 A3 A4 ship 1set two-way radiocommunications between
System)
Cargo ship ship and airplane.
Passenger not later than the first survey of the radio
LRIT (Long-range identification ship installation after 31 December 2008
12 A1 A2 A3 A4 1set
and tracking of ships)
Cargo ship
Passenger GPS fitted before 1 July 2007 is accepted.
13 GPS (Global Positioning System) A1 A2 A3 A4 ship 1set
Cargo ship
Gross tonnage (GT)
20 100 150 300 500 1,000 3,000 10,000 50,000

Navigation Ship
No. Equipment Remarks 1 Remarks 2
Area Type
Number of sets
Auxiliary system
It can be used in common with other
Radiocommunication apparatus mandatory ships.
14 A1 A2 A3 A4 1set
between ship and land)
Passenger Distress alert receiving funciton is fitted

15 Distress alert operation panel 1set
ship together.
- 2 radars (for a ship of 3,000 GT or New IMO rule was applied on or after 1 July
upwards) （ 2nd set is of S band type. 2008.
EPA Passenger Where the Administration considers
EPA → → → → ATA → → ARPA →
RADAR ＋ ATA ship appropriate, a second 9 GHz radar is
ARPA accepted.
16 1-2set - One set is accepted as ATA. (for a ship of
Cargo ship EPA ATA → → ARPA → 10,000 GT or upwards)
Minimum operational display area

180mm 250mm → → 320mm →
diameter (mm)
Passenger for a ship of 50,000 GT or upwards, both

Speed and distance measuring
17 ship 1set SDME for over the ground and through the
device (LOG)
Cargo ship water are required.
Passenger
Echo-sounding device ship
18 1set
(E/S)
Cargo ship
B-11
Passenger
VDR
19 ship 1set
(Voyage data recorder)
Cargo ship
Passenger
THD
20 ship 1set
(Transmiting Heading Device)
Cargo ship
Passenger - Passenger ships: over 500 GT, Tankers: Planned as follows.
ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display over 3,000 GT, other Cargo ships: over Passenger ships: 1 July 2012
ship 1set
and information system) 10,000 GT
Cargo ship Tankers: 1 July 2013
21 Other Cargo ships: 1 July 2014
It is required if paper charts are not carried
Backup ECDIS 1set Apply to all the ships fitted with ECDIS on board. Existing ships: 2014/7/1 to be phased subject to
ship type.
* Cargo ship: ships other than passenger ships
2009.01.26
2) SOLAS Chapter V Carriage Requirements Regulation 19 and 20 (JRC products)
Ship gross tonnage (GT) as at 26 January 2009
No Equipment The requirements for loading Remarks
20 150 300 500 1,000 3,000 10,000 50,000 JRC products examples
1st Radar (X band) (1) JMA-5200 MKII series (18 cm) MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388
Passenger ship All the ships Passenger ships
Display effective diameter (2) JMA-5300 MKII series (25 cm) MSC.191 (79)/IEC 62288
MSC192 (79) International (3) JMA-7100 series (25 cm) applies to after 2007/7/1.
Except a Othe than passenger ships
1 150-499 GT: 180-mm Convention for ≥ 300GT (4) JMA-9100 series (32 cm)
passenger ship
500-9,999 GT: 250 mm SOLAS (5) JMA-900B series (32 cm)
≥ 10,000 GT: 320 mm
(effctive after 1 July 2008)
Radar with ATA superior to EPA can be MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388
installed. MSC.191 (79)/IEC 62288
International Passenger ship <500GT Passenger ships (1) JMA-5200 MKII series (18 cm) applies to after 2007/7/1.
Electronic plotting Aids (EPA) Convention for (2) JMA-5300 MKII series (25 cm)
2 SOLAS Except a (3) JMA-7100 series (25 cm)
MSC.192(79) 300 GT ≤ △ < 500GT Other than
passenger ship passenger (4) JMA-9100 series (32 cm)
ships (5) JMA-900B series (32 cm)
(1) JMA-5200 MKII series (18 cm) MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388

International Passenger ship (2) JMA-5300 MKII series (25 cm) MSC.191 (79)/IEC 62288
Automatic Tracking Aids (ATA) Convention for ≥ 500GT Ship (3) JMA-7100 series (25 cm) applies to after 2007/7/1.
3 SOLAS Except a
MSC.192(79) (4) JMA-9100 series (32 cm)
passenger ship
(5) JMA-900B series (32 cm)
2nd Radar (S band *) (2) JMA-5300 MKII series (25 cm) MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388
International Passenger ship (3) JMA-7100 series (25 cm) MSC.191 (79)/IEC 62288
MSC.192 (79) Ship
4 Convention for ≥ 3,000GT (4) JMA-9100 series (32 cm) applies to after 2007/7/1.
* X band: is acceptable if the Except a
SOLAS (5) JMA-900B series (32 cm)
Administration permits. passenger ship
(2) JMA-5300 MKII series (25 cm) MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388
2nd Automatic Tracking Aids International Passenger ship (3) JMA-7100 series (25 cm) MSC.191 (79)/IEC 62288
5 (2nd ATA) Convention for 3,000 GT≤ △ < 10,000GT Ship (4) JMA-9100 series (32 cm) applies to after 2007/7/1.
MSC.192(79) SOLAS Except a
(5) JMA-900B series (32 cm)
passenger ship
B-12
(4) JMA-9100 series (32cm ARPA) MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388
Automatic Radar Plotting Aids International Passenger ship
(5) JMA-900B series (32cm ARPA) MSC.191 (79)/IEC 62288
6 (ARPA) Convention for ≥ 10,000GT Ship
applies to after 2007/7/1.
MSC.192(79) SOLAS Except a
passenger ship
Carriage requirements for radar
(on or after 1 July 2008)
300GT 500GT 3,000GT 10,000GT
X band
180 mm X band X, S band X, S band
250 mm 250 mm 320 mm
JAN-901B MSC.232 (82)/ IEC 61174

International Convention for SOLAS Carriage requirements is to be adopted by MSC86 (May, 2009). Ship JAN-701B applies to after 2009/1/1.
Passenger ship: >500GT, Tanker: >3000GT, Cargo ship: >10,000GT
7 Chart etc.(ECDIS) Passenger ship >500GT, tanker >3000GT, cargo JAN-2000 MSC.191 (79)/ IEC 62288
2012/7/1- , 2013/7/1- , 2014/7/1
Existing ships: to be phased after 1 July 2014 subject to ship type boat >10,000GT applies to after 2008/7/1.
Exemption of paper charts is subject to
All the ships already fitted with JAN-901B the Administration.
International Convention for SOLAS Ship
Backup ECDIS ECDIS JAN-701B
(required if electronic charts are JAN-2000
8
carried instead of paper charts
etc.)
International passenger ships JLR-7700Mk2 MSC.114(73)/IEC 61108-1

International Passenger ship
Satellite navigation equipment JLR-7800 (MED acquisition is
9 Convention for All the ships scheduled.)
(GPS/DGPS) Except a Other than International passenger ships
SOLAS JLR-7500 (MED acquisition is
passenger ship
scheduled )
JFE-582(Paper Type) MSC.74(69) Anx.4/ISO 9875
International Passenger ship All the ships Passenger ships
JFE-585(Paper Type)
10 Echo sounder Convention for JFE-380 (LCD Type without Printer)
SOLAS Except a equivalent to equipment
≥ 300GT Other than passenger ships JFE-680 (LCD Type with Printer)
passenger ship required for a ship <300GT
2) SOLAS Chapter V Carriage Requirements Regulation 19 and 20 (JRC products)
Ship gross tonnage (GT) as at 26 January 2009
No Equipment The requirements for loading Remarks
20 150 300 500 1,000 3,000 10,000 50,000 JRC products examples
JLN-205 MSC.96(72)/IEC 61023
Speed and Distance Measuring International Passenger ship All the ships Passenger ships
Equipment (Through the water) Convention for
(SDME) SOLAS Except a Othe rthan passenger ships
≥ 300GT
11 passenger ship
International JLN-550 MSC.96(72)/IEC 61023
Speed and Distance Measuring ship
Convention for ≥ 50,000GT
Equipment (over the water) (SDME)
SOLAS
JLR-20/JLR-30 MSC.116(73)/ISO 22090-3
Passenger ship <500GT Passenger ships
International
Transmitting Heading Device
12 Convention for
(THD) Except a Other than
SOLAS 300 GT≤ △ <500GT passenger ships
passenger ship
JHS-182 MSC.74(69) Anx.3/IEC 61993-2
Passenger ship All the ships International passenger ships
International
Automatic Identification System An owner Non-International passenger ships
13 Convention for ≥ 300GT
(AIS) Except a international
SOLAS
passenger ship A non- Other than International passenger ships
≥ 500GT
international
An owner JCY-1800 IMO A.861(20)/IEC 61996-1SN.
International Passenger ship All the ships International passenger ships
international Circ.246
Voyage Data Recorder Convention for MSC.214 (81)
14 SOLAS Except a An owner Other than International passenger ships
(VDR) ≥ 3,000GT applies to after 2008/6/1.
passenger ship international
JCY-1850 IMO A.861(20)/IEC 61996-1SN.

Other than International passenger ships
International Circ.246
Simplified Voyage Data Recorder Except a An owner
15 Convention for ≥ 3,000GT MSC.214 (81)
(S-VDR) passenger ship international
SOLAS applies to after 2008/6/1.
Long-Range Identification and JUE-85 MSC.202 (81) Carriage Requirements

Passenger ship All the ships Other than International passenger ships
International JUE-95LT MSC.263 (84) Performance Standards
B-13
Tracking of Ships (LRIT)
16 Convention for
to be fitted with it after 31 Dec 2008 Except a An owner
SOLAS >=300GT Other than International passenger ships
(subject to navigating sea area) passenger ship international
International - MSC.XXX (86) Carriage Requirements
Passenger ship All the ships Other than International passenger ships
Convention for (about to be adopted by MSC 86)
Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm SOLAS, MSC.128 (75) Performance Standards
17 system (BNWAS) Carriage Other than International passenger ships
to be fitted with it after 1 July 2011 requirement is to Except a An owner
≥ 150GT
be adopted by MSC passenger ship international
86
9. Maintenance etc. of Radio Equipment
1. On passenger ships and cargo ships of 300 GT and upwards, which are engaged on
international voyages and navigate in sea area A3 and A4, the availability of radio equipment
shall be ensured by using a combination of at least two methods shown below such as
duplication of equipment, shore-based maintenance or at-sea electronic maintenance
capability, as may be approved by the Administration. To ascertain what items are selected, a
document which describes it is to be prepared and carried on board.
(According to SOLAS, it is to be described in Safey Radio Certificate.)
(1) Duplication of It means that an auxiliary radio equipment is fitted.

equipment * Refer to the next page.
It means that, in order to ensure the availability of radio equipment,
(2) Shore-based
a qualified engineer (except crew) checks and repairs the said
maintenance
equipment periodically.
(3) Onboard It means that, in order to ensure the availability of radio equipment,
maintenance qualified crew check and repair the said equipment.
2. On ships (other than passenger ships), which are not engaged on international voyages and
navigate in sea area A1 and A2, and on ships other than passenger ships engaged on
international voyages, which navigate in sea area A3 and A4, any one method among three
methods (1), (2), (3) shown above is used.
3. Satellite EPIRB
1) Annually tested for all aspects of operational efficiency.
2) The test maybe conducted onboard the ship or at an approved testing station.
3) Subject to maintenance at intervals not exceeding five years，to be performed at an
approved shore – based maintenance facility.
＊ The details refer to a SOLAS CHAPTER IV Radiocommunications Regulation 15

Maintenance requirements
B-14
10. Duplication of Equipment
Sea
Voyage type Auxiliary Radio Equipment
area
A4 Passenger ships (a) NBDP, R/T, DSC, DSC W/R by HF and MF

etc. (b) R/T and DSC by VHF, ( referred to as VHF Radio Equipment below)
engaged on
International Note In the case of the vessel which cruises only single time, when it replaces with (b)
voyage and a government office accepts, it can restrict, and it can be replaced with INMARSAT
DP.
Ships other than (ｲ) Either the following (1) or (2) Radio Equipment
Passenger ships (1) NBDP, DSC, DSC W/R by HF
etc. (2) R/T, DSC, DSC W/R by HF
engaged on (b) VHF Radio Equipment (however, unnecessary for ships of less than 100 GT)
International
voyage Note: In the case of ships which navigate only for a short time, if the Administration permits,
it can be replaced with INMARSAT R/T or INMARSAT DP.
A3 Passenger ships (a) Either the following (1) or (2) Radio Equipment
etc. (1) NBDP, R/T, DSC, DSC W/R by HF and MF
engaged on (2) INMARSAT DP
International (b) VHF Radio Equipment
voyage
Ships other than (a) Any one among the following (1) to (4) Radio Equipment
Passenger ships (1) NBDP, DSC, DSC W/R by HF
etc. (2) R/T, DSC, DSC W/R by HF
engaged on (3) INMARSAT DP
International (4) INMARSAT R/T
voyage (b) VHF Radio Equipment (however, ships of less than 100 GT, and ships navigating 2-
hour limited coastal area (3 of Article 2 of Ship Equipment Regulation), etc. are
unnecessary)
A2 All the ships (a) Any one among the following (1) to (5) Radio Equipment
(1) NBDP, DSC, DSC W/R by HF
(2) R/T, DSC, DSC W/R by HF
(3) INMARSAT DP
(4) INMARSAT R/T
(5) MF R/T and MF DSC
(b) VHF Radio Equipment (however, unnecessary for ships of less than 100 GT)
Note: Ships as shown below other than passenger ship etc engaged on international
voyage. can be fitted with a general radiocommunication equipment etc. (except
Inmarsat R/T or Inmarsat DP) or MF Radiotelephone equipment (limited to equipment
which can exert radiocommunication on ship’s navigation between ship and shore
continuously)
(1) Ships of less than look GT
(2) Ships other than passenger ships navigating in a greater coasting area, as the
Administration permits.
A1 All the ships VHF Radio Equipment “Ships of less than 100GT other than passenger ship etc engaged
on international voyage. can be fitted with a general radiocommunication equipment etc. or
MF Radiotelephone Equipment (limited to equipment which can exert radiocommunication
on ship’s navigation between ship and shore continuously).”
* Passenger ships etc, engaged on international voyage means:

Passenger ships engaged on international voyage [ except ships of less than 300 G/T and
other than passenger ships, and fishing vessels of 300 GT and upward (engaged exclusively in
fishing)]
B-15
11. Emergency Source of Electrical Power
and Reserve Power
Reference
・SOLAS CHAPTER Ⅱ-1 Part D Electrical INSTALLATIONS Regulation 42, 43
・SOLAS CHAPTER IV Radiocommunications Regulation 13 Sources of energy
11-1 Electric Power Supply (Regarding fishing ship, Japanese rules are introduced below as well)
Application
Navigation Gross tonnage

International
Ship type area
voyage 300 500
(Japan)
Passenger ship Yes 36H

applies to ships constructed on
Emergency source of electrical
Ocean/ near
and after February 1, 1995.
No 18H
seas
Cargo ship. Yes Not apply 18H
Fishing ship
(includes product ship, Ocean/ near
No Not apply 18H
power (ES)
mother ship, and seas

government’s own ship)
Fishing ship Yes Not apply 0H
Passenger ship Yes ES: mandatory ship 1H

Moreover,
ES: When electric power

applies to ships
Not mandatory is supplied from ES

applies from the time of GMDSS shift about ships
Ocean/ near ship 1H

constructed on and after January 31, 1995 and
No
seas
When electric power
constructed on and after February 1, 1995.
is not supplied from

ES 6H
Cargo ship ES: mandatory ship 1H

(battery)
Not
ES: not mandatory ship
Fishing ship apply
(includes product ship, Ocean/ near
Reserve power (RS)
mother ship, and No When electric power

seas is supplied
government’s own ship) from ES 1H
Fishing ship When electric power

Not is not supplied
apply from ES 6H
Note: Maritime Competent Authority considers voyage feature of a ship concerned and admits it, required time can be
based on the time directed by the Authority. (Japan)
B-16
11-2 Power Supply system
INMARSAT MF/HF MF VHF GPS
DSC DSC DSC

RT DP RT NBDP DSC RT NBDP DSC RT DSC
WR WR WR
Main
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency
system
electric
power
Doubled
Emergency Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
system
Main Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
system
Auxiliary
power
Doubled
Emergency Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
system
Note: * Sufficient capacity is required to operate simultaneously equipment or system specified by Maritime Competent
Authority
* Auxiliary power is always supplied to VHF. Moreover, power can be switched to MF, or MF/MHF, or INMARSAT, and
the biggest power consumption in equipment is selected for requirement in this case.
* In equipment which the maritime competent Authority admits, there is a gyrocompass in Inmarsat of the main
system.
The electric supply time to this is separately directed by Maritime Competent Authority.
B-17
12. Assignment of Mariners for Radio Part on board
GMDSS ship
Qualification required for maintenance
Voyage
Ship Type Sea Area Tonnage Onboard Not onboard Remarks

maintenance maintenance
Passenger A1, A2 - 2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner

Ship
A3, A4 - 1 st Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner
less than
- -
300GT
A1, A2
not less
International voyage
2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner

than 300GT
Cargo Ship
less than
300GT
A3, A4
not less
than 300GT
A1, A2 - - -
Main equipment:
- 2 nd Class Mariner * 4 th Class Mariner
INMARSAT on board
Fishing Ship A3
Main equipment:
- 2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner
MF/HF on board.
A4 - 2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner
Passenger A1, A2 - - -
Non-International voyage
Ship
A3, A4 - 2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner
Cargo Ship A1, A2, A3, A4 - - -
A1, A2 - - -
Main equipment:
- 2 nd Class Mariner * 4 th Class Mariner
INMARSAT on board
Fishing Ship A3
Main equipment:
- 2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner
MF/HF on board
A4 - 2 nd Class Mariner 3 rd Class Mariner
- A mariner of each class in the list above is referred to as a mariner (electronic radiocommunications).
- The above-mentioned table does not apply, when applying old Ship Safety Law.
Example: Equivalent Fishing ships (Ships, to which the old law applies, is permitted to radiocommunicate with
Morse equipment etc.)
*: In the case of ships which are equipped with INMARSAT, if system is doubled with HF, the Third Class Mariner
(electronic communications) is required.
[ Relations between Radio Operator’s Radio Electronic Certificate of R. R. and Radio law ]
the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure the Ministry of Internal Affairs and International Convention
and Transport Communications (RR: Radio Regulation).
(Marine Personnel Low) (Radio Law)
First-class mariner First-class First-class
(Radiocommunications) General Radio operator Radio Electronic Certificate
(1st REC)
First-class mariner First-class Marine First-class
(Electronic Radiocommunications) Radio operator Radio Electronic Certificate
(1st REC)
Second class mariner Second class Marine Second class
(Electronic Radiocommunications) Radio operator Radio Electronic Certificate
(2nd REC)
Third class mariner Third class Marine General Operator’s Certificate
(Electronic Radiocommunications) Radio operator (GOC)
Fourth class mariner First-class Marine Restricted Operator’s Certificate
(Electronic Radiocommunications) Special Radio operator (ROC)
1st REC: First Class Radio Electronic Certificate

2nd REC: Second Class Radio Electronic Certificate
GOC: General Operator's Certificate
ROC: Restricted Operator' Certificate
B-18
13. Frequency used in GMDSS
Digital Selectiive Call Direct Printer Telegraphy Radio Telephone

Frequency band
(DSC) (NBDP:Narrow band Direct Print) (R/T)
VHF 156.525 MHz (ch70) 156.800 MHz (ch16)

156.650 MHz (ch13)
156.300 MHz (ch6)
MF 490 kHz
518 kHz (for NAVTEX)
2177.0 kHz 2174.5 kHz 2182.0 kHz
2187.5 kHz
HF 4207.5 kHz 4177.5 kHz 4125.0 kHz

4209.5 kHz *
4210.0 kHz **
6312.0 kHz 6268.0 kHz 6215.0 kHz
6314.0 kHz **
8414.5 kHz 8376.5 kHz 8291.0 kHz
8416.5 kHz **
12577.0 kHz 12520.0 kHz 12290.0 kHz
12579.0 kHz **
16804.5 kHz 16695.0 kHz 16420.0 kHz
16806.5 kHz **
19680.5 kHz **
22376.0 kHz **
26100.5 kHz **
Satellite INMARSAT (standard C) 1530.0 to 1545.0 MHz (reception) EGC

1626.5 to 1646.5 MHz (transmission)
Satellite EPIRB 406.0-406.1 MHz (406.025 MHz)

406.0-406.1 MHz (406.028 MHz)
406.0-406.1 MHz (406.037 MHz)
X band Radar transponder 9200.0 to 9500.0 MHz
* : for broadcast of NAVTEX form

** : for broadcast of marine safety information by MSI
B-19
14. JRC Products for Type Approval by Countries, Classification Societies and Others
June 2009
Country / Country Classification Society INM

Classification Society
/ and Others
MED
Russia
LR (UK)
NK (Japan)
RINA (Italy)
BV (France)
South Korea
CCS (China)
Equipment
INMARRSAT
GL (Germany)
DNV (Norway)
and Transport)
RMRS (Russia)
name
Communications)
Japan (Ministry of
KR (South Korea)
U.S. (FCC/USCG)
Internal Affairs and

Land, Infrastructure
(JRC model)
Japan (the Ministry of

JSS-296 Y Y Y Y Y
JSS-596 Y Y Y Y Y
MF/HF
JSS-896 Y Y Y Y
B-20
JSS-2150 O
JHS-32B Y Y Y Y Y Y
VHF JHS-770S Y Y Y Y Y O Y
JHS-780D Y Y Y Y O Y
Two Way JHS-7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
EPIRB JQE-103 Y Y Y Y Y Y
JQX-30A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
SART
Tron SART20 Y Y
NCR-700A Y Y
NAVTEX
NCR-333 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
/ and Others
MED
Russia
LR (UK)
NK (Japan)
RINA (Italy)
BV (France)
South Korea
CCS (China)
Equipment
INMARRSAT
GL (Germany)
DNV (Norway)
and Transport)
RMRS (Russia)
name
Communications)
Japan (Ministry of
KR (South Korea)
U.S. (FCC/USCG)

(JRC model)

INM -C JUE-85 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
INM Mini-C JUE-95 Y Y
INM Mini-C JUE-95VM Y
INM Mini-C JUE-95SA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
INM Mini-C JUE-95LT Y
B-21
INM -F77 JUE-410F Y Y Y Y
INM -F33 JUE-33 Y Y Y
INM -FBB JUE-250 Y Y
INM-FBB JUE-500 O
JMA-9912-10DA Y
JMA-9922-6/9XA Y Y Y Y Y Y
JMA-9923-7/9XA Y Y Y Y Y Y
RADAR
/ARPA JMA-9932-SA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
JMA-9933-SA Y Y Y Y Y Y
JMA-9953-9XA Y
/ and Others
MED
Russia
LR (UK)
NK (Japan)
RINA (Italy)
BV (France)
South Korea
CCS (China)
Equipment
INMARRSAT
GL (Germany)
DNV (Norway)
and Transport)
name RMRS (Russia)
Communications)
Japan (Ministry of
KR (South Korea)
U.S. (FCC/USCG)

(JRC model)

JMA-922M6/9XA Y Y Y Y
RADAR JMA-923M7/9XA Y Y Y Y
/ARPA JMA-932MSA Y Y Y Y
JMA-933MSA Y Y Y Y
ARPA/ATA JAS-9800 Y
B-22
JMA-5310-6 Y Y Y Y Y
RADAR JMA-5320-7/9 Y Y Y Y Y
JMA-5330-12 Y Y Y Y Y
ARPA/ATA JAS-5300W Y
JMA-5312-6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
RADAR
JMA-5322-7/9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
/ARPA
JMA-5332-12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
ARPA/ATA JAS-5302W Y
JMA-9110-6XA Y Y Y O Y
RADAR
JMA-9122-6/9XA Y Y Y Y Y Y O Y
/ARPA
JMA-9123-7/9XA Y Y Y Y Y O Y
/ and Others
MED
Russia
LR (UK)
NK (Japan)
RINA (Italy)
BV (France)
South Korea
CCS (China)
Equipment
INMARRSAT
GL (Germany)
DNV (Norway)
and Transport)
name RMRS (Russia)
Communications)
Japan (Ministry of
KR (South Korea)
U.S. (FCC/USCG)

(JRC model)

RADAR JMA-9132-SA Y Y Y Y Y Y O Y
/ARPA JMA-9133-SA Y Y Y Y Y O Y
ARPA/ATA JAS-9100 Y
JMA-7110-6XA Y Y Y Y
JMA-7122-6/9XA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
RADAR
B-23
JMA-7123-7/9XA Y Y Y Y
/ARPA
JMA-7132-SA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
JMA-7133-SA Y Y Y Y
ARPA/ATA JAS-7100 Y
JMA-922B-6/9XA Y Y Y Y
RADAR JMA-923B-7/9XA Y Y Y Y
/ARPA JMA-932B-SA Y Y Y Y
JMA-933B-SA Y Y Y Y
ARPA/ATA JAS-900B Y
JLR-7700MK2 Y Y Y Y Y Y
GPS
JLR-4331-NV Y Y
/ and Others
MED
Russia
LR (UK)
NK (Japan)
RINA (Italy)
BV (France)
South Korea
CCS (China)
Equipment
INMARRSAT
GL (Germany)
DNV (Norway)
and Transport)
name RMRS (Russia)
Communications)
Japan (Ministry of
KR (South Korea)
U.S. (FCC/USCG)

(JRC model)

GPS COMPASS JLR-30 Y Y Y O Y
JAN-901M Y Y Y Y
JAN-701 Y Y Y
ECDIS
JAN-701B/901B Y O
JAN-2000 Y
B-24
JAN-701/901M Y
TCS
JAN-701B/901B Y Y
VDR JCY-1800 Y Y Y Y Y
S-VDR JCY-1850 Y Y Y Y Y Y
JFE-582 Y Y Y Y
ECHO SOUNDER JFE-585 Y
JFE-680/380 Y Y Y Y Y
DOPPLER LOG JLN-205 Y Y Y
DOPPLER SONAR JLN-550 Y Y Y Y Y
Y : Type Approoved O: Under application Please ask persopns in charge of bisiness section conerned about detailes and equipment not listed here.
15. Radiocommunication-related Qualification
Certificate of Liberia Flag Ships
In GMDSS, regarding the Radiocommunication-related qualification for the Liberia flag ships,
the followings are required by Liberia Government.
1. Crew of the Liberia Flag Ships are required to have the Qualification Certificate (GOC or REC)
issued by the Liberia Government.
2. Radiocommunications Staff's Qualification and Number which are required of GMDSS Ships.
2-1. In the case that GMDSS equipment‘s maintenance in workshop for GMDSS Ships,
navigating across A1 sea area, is selected.
Two navigation officers who possess GOC, or
One full-time radio operator who posses 1st Class REC, or 2nd Class REC.
* The qualification certificate shall be that the Liberia government issues.
2-2. In the case that onboard maintenance of GMDSS equipment for GMDSS Ships,
An inquiry is required for Nippon Kaiji Kyokai.
GOC: It is "General Operator's Certificate" of Rule C, Chapter III A, Article 55th of ITU R
Radiocommunication Regulation.
REC: It is “1st class or 2nd class Radio Electronic Certificate" of Rule C, Chapter III A, Article
55th of ITU R Radiocommunication Regulation.
B-25
16. Radiocommunication-related Qualification
Certificate of Panama Flag Ships
In GMDSS, regarding the Radiocommunication-related qualification for the Panama flag ships,
the followings are required by Liberia Government.
1. Crew of the Panama Flag Ships are required to have the Qualification Certificate (GOC or REC)
issued by the Panama Government.
2. Radiocommunications Staff's Qualification and Number which are required of GMDSS Ships
2-1. In the case that GMDSS equipment‘s maintenance in workshop for GMDSS Ships,
Two on-duty navigation officers (Captain and one navigation officer, or two navigation
officer) who possess GOC, or
One full-time radio operator who posses GOC.
* The qualification certificate shall be a certificate that the Panama government issues.
2-2. In the case that onboard maintenance of GMDSS equipment for GMDSS Ships,
One full-time radio operator who possesses GMDSS Radio Electronic-First or second
class Qualification Certificate issued by the Panama government, and
One navigation officer who possesses GMDSS Radio Operator-Restricted, or General
Qualification Certificate issued by the Panama government
* A qualification certificate shall be that the Panama government issues.
"Acquisition of the Qualification Certificate issued by Panama Government”

Inquire of the following offices
Training Organization (Japan Case is shown below)

Japan Radio Institute
http://www.nichimu.or.jp/
GOC: It is "General Operator's Certificate" of Rule C, Chapter III A, Article 55th of ITU R
Radiocommunication Regulation.
REC: It is “1st class or 2nd class Radio Electronic Certificate" of Rule C, Chapter III A, Article
55th of ITU R Radiocommunication Regulation.
B-26
17. DSC ( Digital Selective Calling )
- DSC is the name of Communication Technology with which radio stations set up
communication links with other stations or groups and can transmit information using a digital
coded signals.
Generally, the word “DSC” is referred to as for calling the modulator and demodulator which
adopted DSC technology.
- The technical requirements of DSC is prescribed in “CCIR Recommendation 493-3 and
541-2.
Position information
f deflection = less than ±10 Hz
Frequency for DSC Distress
2187.5 kHz
4207.5 kHz 6312.0 kHz

8414.5 kHz 12577.0 kHz
16804.5 kHz
in the case that a DSC device is externally interfaced.
156.525MHz (CH70)
(Assigned frequency)
Band width = less than 300 Hz
Position information
Example(JSS-710): DSC is built in a console.
( DSC General Scheme )
B-27
Calling Calling Acknowledge
Frequency Identification Device
person method establishment
Morse etc. Radio operator
500 kHz Only Radio Auto keyer/
Previous by Manual/ identifies call sign unstable and low.
2182 kHz operator Auto alarm
Automatically by hearing..
MF/HF: less than
Anyone 3min,
2187.5 kHz Digital code DSC identifies
(Special-sk Watching VHF: immediately
DSC HF (9 bits) automatically not less than
ills is not DSC Call
VHF Automatic digital code called 95% within 300
needed)
miles.
( Comparison between previous and preset distress calling )

- In DSC operation, while many stations use it together at the same time with same frequency, a
specific station or groups can be designated or call sign can be broadcasted to all ships around.
Outline fo DSC communications is as follows.
1. Individual call , Group call or Call in whole from ship(s) and Coast Station(s)
2. Distress Call from ship(s)
3. Send the acknowledgement of Distress Call from Coast Station
4. Call for Relaying Distress Call
- In DSC operation, the text sentence such as telex and NBDP, which is used in INMARSAT, is not
used. The Information which is to be sent is chosen with the symbol number coded beforehand,
and is transmitted in pre-determined order.
Example: in the case of sending distress information in categories, the symbol number "112." Is
send.
- There are 128 sysmbols. For sending symbol, at first, erroneous characters is detected by 10-bit
BY code, and then, in order to further minimize the miswritten characters, all symbols are sent
twice every time with the symbols grouped into a group with 4 characters.
(It is called “time diversity”.)
Example: Symbol number 112 - BBBBYYY YBB
Information bit The number of B in

an information bits (binary)
B=0
Y=1
Wave Modulation
DSC Baud rate Specification Remarks
type frequency
F1B 1700±85 Hz CLASS A compatible with
For MF/HF 100 bauds
J2B 1700±85 Hz CCIR full specifications IMO requirements.
A1, for the small

F2B 1200 CLASS B
For VHF 1700±400 Hz ships of A2 ocean
G2B bauds with no group call
space
VHF For F2B 1200 fixed distress alert

1700±400 Hz CLASS C
transceivers G2B bauds (easy add-on type)
( Comparison of DSC )
B-28
Composition of DSC signals. In the case of distress call
(1) Dot pattern
In order to ensure synchronization certainly and fast, a B signal and a Y
Dot pattern signal are sent out by turns.
MF/HF distress sequence: 200 bits
Except for the above, and VHF: 20 bits
Synchronization
Sequence (2) Synchronizing sequence
Receiver synchronizes correctly and the position of information sent is
decided correctly.
Format
(2)
(3) Call type (format)
Assignment of Distress, all ships, individual, sea area, fleet call, or VHF
automatic service
Address
(5) (4) Identification of the someone who is called (address)
In other than distress and all ship calls, it is applicable, and when
pinpointing the area on geography and calling, the rectangle on a
Category mercato figure can be selected.
(1)
(5) Priority of a call (category)
ID When a call other than distress call is selected in (3), the priority, of
distress, emergency, safety, the pritority decision of ships, or narmal call,
(5)
is selected.
1
2) (6) Identification of own station
Telecommand and informing
The nine-digit number which the Competent Authority of the Flag State
2 assigns to the ships to which are entitled to fly its flag.
3)
(7) In * distress call, it consists of the following four reports.
3 Report 1: Kind of distress
3) Report 2: Position of the ship in distress (number 9 is used when no
position information is input)
4
Report 3: UTC in Distress (number 8 is used when no time information is
*) input)
Report 4: Communication type after successful call
EOS (telecommand 1)
* In the case of other than distress call

ECC Report 1: Telecommand information 1
(1) Report 2: Channel number for communicating, or frequency
Report 3, Report 4: not used
(8) EOS: END OF SEQUENCE

Designate whether acknowledge may be reqired or not.
(9) Error check character

The errors, which was not able to be corrected by a ten-unit error
detection code and time diversity, are detected, and, in the case of
miswritten characters, acknowledgement is not sent.
B-29
18. EGC ( Enhanced Group Call )
18-1 Outline
- EGC is the one-way broadcasting function to send messages to the ships of the specific group
from land using the INMARSAT C communications system.
Specific ship
- Hydrographic specific fleet
Department Specific sea area
- Meteorological Agency Specific flag ships
- Rescue Cordination
headquarters All ships
- Shipping companys
- News' service
- In EGC, when its function is synchronizing with COMMON CHANNEL of NCS (NETWORK
COODINATING STATION) of INMARSAT in the sea area around there, in the condition of being
ready for receiving, the following two services are applicable.
18-2 Safety-NET Service

This service is offered free of charge by broadcasting from the information supply organizations
such as the Maritime Safety Department and the Meteorological Agency approved by IMO as
shown below.
A: Cruise alarm (Hydrographic Organization)

B: A weather warning, a forecast (Meteorological organization)
C: Distress information for Land -> Ships, other emergency information
(RCC)
D: Rebroadcast of NAVTEX
E: Drifting ice alarm (ICE PATROL)
B-30
18-3 Fleet-NET Service
This is a commercial broadcasting service for members. Shipping companys and data providers
permitted by the government, contract with CES and they broadcast to SES of the specific groups.
It is expected that service will be expanded by companies other than CIGNATRY of INMARSAT
from now on.
In the most case, members are charged. The contents is as follows.
A: Simultaneous broadcasting to all

shipping companies
B: News, amusement broadcast
C: correction information on In the case of broadcasting with charge,
electronic chart, weather information each ship shall make a contract with
information provider and pay registration
D: Commodity market fee to the provider.
E: Simultaneous broadcast to all the
flag ships
- Registration and cancellation of GROUP ID

Data provider write the Group ID in the EGC receiving devices in ships via CES using the
peculiar identification number (UNIQUE ID, FORWARD ID.) assigned to EGC or INMARSAT
C.
Once the Group ID is set into the EGC receiving device, it is reserved in the EGC receiving
device until it is overwritten by next input and is canceled again or it is re-set up.
Each ship can be registered to two or more information providers.
- In order to receive the broadcast for each sea area correctly, it is desirable to interface the
device with any of proper navigational equipment, and to update own ship’s position
automatically with the data obtained from the navigational equipment.
MEMO
B-31
19. NAVTEX
19-1 Outline
* Free telex service from the Land station to ships within the area of about 400 miles away from
the seashore.
* Broadcast repeatedly safety and alarm information of navigation and weather by in the
common and global frequency “518kHz FIB mode” (CFEC mode).
* Shore stations are divided into each group of NAVAREA, and they sure located every about
400 miles along the main coastline.
* In Japan, five stations such as Otaru, Kushiro, Yokohama, Moji and Naha, have started their
services by February, 1992, and are operated by Japan Coast Guard.
* The NAVTEX receiver in a ship navigating near any coast station receives and prints a
message automatically.
* From August 1, 1993, mandatory ships of 300 GT and upwards are requird to be equipped with
NAVTEX.
* Regarding installation, any special procedure is unnecessary, but, equipment type-aprroved by
the Competent Authority of the ship, shall be installed.
* In order to prevent interference by the single frequency in the same sea area, it is broadcasted
periodically, and transmitted electric power is limited.
* 24 coast stations within NAVAREA are divided into four groups, each station broadcasts once
in 4 hours for 10 minutes. But distress alert or important alarms are broadcasted at any time.
* Although messages are repeatedly broadcasted for improvement of reception probability, since
the same message is not printed even if it is received, there is no waste of a recording paper.
Allocation scheme of coverage of broadcasters (B1)
B-32
19-2 Concept of NAVTEX System
Coastguard
Buoyage Authority
Electronic navaids Surveillance of
Offshore Operater the first Ice
Govt. Departments distress
Reports from ships
Message Report of the
NAVAREA coordination weather
Organization
Search and Rescue

Coordination Weather warning
Navigation Alarm Organization Coordination
Coordination Organization Organization
NAVTEX
Coordination
Organization
Automatic processing
Selection by operator 518-kHz receiver
capability
Geographical selection Judgment of

of area Microprocessor signal quality
•
Deletion of
Decoder Comparison with the
unnecessary and
contents in the memory
optional messages
Printer Throw-away of insufficient/

unnecessary messages
B-33
Distribution table of a transmitting schedule
(As of 2008)
NAVAREA XI air time (UTC)
C SINGAPORE SINGAPORE 0020 0420 0820 1220 1420 2020
E INDONESIA JAKARTA 0040 0440 0840 1240 1640 2040
G NAHA 0100 0500 0900 1300 1700 2100
H MOJI 0110 0510 0910 1310 1710 2110
I JAPAN YOKOHAMA 0120 0520 0920 1320 1720 2120
J OTARU 0130 0530 0930 1330 1730 2130
K KUSHIRO 0140 0540 0940 1340 1740 2140
L HONG KONG 0150 0550 0950 1350 1750 2150
M SANYA 0200 0600 1000 1400 1800 2200
N GUANGZHOU 0210 0610 1010 1410 1810 2210
CHINA
O FUZHOU 0220 0620 1020 1420 1820 2220
Q SHANGHAI 0240 0640 1040 1440 1840 2240
R DALIAN 0250 0650 1050 1450 1850 2250
V USA GUAM 0100 0500 0900 1300 1700 2100
W KOREA PYONSAN 0340 0740 1140 1540 1940 2340
Notes: For further details, refer to the latest documents
B-34
Printing and Decipherment of NAVTEX message
Technical
code
ZCZC: start of
message
Message
Miswritten word is
expressed with *.
NNNN: End of message
Character error rate
The meanigs of technical code by four characters

Technical code
(A-Z) L A 49
Identification Code of
transmitting station
Serial number of message
(01-99)
(00 is printed in all the ships within the coverage)
* : the message which cannot be rejected by ship

Message type
side
A: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS (Navigation alarm) *
B: METEOROLOGICAL WARNINGS (Weather warning) *
C: ICE REPORTS (ice-covered water information) *
D: SEARCH AND RESCUE INFORMATON (Search & Rescue information) *
E: METEOROLOGICAL FORECASTS (Weather forecast)
F: PILOT SERVICE MESSAGES (Pilot communication)
G: DECCA MESSAGES (Decca information)
H: LORAN MESSAGES (Loran information)
I: OMEGA MESSAGES (Omega information)
J: SATNAV MESSAGES (Navigation satellite information)
K: OTHER ELECTRONIC NAVAID MESSAGES (Other electronic navigation information)
L: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS-ADDITIONAL TO LETTER A (Navigation alarm added to A) *
V:
W: SPECIAL SERVICES-TRIAL ALLOCATION BY NAVTEX PANEL
X: (Special work -Trial assignment by NAVTEX working group)
Y:
Z: NO MESSAGE ON HAND (no message)
B-35
20. Satellite EPIRB
( Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon )
20-1 Comparison with Conventional Distress transmitting Equipment

- The portable radio apparatus (for lifeboat) which transmits 500 kHz, 8364 kHz, or 2182 kHz
and VHF EPIRB of 121.5MHz, and 243MHz are used to be used as a means of
communication at the time of distress. However, since there were such faults that mastery is
needed in operation and the range is short, the still more reliable distress alert transmitting
and receiving system was required.
Receiving Power
Frequency Position check Operation
station supply
500,2182 Low accuracy generator Skill required

Life boat Land station
operated by
Radio 8364kHz Ship station Low probability (Antenna)
hand
406.025 Operated
406.028 COSPAS/ Lithium battery
About 5km Automatically
EPIRB 406.037 SARSAT Valid life: five
98% of probability / by manual
121.5MHz satellite years
Easily
Comparison of distress alert transmitting device
20-2 Outline of System

- It is required to be installed on ships over 300 GT engaged on all international voyages on
and after August 1, 1993.
- It accesses polar orbiting satellites (COSPAS/SARSAT) in 406.025 MHz, 406.028MHz, and
406.037MHz, and by using distress transmitting device, country code, ID, type of beacon
and its position of a wrecked ship, are transmitted to shore stations. At the shore station, the
information can be confirmed.
- There are two types, one is a floating type which is automatically released before reaching a
depth of 4 m at sea from float-free mounting, and the other has not automatically-release
mechanism. EPIRB itself is floatable.
- For homing the wrecked ship, 121.5 kHz can be initiated simultaneously.
Processing of the 121.5MHz homing signal by a satellite is stopped on and after February 1,
2009.
- Tow types, such as 406MHz EPIRB and 1.5GHz L band EPIRB using satellites, have been
used, but 1.5GHz L band EPIRB operation was terminated on and after December 1, 2006.
406MHz EPIRB is still in accordance with requirements of GMDSS and 1.5GHz L band
EPIRB was also in accorcande with requirements of GMDSS.
Coverage Satellite Access Frequency Position information
406.025MHz
Only visible range
406.028MHz
406 MHz All over the COSPAS/SARSAT maximum waiting Calculated
time : 406.037MHz at shore station etc.
band world Polar orbitting
110 minutes (high stability
needed)
Except two Geostationary

L band Immediately 1.6GHz Transmitted from a ship.
poles INMARSAT
Comparison between 406M EPIRB and L band EPIRB
B-36
20-3 System ( COSPAS/SARSAT Satellites ) on Land and in Space
- The SARSAT system by US, Canada and French and the COSPAS system of Russia started
to operate together as the global system for the position finding of a plane in the accident at
the time of the airplane accident in 1982. Then IMO accepted the usability of it and put it into
operation from July, 1998
- At the first stage, The Cospas-Sarsat Low-altitude Earth Orbit System for Search and Rescue
(LEOSAR) orbiting at the height of 1,000km above the ground were used.
From 1996, the Geostationary Orbit Satellite Search and Rescue system (GEOSAR) of which
satellites stay on the equator about 36,000km above ground was also established.
In 2005, Medium-Altitude Earth Orbit Navigation Satellite Systems (MEOSAR) which goes
around the earth about 20,000km above the ground started to be developed.
AS of July, 2006, seven(7) LEOSAR(s) (Low-Altitude Earth-Orbit Satellite: SARSAT satellite :
five satellites , COSPAS satellite : 2 satellites), and five(5) GEOSAR(s) (Geostationary Orbit
Satellite) are in operation for COSPAS/SARSAT service. 75 satellites of MEOSAR were to be
launched in due order from 2005, but MEOSAR system is still under test.
- LUT (Local User Terminal ) : receive the electric wave from satellites.
The data relayed from a satellite is received at LUT, the position of a wrecked ship is
calculated based on the orbital data of the satellite from MCC, and it is sent to MCC.
The following LUT exists for each Satellite System used.
LEOLUT (for Low-Altitude Earth-Orbit Satellite System)
GEOLUT (for Geostationary Orbit Satellite System)
MEOLUT (for Medium-Altitude Earth Orbit Navigation Satellite System)
- MCC (Mission Control Center) : distribute data.
One LUT of the area or a country deals with the function of MCC, and controls distress alerts
and orbital demand data to all the LUT(s). It requests Rescue activities of RCC.
- RCC (Rescue Coordination Center) : coordinate rescue activities.
20-4 Composition of Transmission Signal

( Refer to ITU-R Rec.M.633 for further details )
For locating For homing

406.025±0.002MHz (JQE-3A)
406.028+0.005MHz(JQE-103) 121.5MHz±0.006MHz
-0.002MHz Output 50mW±3dB
Output 5W±2dB
PM modulation AM modulation
Short message 440ms

Long message 520ms
- From equipment onboard ships, transmit the identification signal (there are three kinds) of the
vessel which is digitally coded in the form of a burst as mentioned above. In the LEOSAR
satellite, in order to calculate a position from which was initiated by measuring the doppler
shifts of a signal, very high short-term frequency stability is needed.
B-37
- The following information is inputted into the 406MHz beacon.
(1) MMSI : It consists of nine-digit number, and the first 3 digit numbers means the ships
name, the 6 remaining gidit numbers means ship’s identification number (0-9)
which the Competent Authority of the flag state designate. (refer to APPENDIX
43 of R.R. for further details)
(2) RADIO CALL SIGN : Call sign assigned to the vessel
(3) SERIALIZED ID : So to speak, it is the serial number of EPIRB, and when EPIRB is
installed in a vessel, it is registered with the database of MCC.
20-5 Maintenace
- When the nationality of a ship is changed, it is necessary to rewrite the identification number
currently written in ROM in EPIRB. Proper device is needed for wrting. (Refer to B-44 pages)
- lithium battery JQE-3A is 11.2VDC. Installation deadline and expiration date for use is as
follows below.
- lithium battery JQE103 is 8.4VDC. Installation deadline and expiration date for use is as
follows below.
One year Five years
Manufactured Deadline for Expiration date

installation for use
20-6 Installation place

A search and rescue locating device shall be stowed in such protected and easily accessible
location that they can be rapidly carried by one person into a survival craft In case of emergency.
(83 SOLAS III Regulation 6)
It shall be usually stowed in one of two wings which is as open around there as possible, or on
compass deck which is as open around there as possible. But such a place is located only near a
staircase in order to easily carry the locating device into a survival craft.
B-38
20-7 EPIRB ITU-R Coding
(1) Outline of transmission signal structure
15 bits 9 bits 16 bits 21 bits 6 bits Long

Bit Sync Frame Sync Protected field Error Correction Emergency Message
(Option)
All bits (15 bits): 1
(2) Protection field
10 bits 36 bits
EPIRB number in a ship
B-39
B-40
Satellite-Visible Area of Cospas-Sarsat Operational LEOLUTs (December 2007)
B-41
GEOSAR Ground Segment Status (December 2007)
406 MHz GEOSAR Satellite Coverage and GEOLUTs(December 2007)
B-42
21. INMARSAT System
21-1 Background of INMARSAT
INMARSAT was first established as the International Maritime Satellite Organization. The process
was began with the study of introduction of satellite communication technology by IMO
(International Maritime Organization) as substitution of the maritime telecommunication which was
mainly dependent on short-wave radiocommunication so that it may aim at development of the
means of communication for maritime and quality of maritime telecommunication. As a result of
the study by IMO, the intergovernmental meeting was held in 1971 in response to the guideline "it
is appropriate that every country in the world uses a single maritime satellite system together", and
the "Treaty on INMARSAT" and the "INMARSAT Operation Agreement" were adopted in 1976.
The INMARSAT headquarters was founded in British London and the full-scale maritime satellite
communication service has started since 1982.
After that, INMARSAT revised the treaty, in order to open a Space portion subsequently to a Land
Mobile Communication, Aviation and, and it changed the name into the IIMSO (International
Mobile Satellite Organization.
Along with the trend of privatization of the communication in each country in the latter part of
1990’s, a study on privatization was made aiming at efficient management of INMARSAT and at
raising funds for next-generation satellite system etc. As a result of the study made for several
years, an agreement was made as follows. (1) Operating department is separated from
INMARSAT and only a supervisor function (Plenary meeting, secretariat) as an International
mobile satellite Organization is left. (2) The operation department is placed under control of a
commercial company which is newly established. After revising the treaty, Inmarsat was formally
shifted to the private management company from the international organization in April, 1999.
Privatized INMARSAT, in order to realize flexible financing, was aimed at IPO (Initial Public
Offering) within two years after privatization, but IPO continued to be unrealizable because the
satellite company which was planning new entry into iridium, etc. failed in administrating and
because stock quotations hovered around in those days. Under such a situation, Apax and
Permira, which were Europe leading private equity fund companies, purchased the INMARSAT’s
stocks in December, 2003 and got a majority of stocks of he holding company group (four
companies, such as Inmarsat Group Holding Ltd) newly established and became the largest
stockholders.
21-2 INMARSAT System

INMARSAT offers the communication service between land and mobile earth stations using the
geostationary satellite on the equator. At first, although its service was given with the analog
system called INMARSAT A, the various digital systems have been introduced accordingly to date.
Regarding targets of mobile earth stations, the offer range have been expanded not only to ships,
but to an airplanes, land mobile stations , in addition to these, and portable type system which
people can carry about. In respect of service, data communication has been introduced in
addition to telephone and FAX, and data transfer speed was developed to 64kbps/ 128kbps from
9.6kbps and Internet access system as always-on connection of the packet mode service which
uses IP communication as the base has been also newly introduced .
The general idea of the INMARSAT network is shown in Fig. 1. A telecommunication link is set
up between a mobile earth station and a land earth station through satellites. A land earth station
transmits and receives signals of telephone, FAX and data, etc. through land telecommunication
system. C band frequency range (uplink 6GHz/downlink 4GHz) is used for feedering (link
between land earth station and satellites) like other satellite systems, and for the service link (link
between satellite and mobile earth stations), L band (uplink 1.6GHz /downlink 1.5GHz), which is
suitable for mobile communication because of not being much affected by rain, is used.
Moreover, for telecommunication of division methods, signals for telephone are multiplexed using
FDM/FDMA (Frequency Division Multiplexing/Frequency Division Multiple Access) method and
signals for data are multiplexed using TDM/TDMA (Time Division Multiplexing/Time Division
Multiple Access ) method. And, by introduction of spot beam system*, while realization of
high-density of electric power transmitted from satellites was realized (miniaturization of mobile
station terminal) and frequency between spot beams is reused (increase in the number of usable
links).
B-43
* A beam of satellite, which covers the earth surface of which holizontal line can be seen from a
satellite, is called a global beam. On the other hand, a narrow beam, which irradiates a part of
earths, is called a spot beam and therefore, high powerful irradiation is realized compared with a
global beam.
Satellite INMARSAT satellite
Service link
Mobile 1.6/1.5GHz
station Feeder ring
6/4GHz
Land
station Satellite Land earth Land earth Land earth
Administration station station station
TT&C
Network Operation Communications Operation
control management Network office management
office office
Gateway Gateway
office office
Land
network
Cellular-phone
network Public correspondence network Public Data
Network
Exclusive
network
Fig. 1 INMARSAT Network
21-3 INMARSAT Satellite

As a satellite which INMARSAT uses, at first, ARISAT satellite was used, and then MARIX
satellites were launched in 1981, and the 2nd generation satellite for the own use of INMARSAT
was arranged over the Indian Ocean in 1990, and the INMARSAT telecommunication got into
stride.
The characteristics etc. relating to the several types of INMARSAT satellites were compared in
table 1.2. Although satellites up to the 2nd generation satellite (I-2) had only a global beam, in the
3rd generation satellite (I-3) launched one by one from 1996, seven spot beams were installed and
it contributed to miniaturization of terminals and development of communicative advanced
features. Moreover, the 4th generation satellite (I-4) launched in 2005 has the function which can
generate the various beams of a maximum of 256 in the service link. That is, it has three kinds of
irradiation beams of one global beam, 19 wide spot beams and 200 or more narrow spot beams
other than the beam for control of a satellite as a beam for users. A global beam and wide spot
beams are used for the existing service except INMARSAT A, and the BGAN (Broadband Global
Area Network) service, in which the packet communication of a maximum of 492 kbps is possible,
is offered using narrow spot beams. Furthermore, in the 4th generation satellite, since reuse of the
service link frequency band (L band) by a narrow spot beam is performed, compared with the
feedering frequency bandwidth (C band) of the 3rd generation satellite, and since a bandwidth
(30MHz -150MHz) is equivalently about 5 times width of C band, the capability of a satellite
system is markedly upgraded. As both the clockwise rotation round polarization and reverse
polarization are utilized, it has the no less than 300MHz band width in total.
At the time of launching of the 4th generation satellite, it weighs about 6 ton. Its length including
solar battery panel is no less than 48m and it is the largest class satellite in the world.
Secondly, deployment of the INMARSAT satellites is described. INMARSAT satellite
B-44
telecommunication system is a communication system using the geostationary satellites on the
geostationary orbit in the equatorial space of 36000 km high above sea level. Since the whole
earth was mostly covered by arranging three satellites at equal intervals on an orbit theoretically,
INMARSAT was also the system which used three satellites at the beginning. However, since
three satellite’s position was not equally spaced in the space because of the positions of Land
Earth Stations of each country, dead spaces of telecommunication existed in a portion of Pacific
Ocean and in a portion of Atlantic Ocean. Then, for effective use of the reserve satellites launched
on the orbit in the time of the 2nd generation satellite, and for dispersion of communication
channels, the Atlantic Ocean Western Region Satellite was launched in order to complement the
communication dead spaces as mentioned above. Finally, the 4 Ocean Space Satellite System
was established.
Furthermore, the old system was developed to the today’s high reliability system deploying the
reserve satellites which stay in the vicinity of each main operative satellite individually.
hen, from the position of effective use of the administrative resources needed by privatization, the
reserve satellite were moved to the position (about 40-degree interval between two satellites) at
which enables reuse of frequency between the present satellite in operation and reserve satellites
and reserve satellites are utilized for link lease service. Now 11 satellites are always in operation
in the sum total of the main satellites and the reserve satellites including two sets of I-4 satellite.
Moreover, the contingency plan (for emergency operation) was prepared in operation of the
satellite telecommunication system and it is applied in each case of satellite failure.
Table 1 Comparison of Satellite
INMARSAT INMARSAT INMARSAT

the 2nd Generation Satellite the 3rd Generation Satellite the 4th Generation Satellite
The number
of 4 4+1 Reserve 3
satellites
The number 200 narrow spot +
Wide spot beam
of Global beam 19 wide spot +
+ global beam
beams Global beam
Maximum
39dBW 49dBW 67dBW
EIRP
Frequency
band
(Service link) 1530.0-1548.0/1626.5-1649.5 1530.0-1559.0/626.5-1649.5 1530.0-1559.0/1626.5-1660.5
(Feeder link) 3600.0-3623.0/6425.0-6443.0 3600.0-3629.0/6425.0-6454.0 3600.0-3700.0/6425.0-6575.0
Overall length 14.5m 20.7m 45.0m
Weight
700kg 1000kg 3000kg
(dry mass)
Weights
1500kg 2050kg 6000kg
at Launching
Life time
10 years 13 years 10 years
Designed
B-45
21-4 Terminal of INMARSAT System
The system took over from MARISAT was called INMARSAT A, and then INMARSAT B, C and D
in alphabetic order was named every time system was developed. The system has been
developed from Analog to Digital, and it is now following the way of miniaturization and
improvement in the speed. The outline of INMARSAT systems is described below.
(1) INMARSAT A system
“INMARSAT A “ system was operated in supplying maritime telecommunication service for a long
life of 20 years since the system service was started in 1982. It can supply FAX and data
communication besides telephone and telex. The modulation method used in space uses the
narrow band FM analog modulation for telephone link. “INMARSAT A “ service was brought to an
end on and after December 31, 2007, from a viewpoint of effective use of frequencies for satellite
system and repair part supply.
(2) INMARSAT B system
“INMARSAT B” system was introduced as a succeeding system of “INMARSAT A “ in order to
resolve the problem of increase in Maritime satellite telecommunication traffic. Voice signal and
the whole communication channels were digitized and band became the narrower than
“INMARSAT A”. In “INMARSAT B” system, various services of telephone, telex, FAX of 9.6kbps,
data and the high-speed data of 64kbps can be used.
(3) INMARSAT M system
Digital technology was applied to it as well as “INMARSAT B” system, and the merit obtained by
digitization was applied to miniaturization of a mobile earth station terminal unit. In INMARSAT M
system, services of telephone, FAX of 2.4kbps and data can be used.
(4) INMARSAT C system
“INMARSAT C” system was developed so that it may be installed to small vessels or
long-distance transport tracks, and message communication and data communication by the
so-called accumulation transfer (Store and Transfer) system are possible for it. In “INMARSAT C”
system, communication between mobile terminals and telex terminals/ data terminals is possible,
in addition, messages from mobile terminal can be output to a FAX terminal, and messages can
be transferred to mobile terminals from land earth station simultaneously.
(5) INMARSAT mini M system
Digital technology was applied to “INMARSAT mini M” as well as “INMARSAT M/B” system, in
addition to it, it was further miniaturized more than M system by using the spot beam which was
utilized on and after the 3rd generation satellite of INMARSAT. By use of spot beams, It was
possible to attain further reduction in antenna gain and transmission power, and the merit of using
spot beams has been applied to miniaturization and lightweight of a mobile earth terminal unit. It
can offer services of telephone, FAX and data transfer as well as M system, and its service is
applied to IC card telephone service called credit card communication or SIM (Subscriber Identity
Module).
(6) INMARSAT D+ system
This system is the smallest in the INMARSAT system and has a data terminal with a directional
and hemispherical antenna. It was born as a satellite pager and can transmit the response
massage to the polling signal from land. In Japan, it ihas been used as SSAS (Ship Security Alert
System) from 2004.
(7) INMARSAT F system
This system was introduced as a successor to INMARSAT A service which ended in December,
2007, and three kinds of systems, F77, F55, and F33, are working. In order of the antenna caliber,
F77’s is the largest, F55’s is second and F33 is the smallest. .
F77 and F55 system have function of line switching type data-communications (ISDN) of 64kbps
and a packet-switching type data-communications (MPDS : Mobile Packet Data Service), and
have the function which was adapted for the Internet communications, such as always-connection.
On the other hand, F33 has functions of line switching type data-communications of 9.6kbps.and
the above-mentioned MPDS function. With the ISDN function of 128kbps added, F77 is also
equipped with the functions of distress alert communication and emergency communication in
navigation of vessels, and has the function that , in distress or emergency, cutting communication
of low priority, F77 transmits distress signals and emergency signals and surely receives distress
signals and emergency signals from land.
B-46
(8) INMARSAT BGAN/Fleet Broadband system
In INMARSAT, INMARSAT BGAN service offered by the 4th generation satellite is regarded as the
satellite version of the third generation mobile phone (3GUMTS:3 rd Generation Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System). For interfacing in wireless communication area, the TDM/TDMA
system of INMARSAT original specification, which is different form W-CDMA (Wideband-Code
Division Multiple Access), is utilized. And for interfacing with land station, called core network
(CN), .the system of the same specification as 3G UMITS is used.
This system was introduced as a land mobile communication system in the ends of the year of
2005, and Fleet Broadband (FB) was introduced as a marine mobile communication in November,
2008.
B-47
21-5 SSAS ( Ship Security Alert System )
It aims at notifying of the Competent Authorities of SOLAS Convention Contracting Governments
and management companies, without being noticed by anyone, when a vessel is attacked by
armed groups, such as terrorists and pirates, or when danger is drawing near.
SSAS is required by SOLAS chapter XI-1/XI-2 and International Code for the Security of Ships
and of Port Facilities (ISPS code).
(1) Ships to be installed with equipment as scheduled below
Object vessel At the time Until first radio Until first radio
of inspection on inspection on
Voyage New Ship type Construction and after July 1, and after July 1,
Construction 2004 2006
or
Existing Ship
1. passenger •
International Construction on
ships(including
voyage and after July 1,
high-speed
2004
passenger craft)
.2 cargo ships,
(including
high-speed craft)
of
500 G/T and
upwards
.3 Mobile offshore
drilling units; and
.4 Port facilities
serving such
ships engaged on
international
voyages.
passenger
Construction ships(including
before July 1, high-speed
2004 passenger craft)
The following
cargo boat of 500
G/T and
upwards
Oil/chemical
tanker
Gas/bulk carrier
High-speed cargo
Ship
The following •
cargo boat of 500
GT and upwards
Mobile offshore
drilling units
Port facilities
serving such ships
engaged on
international
voyages.
Constructed on
Non-international and after July 1, Installation: not required
voyage 2004
Constructed
before July 1, Installation: not required
2004
B-48
(2) Requirements for equipment
- Power supply
Supplied by main power supply inboard and also inboard alternative power supply.
- Alerting place
There need to be at least two alert places. One should be on Bridge.
- Operation
Adjustments for Alert equipment (tuning, change in the mode, etc.) is not needed.
Any inboard alarms should not happen.
- Transmitting system
Vessel identification ID and ship’s position are included in signal transmitted.
It is transmitted to shore stations.
(3) Installation guidance (MSC/Circ.1072)
MSC/Circ.1072 (Guidance on Provision of Ship Security Alert System) was adopted by IMO
(International Maritime Organization in May, 2003 as follows.
- Alert is able to be transmitted from ship, without being noticed by anyone onboard.
- Transmission method is possible to choose freely.
- The means and equipment, which sends alerts, should be based on the following
method.
.1 Method of using tracking system provided by existing Vessel Surveillance system by
Satellite Communications.
.2 Method of using GMDSS equipment etc. (by equipment newly being installed or by
modification of existing equipment).
.3 Method of exchanging messages including "Keyword" between the vessel and the
company side by using satellite communication services.
B-49
21-6 LRIT ( Long Range Identification and Tracking )
Long-Range Identification and Tracking (LRIT) system provides for the global identification and
tracking of ships.
- LRIT system is mandatory required by IMO.
- The system transmits the individual information belonging to each vessel (Ship’s
Communication ID, Ship’s position) periodically from Inmarsat-C equipment or other
communication equipment onboard a vessel. Transmission interval can be changed by a
remote control signal from a Land station.
- installation is required on the following ships
.1 passenger ships, including high-speed passenger craft;
.2 cargo ships, including high-speed craft, of 300 GT and upwards; and
.3 mobile offshore drilling units.
- to be installed until the first radio survey on and after December 31, 2008.
(1) LRIT system
LRIT system is an architecture as shown in the figure below. LRIT information on each ship to
fly the flag of each Contracting State is managed by the Data Center of each Contracting State.
The LRIT information on each ship to fly the flag of another Contracting State is obtained by
requesting the Data Center of another Contracting State to send it .
B State CSP: Communication

Data Service Provider
(Satellite)
ASP: Application
Service Provider
Data
Request
A State
Data Center
LRIT Data
A State
Data Center
A State’s
Ship
B State’s
Ship
Government CSP: Communication
Organization Service Provider
(Land) LRIT Data
A State’s
Ship
(2) Installation requirements for LRIT

Requirement was added to SOLAS V by MSC.202(81).
(3) This regulation shall apply to the following types of ships engaged on international voyages.
.1 passenger ships, including high-speed passenger craft;
.2 cargo ships, including high-speed craft, of 300 gross tonnage3 and upwards; and
.3 mobile offshore drilling units
(4) Requirement SOLAS V 19-1 regulation

Ships shall be fitted with a system to automatically transmit the information specified in
SOLAS as follows:
.1 ships constructed on or after 31 December 2008;
.2 ships constructed before 31 December 2008 and certified for operations:
- in sea areas A1 and A2
- in sea areas Al, A2 and A3,
not later than the first survey of the radio installation after 31 December 2008;
.3 ships constructed before 31 December 2008 and certified for operations in sea areas Al,
B-50
A2, A3 and A4, not later than the first survey of the radio installation after 1 July 2009.
However, these ships shall comply with the provisions of subparagraph .2 above whilst
they operate within sea areas A1, A2 and A3.
.4 Ships, irrespective of the date of construction, fitted with AIS unit , and operated
exclusively within sea area A1, shall not be required to comply with the provisions of this
regulation
(5) Requirement schedule for LRIT installation
Sea Area 2008/12/31 2009/7/1
New ships
Constructed on and Ships shall be installed
Except ships operating
after 31 December 31, with LRIT
exclusively in A1 sea -
2008 Until the first radio survey
area
(International Voyage after 31 December, 2008
ship)
Ships operating
exclusively in A1 sea Not required (AIS shall be fitted.)
area.
Ships operating in
A1and
A2 sea area.
Existing ships
Ships operating in A1, Ships shall be installed
Constructed before 31
A2 and A3 sea area. with LRIT
December 31, 2008 -
Until the first radio survey
(International Voyage Ships operating in A1, after 31 December, 2008
ship) A2 A3 and A4 sea
area.
Usually operating in
A1, A2 and A3
Ships shall be installed with
Ships operating in A1,
LRIT
A2 A3 and A4 sea -
Until the first radio survey
area.
after 1 July , 2009
(Note: Since Inmarsat-C dose not cover A4 sea area (Polar Regions), JUE-85/95LT/75C cannot be applied to A4
sea area operation.)
(6) Requirements for LRIT terminal
Required by MSC.210(81), MSC.254(83) and MSC.242(83)
- Transmit LRIT information automatically every 6 hours.
- transmitting interval (from 15 minutes to 6 hours) is possible to change by remote control
from land.
- Transmit LRIT information by polling.
B-51
21-7 INMARSAT coverage area
B-52
22. NBDP ( Shortwave Narrow-band Direct Printing System )
22-1 Outline
It is the NBDP system, that it has the function of correcting erroneous characters using shortwave
bands, direct communication between offices and ships is possible through International Telex line
as well, automatic receiving is possible and the speed (maximum about 400 characters per minute
by International method) of it is 3 to 4 times than the speed of Morse communication, etc.
Automation of communication and avoiding workloads are possible.
22-2 Flow of Information

At a transmitter side, the wordings of a telegram are input into I/O device (DTE: Data Terminal
Equipment), and are coded and FS modulated in a terminal device and finally are changed to 100
bauds for radiocommunication. Processed wordings are transmitted as F1B radio wave from the
transmitter. At a receiver side, FS modulated telegrams are received, decoded, printed and
indicated at an information I/O device.
22-3 Communicate Mode

(1) ARQ (Automatic ReQuest for repetition) mode: Using automatic-request for retransmission
method with return line for responding to, only one-to-one communication can be carried out.
A Selective Calling Number of 5 digits (for Ship) or 4 digits (for Shore station) is assigned to
Each satiation, and in the future 9 digits are to be used for these function. At a transmitting
side, a Selective Calling Number for destination is selected and transmitted. Aftr a line is
established between statiosns, telegram is sent to.
(2) FEC (Forward Error Correction) mode : This is the mode which transmits the same
characters twice at an interval, and check, and corrects erroneous characters at receiving
side. In this mode, there two methods such as simultaneous-transmission to multiple
receiving sites (CFEC: Collective FEC= all call) and transmission to a certain specific
receiving site (SFEC: Selective FEC= selection broadcast). In CFEC, since synchronizing
signals are not transmitted first but wordings of a telegram are sent out succeeding, all
receiving stations can receive the telegram. On the hand, regarding in SFEC mode, as
Selective Calling Number is sent out following the synchronizing signal, only the station which
is selected can receive it. And the other stations return to receiving state (STD BY).
22-4 Connection Transceiver Machine

Connectable transmitter is SSB transmitter and the followings are required.
(1) High voltage of transmitter is controllable externally.
(2) Frequency deviation is below 40 Hz and stability is high.
(3) Rise up tlme of a relay of Key line should be 10 or less ms.
Synthesizer system is desirable as receiver from a viewpoint of frequency deviation and
stability.
B-53
23. SART ( Search & Rescue Radar Transponder )
As for maritime distress, although the various kinds of methods, such as SOS alerting by
radiotelegraphy, radiophone, the emergency radio equipment, or EPIRB, etc. has been applied to
distress informing, any of methods above cannot become ideal ones.
The reason is that, firstly even if distress alert is transmitted but the information about it is not
processed fully. Secondly, a position at which a distress occurs cannot be identified rather
correctly. Due to those reasons, Search and rescue operation may be carried out in the rather
wide sea area and then it takes time. Thirdly, with the time elapsing after an occurrence of
distress, liferafts are drifted by current, wind, etc. and then the position of it also changes.
Moreover, regarding direction finding equipment searching HF and V/UHF band, there is a fault
that, as accuracy measured is not enough to search, search and rescue sea area will become
wide.
Radar Transponder system was designed for developing more effective search and rescue
operation, in the case ships or airplanes may be in distress in the sea or in the similar cases.
In any case above, it is for 9 GHz band radar (marine radars for ships, radars for search and
rescue airplanes, etc.), several dots behind every radar target detectdd are indicated on a radar
disply, and information of direction and range about target and such peculiar dotted symbols can
inform the distress.
Generally, in the case of radars for ships, the average effective range of SART is about 10
nautical miles, and in the case of radars for search and rescue airplanes, it is about 30 nautical
miles (Accoring to data in some states, it is 50-60 nautical miles). there is a report that, in any case,
after initial detection of targets, the positions of the targets can be pinpointed.
Navigation System
Communication System
Alerting Stage Planning Stage Transit Stage Search Stage Rescue stage
Before
GMDSS
Incident Occurence RCC Notification SAR Resource Arrival at Search by Sighting of Object Rescue
Tasking Search Area SART
During Time Line

GMDSS
(1) Distress Alerting

(2) Identifying Ship's name
(3) Positioning Altitude / longitude detection
(4) SAR coordinating communications
(5) On-scene communications
(6) Locating Victim
(7) Rescue operations (unit in distress or survivors)
(8) Preventive actions (safety information and ship’s position)
Concept of Global Maritime Distress Safety System
B-54
( Example: SART code on a radar indicator for ships )
Ts: Sweep rate Wd: A large dot

Te: Equivalent pulse width Nd: A narrow dot
Br: Radar reception band width Er: distance error
Antenna beam width
SART position
Search ship
Distance to SART
Response
Signal
( SART responding signal and SART code )

* For details, it is prescribed by REC628 of R. R. 832A and CCIR.
Installation place of SART: in the vicinity of entrances for passage to wings in Bridge
Victims can know by lamp and alarm if radar waves of SART search ship are detected.
B-55
24. MSI ( Maritime Safety Information Service )
24-1 WWNWS ( World Wide Navigational Warning Service )
WWNWS, which was established by WMO (World Meteorological Organization) and IHO
(International Hydrographic Organization), broadcasts weather information and navigation alarms
for ships navigating. For every sea area called NAVAREA divided into 16 in sea area,
broadcasting is carried out on CW and TELEX periodically.
Services are roughly following two types.
(1) NAVAREA SERVICE.... Service for navigation in Oceans
NAVAREA SERVICE broadcasts obstructions to navigation for ships (engaged on the
international voyage) navigating at a long distance from shores. Broadcast coverage areas
are the NAVAREA area and the neighboring areas 700 miles outside it. Broadcast is
performed in English, and in addition to A1A mode, FEC (FOWARD ERROR CORRECTION)
mode is used if required.
In GMDSS, eight waves of 4210.0, 6314.0, 8416.5, 12579.0, 16806.5, 19680.5, 22376.0 and
26100.5 kHz are used by NBDP for broadcast of MSI.
(2) NAVTEX SERVICE.... Service for coastal sea area

Refer to page B-19 of this handbook.
24-2 EGC ( Enhanced Group Call )

Broadcast by SAFETY-NET of INMARSAT C.
Refer to page B-18 of this handbook.
HF MSI is being intensively discussed by MSC; details of it cannot be introduced. As soon as

discussion by ITU, WMO, IHO, etc. is finished, performance standards and installation
requirements of HF MSI is adopted by IMO.
The NAVAREA broadcast by the present A1A Morse will be ended in the near future.
24-3 NAVAREA SERVICE ( proposed assignment of roles )

Weather NAVAREA Weather
NAVAREA Coordinator
Information Coordinator Information
I (1) Britain Britain IX (9) Pakistan Saudi Arabia
II (2) France France X (10) Australia Australia
III (3) Spain --- XI (11) Japan Japan
IV (4) USA (east coast) USA XII (12) USA (west coast) USA
V (5) Brazil Brazil XIII (13) Russia Russia
VI (6) Argentina Argentina XIV (14) New Zealand New Zealand
VII (7) South Africa South Africa XV (15) Chile Chile
VIII (8) India India XVI (16) Peru USA
COFFEE BREAK
U.T.C.(Universal Time Coordinated)
It is a universally coordinated artificial time, which is always adjusted within error of 0.9 or less seconds
compared with universal time (U.T.), while the atomic time is ticking away the time.
B-56
Note: HF NBDP system can be used in order to provide the auxiliary equivalent
service to EGC Safety-NET.
(International Maritime Safety Information Work)
25. Main Classification table

Name of Classification Country
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) USA
BV (Bureau Veritas) FRANCE
CCS (China Classification Society) CHINA
DNV (Det Norske Veritas) NORWAY
GL (Germanischer Lloyd) GERMANY
KR (Korean Register of Shipping) KOREA
LR (Lloyd's Register) UK
NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai) JAPAN
RINA (Registro Italiano Navale) ITALY
RMRS (Russian Maritime Register of Shipping) RUSSIA
B-57
C. Radiocommunications
1. Abbreviation for International Telex Communication
Abbreviation Meanings
ABS Absent subscriber, office closed.

ADV Advise
ACK Acknowledge
AGN Again
BI Good bye
BK I cut off
CFM Confirm
COL Collation
CRV How do you receive ?
CER Out of order.
DF You are in communication with the called subscriber.
DWN Down
EEE Error
FM From
GA Go ahead
MNS Minutes
MOM Wait (Waiting)
MUTI Mutilated
NA Correspondence to this subscriber is not admitted.
NC No circuits
NCH Subscriber's number has been changed.
NR Indicate your call number. (My call number is -- --)
NP No Party
OCC Subscriber is engaged.
OK Agreed
P Stop your transmission.
PLS (PSE) Please
PPR Paper
RCV (D) Received
RAP I will call you again.
RD Read
RE Referring to
RPT Repeat
SRY Sorry
SVP Please
TAX What is the charge ?
TEST MSG Please send a test message.
THRU You are in communication with a telex position.
TKS Thanks
TLX Telex
TPR Teleprinter
W Words
WRU Who is this?
+? Over
C-1
2. Phonetic alphabets list
Identifier Pronunciation Identifier Pronunciation
Character Character
Word (based on the Latin alphabet) Word (based on the Latin alphabet)
A Alfa AL FAH N November NO VEM BER
B Bravo BRAH VOH O Oscar OSS CAH
C Charlie CHAR LEE P Papa PAH PAH

D Delta DELL TAH Q Quebec KEH BECK
E Echo ECK OH R Romeo ROW ME OH
F Foxtrot FOKS TROT S Sierra SEE AIR RAH
G Golf GOLF T Tango TANG GO
H Hotel HO TELL U Uniform YOU NEE FORM
I India IN DEEAH V Victor VIK TAH
J Juliet JEW LEE ETT W Whiskey WISS KEY
K Kilo KEY LOH X X-ray ECKS RAY
L Lima LEE MAH Y Yankee YANG KEY
M Mike MIKE Z Zulu ZOO LOO
Note: An underliend syllable is pronounced strongly.
Number Identifier
Pronunciation
Character word
0 Nadazero NAH – DAH – ZAY - ROH
1 Unaone OO – NAH - WUN
2 Bissotwo BEES – SOH - TOO
3 Terrathree TAY - RAH - TREE
4 Kartefour KAR – TAY - FOWER
5 Pantafive PAN – TAY - FIVE
6 Soxisis SOK – SEE - SIX
7 Sstteseven SAY – TAY - SEVEN
8 Oktoeeight OK – TOH - AIT
9 Novenine NO – VAY - NINER
Decimal
Decimal DAY – SEE - MAL
point
Full stop Stop
C-2
3. DSC / NBDP Station Frequency List
3-1 DSC Station List

Station Frequency (kHz) and Operating time (UTC)
SHANGHAI RADIO
4207.5 6312 8414.5 l2577 16804.5
(XSG)
[H24] [H24] [H24] [H24] [H24]
MMSI:004122100
GUANGZHOU RADIO
(XSQ) －－－－－
MMSI:004123100
VLADIVOSTOK RADIO
(UFL) 4207.5 6312 8414.5 l2577 16804.5
MMSI:00273714
SEOUL RADIO
4207.5 6312 8414.5 l2577 16804.5
(HLG,KLS)
[H24] [H24] [H24] [H24] [H24]
MMSI:004400002
KEELUNG RADIO
4207.5 6312 8414.5 l2577 16804.5
(XSX)
[H24] [H24] [H24] [H24] [H24]
MMSI:004162019
3-2 NBDP Station List

Station Frequency (kHz) and Operating time (UTC)
SHANGHAI RADIO 4215.5 6326 8425.5 l2637.5 16889 22428 .
(XSG) (4174.5) (6275) (8385.5) (12535.5) (16771) (22336)
SELLCALL No. 2010 [HX] [2200-1000] [H24] [H24] [HX] [HX]
Coast station TELEX 4215 6330 8430 12642.5 16892 22429 .
Number (4177) (6284) (8390) (12540.5) (16774) (22337)
(85)337305 [1000-2200] [HX] [2200-1600] [HX] [2200-1000] [HX]
(SMTNC CN) 8433 12649.5 16898.5 22434 .
(8393) (12547.5) (16780.5) (22342)
[H24] [2200-1600] [H24] [HX]
8436
(8396)
[2200-1000]
GUANGZHOU 4212 6316 8422.5 12584.5 16812 22381.5
RADIO(XSQ (4174) (6264.5) (8382.5) (12482) (16688.5) (22289.5)
SELLCALL No. 2017 [1200-0000] [0000-1200] [HX] [HX] [HX] [HX]
Coast station TELEX 4219 6329 8429 12613 16823.5 22420
Number (4181.5) (6283) (8389) (12510.5) (16700.5) (22328)
(85)440212 [HX] [HX] [HX] [H24] [HX] [HX]
(GUMAT CN) 8431 12600.5 16854 22435
(85)441200 (8391) (12498) (16731) (22343)
(GZRDO CN) [HX] [HX] [HX] [HX]
8435 12662.5 16880
(8395) (12520.5) (16762)
[H24] [HX] [2200-1600]
12648.5
(12546.5)
[2300-1200]
VLADIVOSTOK 4172.5 8383 12489 16713
RADIO (UFL) (4210.5) (8423) (12591.5) (16836)
SELLCALL No. 4620 [H24] [H24] [2000 ～ [2000 ～
Coast Station 1300] 1000]
TELEX Number
(64)213115
(MRF RU)
Note: 1. [HX]: irregular operation

2. ( ) Receivng Frequency for Ship’s Station
C-3
Commands used are as follows.
BRK+= cancellation of connection of radiocommunications.
CEMAILnn+= transmissions of E-mail reporting by Kanji(Japanese latter).
CFAXxy+= transmissions of FAX reporting by Kanji(Japanese latter).
CHISREP= transmissions of Chinese Ship Report (in accordance with Laws of China Authority).
CMUFAXxy,xy…+= transmissions of FAX reporting by Kanji (to multiple members).
direct connection to telex members, x means a country number which starts from 0,
DIRTLXxy+=
y means a member’s number.
EMAILnn+= transmission of an E-mail report in a Western language to Internet/E-mail.
transmission of a report in a Western language to a facsimile member, x means a
FAXxy+= country number which starts from 00 or area code which starts from 0, y means a
facsimile member’s number.
FREQ+= reporting of hearing information (frequency) by a ship station.
HELP+(HLP+)= available Commands list.
INF+= request of information list which system can provide.
KKKK= finish of connection to land channel.
MED+= connection to medical channel.
MSG+= request of communication.
transmission of a report in Western language to multiple facsimile members, x
MULFAXxy,xy…+= means a country number which starts from 00 or area code which starts from 0, y
means a facsimile member’s number.
transmission of store and forward report to multiple telex members, x means a
MULTLXxy,xy…+=
country number which starts from 0, y means a telex member’s number.
request of retransmission of the latest navigation alarm number (in English) and its
NAV+=
list number.
request of retransmission of the latest navigation alarm number (in Chinese) and its
NAW+=
list number.
OBS+= transmission of ship weather information.
OPR+= operator’s operation (OCC means a operator is in communication).
QRC+= means ship AAIC information.
RPT+= request of retransmission list of navigation alarm etc.
STA+= request of distribution information of report available within 24 hours.
STS+= transmission of information between ships.
SVC+= transmission of business report.
TEST+(TST+)= request of QBF message(test message).
TGM+= transmission of radiotelegram message.
transmission of store and forward report to telex members, x means a country
TLXxy+=
number which starts from 0, y means a telex member’s number.
request the connection with the operator. this command is used only in an
URG+=
EMERGENCY.
WX+= request to receive a weather report immediately.
C-4
4. Weather Facsimile
4-1 WMO ( World Meteorological Organization ) Broadcasting Station and
Frequency
Country Station name Call sign Frequency (kHz)
JAPAN Tokyo JMH 3622.5, 7795.0, 13988.5

CHINA Beijing 3SD 8461.9, 12831.9, 16903.9
CHUKOTKA Pevek 148.0
REPUBLIC Taipei BMF 4616.0, 5250.0, 8140.0, 13900.0, 18560.0
OF CHINA
REPUBLIC Seoul HLL2 5385.0, 5857.5, 7433.5, 9165.0, 13570.0
OF KOREA
THAILAND Bangkok HSW64 7396.8
HSW61 17520.0
INDIA New Delhi ATA55 4995.5
ATA57 7405.0
ATE60 10107.0
ATV65 14842.0
KENYA Nairobi 5YE 9044.9, 17447.5
SOUTH AFRIKA Cape Naval ZSJ 4014.0, 7508.0, 13538.0, 18238.0
EGYPT Cairo SUU 4526.5, 10123.0
SENEGAL Dakar 6UV73 13667.5, 19750.0
BRAZIL Rio de Janeiro PWZ-33 12665.0, 16978.0
Brasilia PPN9 10225.0, 18080.0, 17146.4
CHILE Valparaiso CBV 4228.0, 8677.0
ARGENTINA Buenos Aires LRO69 5185.0
LRB72 10720.0
LRO84 18621.5
CANADA Halifax CFH 122.5, 4271.0, 6496.4, 10536.0, 13510.0
Iqaluit/Resolute VFF/VFR 3253.0, 7710.0
Sydney VCO 4416.0, 6915.1
Inuvik VFA 8457.8
U.S.A Kodiak NOJ 2054.0, 4298.0, 8459.0, 12412.5
PT. Reyes NMC 4346.0, 8682.0, 12786.0, 17151.2, 22527.0
New Orleans NMG 4317.9, 8503.9, 12789.9, 17146.4
Boston NMF 4235.0, 6340.5, 9110.0, 12750.0
AUSTRALIA Charleville VMC 2628.0, 5100.0, 11030.0, 13920.0, 20469.0
Wiluna VMW 5755.0, 7535.0, 10555.0, 15615.0, 18060.0
NEW ZEALAND Wellington ZKLF 3247.4, 5807.0, 9459.0, 13550.5, 16340.1

HAWAII(U.S.A) Honolulu KVM70 9982.5, 11090.0, 16135.0
DENMARK Skamlebaek OXT 5850.0, 9360.0, 13855.0, 17510.0
GREECE Athens SVJ4 4481.0, 8105.0
GERMANY Hamburg DDH3 3855.0
DDK3 7880.0
DDK6 13882.5
ITALY Rome IMB51 4777.5
IMB55 8146.6
IMB56 13597.3
RUSSIA Murmansk RBW41 5336.0, 6445.5, 7908.8
RBW48 10130.0
U.K Northwood GYA 2618.5, 4610.0, 8040.0, 11086.5
Persian Gulf GYA 6834.0, 12390.0, 18261.0
C-5
4-2 Meteorological Agency ( JMH )
Broadcast schedule and Frequency
"The following schedule table is issued by JMH."
Japan Meteorological Agency homepage: Weather Radio Facsimile (JMH)
C-6
4-3 Weather Facsimile Specification & Term
4-3-1 Facsimile
(1) Recording method
There are some methods such as electric-discharge-recording method using needles for
recording, thermal-recording method using a thermal head, etc. in storage devices.
- Recording-needle method:
supply voltage to recording paper (1 needle-method, 3 needle-method)
- Thermal head Method:
supply heat to recording paper (solid method, sliding method)
(2) Recording paper
There are two kinds of recording paper such as electric-discharge-recording paper and
thermal-recording paper, depending on recording methods.
- Electric-discharge-recording paper:
AC high-voltage destruction method (smells)
DC low-voltage destruction method (aluminum-vapor-deposition paper etc.)
- Thermal-recording paper:
reacts to heat and then colors. Its storage is taken into account.
(3) Effective width of paper
The width with which information are drawn actually is called “Effective width”. This is the
basis of the calculation of the density of scanning lines (below paragraph 4), using a
cooperation coefficient.
(4) Cooperation coefficient/ density of scanning lines
(a) When the paper size for transmission device is different from the paper size for
recording device, coefficient 288 and 576 are defined as similar figures, but in most
cases, transmission is made by using 576.
(b) The relation between recording paper width and line density is as follows.
Recording 10-inch 12-inch 14-inch 15-inch
paper size recording paper recording paper recording paper recording paper
Cooperation 288 576 288 576 288 576 288 576
coefficient
Line density 3.5l /mm 7l /mm 3l /mm 6l /mm 2.5l /mm 5l /mm 2.4l /mm 4.7l /mm
(5) Scan speed

(a) Scan speed means a speed which scans one line. According to WMO specification,
there are basically 3 speeds such as 60, 90, and 120 SPM (SCAN / MIN.).
(b) When using any speed other than the above-mentioned speed, multiples of 60 are
used. (For example, 180, 240 SPM)
(c) In most cases, transmission is carried out actually by 120SPM. Transmission by
60SPM or 90SPM is rare. (Note:Kyodo News: combined use of 60/120SPM)
(6) Independent synchronization
A transmitting side transmits at highly accurate fixed speed, without restrictions imposed by
a receiving side.
The receiving side receives at the same speed in accordance with the accuracy of the
transmitting side. While each sends and receives independently, the synchronization of
receiving side is called independent synchronization.
(7) Automatic control signal
This is a control signal for starting or stopping Fax automatically and remotely. A START
signal which specifies a cooperation coefficient, and a Phase Control signal which specifies
SCAN SPEED, are transmitted. STOP signal is transmitted at the end of broadcast.
These remote signals are used for FAX, and FAX is automatically controlled by such
signals.
C-7
(1) START signal (2) STOP signal (3) Phase signal
675Hz The number of 450 Hz At each scanning speed,
cooperation coefficient: (Common) black is 95% and white is
Select any one from 5%.
288
300Hz The number of
cooperation coefficient:
Select any one from 576.
4-3-2 Receiver
(1) Radio Wave Type: F3C
Although there is a subcarrier method by direct FS and SSB, the same wave type is used.
Moreover, a photograph broadcast is performed by FM method and the same wave type is
used.
(2) Frequency range

The FAX broadcast is carried out using shortwave and long wave.
Frequency range
Shortwave: 2 MHz - 25 MHz
Long wave: 80 kHz - 160 kHz
The frequencies used for broadcasting stations all over the world are changed frequently.
Since reception is impossible, with old frequency set up, the service call of “reception
default” may be made. Therefore, frequency changes should be taken into account.
(3) FAX signal

The FAX signal is 1900Hz±400Hz FS signal, and 2300Hz is assigned to a white signal, and
1500 Hz is assigned to a black signal.
In the case of using external receivers, setup is carried out so that this signal may be
acquired.
C-8
5. MF/HF Radio Equipment
Specification / Performance
(1) General
a. Transmit frequency: 1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz
b. Receive frequency: 90.0 to 29999.9 kHz
c. Frequency deviation: Less than ±10 Hz
d. Radio Wave Type: J3E, F1B (J2B)
e. Antenna impedance: 50 ohms Unbalance
f. Frequency shift time: Less than 15 seconds
g. Main power supply: AC100/220V±10%
h. Auxiliary power: DC24V+30%/-10%
(2) Transmitter
a. Output power: HF band: 150W, 250W or 500W, (depending on each model,
main power supply in use)
b. Occupied Bandwidth: J3E: within 3 kHz, F1B: within 0.5 kHz
c. Carrier power: J3E: not lees than damping ratio 40 dB
d. Intensity of spurious emission:
43 dB lower than fundamental frequency, and 50 mW or less
e. Attenuation for every frequency of unnecessary emission
J3E: 1.5 - 4.5kHz: not less than 31 dB,
4.5 - 7.5 kHz: not less than 38 dB,
above 7.5kHz: not less than 43 dB
(However, Peak power of unnecessary emission: 50 mW or less)
F1B (J2B):
Attenuation (dB)
Detuning Frequency (Hz)
f. Total distortion and noise: -20 dB or less

g. AF frequency response: deviation: within 6 dB between 350Hz and 2700Hz
(3) Receiver
a. Frequency stability: within ±10 Hz
b. Sensitivity (SINAD 20dB)
J3E: 6.3μV or less (1605.0 to 4000.0 kHz), 3.5 μV or less (4000.0 to 27500.0 kHz)
F1B: 1.8μV -or less (1605.0 to 4000.0 kHz), 1.0 μV or less (4000.0 to 27500.0 kHz)
c. Selectivity
J3E: 2.4 to 3.0 kHz (6dB bandwidth), within ±2.1kHz (66dB bandwidth)
F1B: 270 to 300 Hz (6dB bandwidth), within ±550Hz (60dB bandwidth)
d. Spurious response
J3E: Not less than 60 dB
F1B: Character error rate: 1% or less (when interfered by an interfering wave which is
31.6 mV and is 750 Hz off a desired wave with 10μV)
C-9
e. Sensitivity suppression effect
J3E: Interfering wave input voltage: not less than 10mV
An interfering wave causes 3dB suppression of a desired wave output with10μV and
is 3 kHz off a desired wave.
F1B: Character error rate: 1% or less (when interfered by an interfering wave which is 1
mV and is 500 Hz off a desired wave with 10μV)
f. Total distortion and noise: ratio of low frequency 1000Hz to unnecessary component
included in it: not less than 30 dB (when an input signal with 30μV is added.)
g. Electric waves etc. which are emitted secondarily:
power emitted from an antenna terminal: 4nW or less
(4) DSC Watchkeeping Receiver
a. Frequency: 2187.5 kHz/ 8414.5 kHz / 4207.5 kHz/ 6312.0 kHz/12577 kHz/ 16804.5 kHz
b. Frequency Stability: Less than ±10 Hz
c. Sensitivity: Character error rate: 1% or less, at 1μV of reception input voltage
d. Bandwidth: width 6 dB: 270 to 300 Hz, width 30dB: within ±380Hz,
width 60dB: within ±550Hz
e. Spurious response: Character error rate: 1% or less (when interfered by an interfering
wave which is 31.6 mV and is 750 Hz off a desired wave with10μV)
f. Sensitivity suppression effect
Character error rate: 1% or less (when interfered by an interfering wave which is 1 mV
and is 500 Hz off a desired wave with 10μV)
g. Electric waves etc. are secondarily emitted:
power emitted from an antenna terminal: 4nW or less
(5) DSC modem
a. Modulation rate: within 100 baud ± 30 ppm
b. Modulation: FSK (subcarrier: 1700 Hz)
c. Y signal frequency: within 1615Hz±0.5Hz
d. B signal frequency: within 1785Hz±0.5Hz
e. Protocol: ITU-R recommendation M.493
f. Operational Procedure: ITU-R recommendation, M.541, M.821
g. Code in use: Ten-bit error-detecting code
(6) NBDP modem
a. Modulation rate: within 100 baud ± 30 ppm
b. Modulation: FSK (subcarrier: 1700 Hz)
c. Y signal frequency: within 1615 Hz ± 0.5 Hz
d. B signal frequency: within 1785 Hz ± 0.5Hz
e. Protocol: ITU-R recommendation M.476, M.491, M.625
f. Operational Procedure: ITU-R recommendation, M.492
g. Code in use: Seven -bit code 4B / 3Y
(7) Antenna tuner
a. Frequency range: 1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz
b. Maximum input power: based on each model.
c. VSWR after tunned: 2:1 or less
d. Tunning: Preset or automatic tuning.
C-10
6. International VHF
( for Maritime Mobile Communication )
6-1 Characteristics
(1) Main performance of transmitter (2) Main performance of receiver

a. Output power: 25W a. Receiving sensitivity:
b. Frequency stability: less than (±)10x10-6 receiver input voltage required to obtain 20-dB
noise suppression: less than 2 μV
c. The maximum frequency distortion: less than 5 kHz
b. Squelch sensitivity 0.5μV
d. Occupancy frequency band width: 16 kHz or less
c. Signal to noise ratio not less than 40 dB
e. Modulation frequency characteristics: based on 1 kHz.
d. Receiving bandwidth and Selectivity
0.3 kHz : -10.5±2 dB
Pass band of a received signal:
2 kHz : + 4±2 dB
at a point of 6 dB below: not less than 12 kHz
3 kHz : + 6±2 dB
bandwidth at a point of 70 dB below:
f. Signal to noise ratio: not less than 40 dB
less than 2.5 kHz.
g. Spurious emission:
compared with a fundamental wave output
strength tolerance between 142-162 MHz
within the band Value of 80 dB lower than
outside the band Value of 60 dB lower than
h. Antenna impedance: 50 Ω (previous model: 75Ω)
i. Voice modulation input impedance: 40Ω
6-2 Antenna position in the case of installation of more than 2 antennas

(1) No.1 antenna position is generally higher than No.2 antenna position. And, No.1 antenna is
installed onboard as high as possible. For example, it is desirable that its height should be
almost the same as a radar scanner, and should be away from transmission antennas for
Medium wave and for Short wave as much as possible in a large ship.
No.1 Antenna
Mast
No.1 Antenna
not less than at
least 4 m
Mast
No.2 Antenna
No.2 Antenna
Mast
Arranged on the same vertical line. Not arranged on the same vertical line or obliquely
Fig. 6-1 Arrangement of antenna
C-11
(2) Two or more antennas are normaly arranged on the same vertical line. The distance
between antennas is at least 4 m as a minimum, and the desirable distance between
antennas is bigger than 4 m, as much as possible.
(3) When two or more antennas are not arranged on the same vertical line, a minimum
distance is found as shown in the following figure, an actual distance should be bigger than
a minimum distance (4m). Influences given to receiving by transmissions should be fully
investigated and then antenna installation is designed and carried out.
Example of a minimum distance at

which a transmitter does not interfere a
receiver.
Area available
for installation - when H is 8 m and D is 3 m, these
Boundary distances are usable . (A point).
- If H is set to 4 m and D is set to 6 m,
Undesirable while transmitting, a trouble that noise
㊦ Area for of a receiver increases , etc. are
installation caused. (B point).
Fig. 6-2 Distance between antennas
(4) The diameter of a mast for antenna installation, and the distance between an antenna and
a mast:
The electric field intensity pattern of an antenna changes according to the diameter of a
mast and the distance between antennas.
(5) Installation position for antennas: It is desirably far apart from a funnel, a radar mast and
other structures, which may have a shielding effect, as much as possible (because such
structures affect the field intensity pattern.).
(6) Installation of two VHF antennas: It is desirable that antennas should be vertically installed
as much as possible. In this case, the distance between antennas is not less than 4 m. If
antennas are horizontally arranged unavoidably, the distance between antennas should be
not less than 17 m. Even in such an arrangement of antennas, when one VHF transmits,
the other receiving VHF is interfered by the transmitting VHF during receiving. For
reference, the following is introduced, in order to eliminate interference completely, in the
case of the vertical installation of VHF antennas, at least a separation of 50 m is required,
and in the case of horizontal installation of VHF antennas, antennas are at least 80 m away
from another one.
C-12
6-3 Antenna Installation and Waterproofing
Fig. 6-3 Antenna Installation
According to the following procedure, antenna is installed.

(1) Insert a coaxial connector into an antenna connector straight.
(2) Screw a coaxial connector up to the end.
(3) Waterproof a coaxial cable up to an antenna metal base (up to the position of 76-81 mm
from a top end of the metal base). A self-adhesive tape is bound 5 times with the tape
half-overlaped. A vinyl tape is bound three times over the self-adhesive tape bound with the
tape half-overlaped as shown in Figure 6-3.
(4) Fix the antenna base with the antenna attachment. A metal base top end should juts
10-15 mm out of the antenna attachment.
(5) Waterproof the metal base above the antenna attachment up to an antenna element.
A self-adhesive tape is bound 5 times with the tape half-overlaped. A vinyl tape is bound
three times over the self-adhesive tape bound as shown in Figure 6-3.
(6) The antenna attachment is fitted to the mast (suitable diameter: Φ 35-80mm).
C-13
6-4 International Maritime Mobile Communication VHF Channel List
6-4-1 ITU Channnel （ITU-RR Appendix18）
Semi-Duplex/
CH TX (MHz) RX (MHz) Simplex Remarks
Duplex
01 156.050 160.650 ●
02 156.100 160.700 ●
03 156.150 160.750 ●
04 156.200 160.800 ●
05 156.250 160.850 ●
06 156.300 156.300 ● Ship to Ship Communication
07 156.350 160.950 ●
09 156.450 156.450 ●
10 156.500 156.500 ●
11 156.550 156.550 ●
12 156.600 156.600 ●
13 156.650 156.650 ●
14 156.700 156.700 ●
15 156.750 156.750 ●
16 156.800 156.800 ●
17 156.850 156.850 ●
18 156.900 161.500 ●
19 156.950 161.550 ●
20 157.000 161.600 ●
21 157.050 161.650 ●
22 157.100 161.700 ●
23 157.150 161.750 ●
24 157.200 161.800 ●
25 157.250 161.850 ●
26 157.300 161.900 ●
27 157.350 161.950 ●
28 157.400 162.000 ●
60 156.025 160.625 ●
61 156.075 160.675 ●
62 156.125 160.725 ●
63 156.175 160.775 ●
64 156.225 160.825 ●
65 156.275 160.875 ●
C-14
66 156.325 160.925 ●
67 156.375 156.375 ●
68 156.425 156.425 ●
69 156.475 156.475 ●
70 156.525 156.525 ● Exclusively used for DSC
71 156.575 156.575 ●
73 156.675 156.675 ●
74 156.725 156.725 ●
75 156.775 156.775 ● 1W fix
76 156.825 156.825 ● 1W fix
78 156.925 161.525 ●
79 156.975 161.575 ●
80 157.025 161.625 ●
81 157.075 161.675 ●
82 157.125 161.725 ●
83 157.175 161.775 ●
84 157.225 161.825 ●
85 157.275 161.875 ●
86 157.325 161.925 ●
87 157.375 157.375 ●
88 157.425 157.425 ●
Note: CH87and CH88 receiving frequency used for the previous purpose (161.975Mhz and 162.025MHz）
were assigned for the exclusive use in AIS.
C-15
6-4-2 USA Channel （FCC Rule 47 CER80.371(c) and 80.373(f) ）
Semi-Duplex/
Duplex
01 156.050 156.050 ●
02 Not used
03 Not used
04 Not used
05 156.250 156.250 ●
07 156.350 156.350 ●
09 156.450 156.450 ●
10 156.500 156.500 ●
11 156.550 156.550 ●
12 156.600 156.600 ●
13 156.650 156.650 ● during an initial stage, 1W
14 156.700 156.700 ●
15 156.750 Transmission is prohibited
16 156.800 156.800 ●
17 156.850 156.850 ●
18 156.900 156.900 ●
19 156.950 156.950 ●
for USCG
21 157.050 157.050 ● (General use is prohibited.)
22 157.100 157.100 ●
for USCG
24 157.200 161.800 ●
25 157.250 161.850 ●
26 157.300 161.900 ●
27 157.350 161.950 ●
28 157.400 162.000 ●
60 Not used
61 Not used
62 Not used
63 156.175 156.175 ●
64 Not used
65 156.275 156.275 ●
C-16
66 156.325 156.325 ●
67 156.375 156.375 ● during an initial stage, 1W
68 156.425 156.425 ●
69 156.475 156.475 ●
71 156.575 156.575 ●
73 156.675 156.675 ●
74 156.725 156.725 ●
75 156.775 156.775 ● 1W fix
76 156.825 156.825 ● 1W fix

Ship to Ship Communication
77 156.875 156.875 ● 1W fix
78 156.925 156.925 ●
79 156.975 156.975 ●
80 157.025 157.025 ●
82 157.125 157.125 ●
For the exclusive use of USCG
84 157.225 161.825 ●
85 157.275 161.875 ●
86 157.325 161.925 ●
87 157.375 161.975 ●
88 157.425 ● Ship to Ship Communication
Note: In the above listed channels, “Not used” are not able to be set in USA channel mode.
C-17
6-4-3 Canada Channel (INDUSTRY CANADA RIC-13）
Semi-Duplex/
Duplex
01 156.050 160.650 ●
02 156.100 160.700 ●
03 156.150 160.750 ●
For the exclusive use of CCG
05 156.250 156.250 ●
07 156.350 156.350 ●
09 156.450 156.450 ●
10 156.500 156.500 ●
11 156.550 156.550 ●
12 156.600 156.600 ●
13 156.650 156.650 ●
14 156.700 156.700 ●
15 156.750 156.750 ● 1W fixed
16 156.800 156.800 ●
17 156.850 156.850 ● 1W fixed
18 156.900 156.900 ●
20 157.000 161.600 ● 1W fixed
Transmission is prohibited.
21 161.650
(Weather cannnel)
23 157.150 161.750 ●
24 157.200 161.800 ●
25 157.250 161.850 ●
26 157.300 161.900 ●
27 157.350 161.950 ●
28 157.400 162.000 ●
60 156.025 160.625 ●

63 Not used
64 156.225 160.825 ●
C-18
65 156.275 156.275 ● 1W fixed
66 156.325 156.325 ● 1W fixed
68 156.425 156.425 ●
69 156.475 156.475 ●
71 156.575 156.575 ●
74 156.725 156.725 ●
75 Not used
76 Not used
77 156.875 156.875 ● 1W fixed
78 156.925 156.925 ●
79 156.975 156.975 ●
80 157.025 157.025 ●
Transmission is prohibited
83 161.775
(Weather channel)
84 157.225 161.825 ●
85 157.275 161.875 ●
86 157.325 161.925 ●
87 157.375 161.975 ●
88 157.425 162.025 ●
Note: In the above listed channels, “Not used” are not able to be set in CANADA channel mode.
C-19
6-4-4 IWW channel （ETSI EN 300 698-1 V1.3.1）
Semi-Duplex/
Duplex
01 156.050 160.650 ●
02 156.100 160.700 ●
03 156.150 160.750 ●
04 156.200 160.800 ●
05 156.250 160.850 ●
1W fixed,
06 156.300 156.300 ● Ship to ship communication
07 156.350 160.950 ●
1W fixed,
09 156.450 156.450 ●
10 156.500 156.500 ● 1W fixed
11 156.550 156.550 ● 1W fixed
12 156.600 156.600 ● 1W fixed
13 156.650 156.650 ● 1W fixed
14 156.700 156.700 ● 1W fixed
15 156.750 156.750 ● 1W fixed
16 156.800 156.800 ●
17 156.850 156.850 ● 1W fixed
18 156.900 161.500 ●
19 156.950 161.550 ●
20 157.000 161.600 ●
21 157.050 161.650 ●
22 157.100 161.700 ●
23 157.150 161.750 ●
24 157.200 161.800 ●
25 157.250 161.850 ●
26 157.300 161.900 ●
27 157.350 161.950 ●
28 157.400 162.000 ●
60 156.025 160.625 ●
61 156.075 160.675 ●
62 156.125 160.725 ●
63 156.175 160.775 ●
64 156.225 160.825 ●
65 156.275 160.875 ●
66 156.325 160.925 ●
C-20
67 156.375 156.375 ●
68 156.425 156.425 ●
69 156.475 156.475 ●
71 156.575 156.575 ● 1W fixed
1W fixed,
73 156.675 156.675 ●
74 156.725 156.725 ● 1W fixed
75 156.775 156.775 ● 1W fixed
76 156.825 156.825 ● 1W fixed
1W fixed,
78 156.925 161.525 ●
79 156.975 161.575 ●
80 157.025 161.625 ●
81 157.075 161.675 ●
82 157.125 161.725 ●
83 157.175 161.775 ●
84 157.225 161.825 ●
85 157.275 161.875 ●
86 157.325 161.925 ●
87 157.375 157.375 ●
88 157.425 157.425 ●
Note: CH87and CH88 receiving frequency used for the previous purpose (161.975Mhz and 162.025MHz）
were assigned for the exclusive use in AIS.
6-4-5 Weather Channel ( FCC Rule 47CER80.371(c) and 80.373(f))

CH RX (MHz) Remarks
WX1 162.550 NOAA Weather Channel
WX8 161.650 CANADA CMB Service
WX9 161.775 CANADA CMB Service
WX0 163.275 NOAA Weather Channel(only assignment)
C-21
7. Two Way VHF Radio Equipment
Specification and Performance

(1) General
a. Channel already installed:
CH 6 (156.300 MHz)
*Ships flying the Japanese flag are not fitted with this channel.
CH13 (156.650 MHz)
CH15 (156.750MHz)
CH16 (156.800MHz)
CH17 (156.850MHz)
CH67 (156.375 MHz)
b. Optional channel: 7 waves (156.300-156.875 MHz)
* Ships flying the Japanese flag cannot be fitted with these channels.
c. Communication type: Simplex
d. Radio Wave Type: F3E (G3E)
e. Antenna: Vertical, Omnidirectional type
f. Continuous operation time: not less than 8 hour
(Transmit, Receive, Waiting: 6 sec, 6 sec, 48 sec)
g. Supply voltage: between 7.2VDC and 9.0VDC ±10%
h. Environmental condition: High temperature
Low temperature
Watertight
(2) Transmit section

a. Antenna power: 0.8W+50%, -20%
b. Effective radiation power: not less than 0.25W
c. Frequency deviation: within 10x10 -6
d. Preemphasis characteristics: 6 dB / Oct
e. Occupied bandwidth: 16 kHz or less
f. Maximum frequency deviation: ±2.5 kHz - ±5 kHz of
g. Total distortion and noise: not less than 20 dB
(3) Receive section
a. Sensitivity: 2 μV (6dBμ) or less
b. Selectivity: 6 dB bandwidth : not less than 12 kHz
70 dB attenuation: within 25 kHz
c. Spurious response: not less than 70dB
d. Frequency fluctuation of local
oscillator: 0.001% or less
e. Sensitivity suppression effect: not less than 10 mV (80dBμ)
f. Intermodulation characteristics: not less than 1.78 mV (65dBμ)
g. Deemphasis characteristics: -6 dB/Oct
h. Total distortion and noise: not less than 20 dB
C-22
8. Shipborne 400 MHz Communication Equipment
UHF Transceiver
8-1 Outline
This equipment is used for communication at sea, during cargo handling, bringing a ship alongside
the pier, mooring, etc. and for communication between ships, between a ship and the bridge,
between a ship and a pier. There are two types such as explosion-proof type and non-explosion
proof type. Fixing type (for base station) is non-explosion type.
A explosion-proof type radio equipment is compatible with the standards related to intrinsically
safety proof and can be used on tankers such as LPG(Liquefied Petroleum Gas) tanker, on LNG
(Liquefied Natural Gas) tanker and Heavy Oil Tanker or in the Type 1 Dangerous Place.
8-2 Operating Frequency

Portable type Fix type
Transmit Receive Transmit Receive
S: Simplex (press talk) channel

SD: Semi-duplex (press talk) channel
It is used through a relay station.
8-3 Tone squelch

By using a tone squelch circuit, the unnecessary contents of communication caused by using the
same frequency in common, can be avoided.
8-4 Tone Signal Frequency

Identification Licensee group Tone signal frequency (Hz)
A The 1st group - the 3rd group 107.2 114.8 123.0 131.8
B The 4th group - the 6th group 141.3 151.4 162.2 173.8
C The 7th group - the 9th group 186.2 203.5 218.8 233.6
D The 10th group - the 12th group 103.5 110.9 118.8 127.3
E The 13th group - the 15th group 136.5 146.2 156.7 167.9
F The 16th group - the 18th group 179.9 192.8 210.7 225.7
Used for pilotage, towing work or bringing a ship to 67 77 88.5
pier, mooring (One wave which is designated for every unit area)
C-23
9. Interface Standards
In this chapter, the standards related to interface (standard of physical specifications of
hardware, data format and connectors and cables) needed in data communications, such as
electronic navigation equipment, navigation apparatus, radiocommunication and personal
computer, are introduced.
9-1 Global Standard

Regarding the requirements related to the interfacing between electronic devices, IEC
(International Electrotechnical Commission) issues global standards, which are applied to the
communication between maritime electronic navigation equipment and computers, etc. as well.
IEC develops global standards and publishes these standards for the Electric/Electronic Industry
and users of standard. All of the industrialized countries are contained in members to IEC.
Standards developed by IEC are used by more than 100 countries. Standards, Guidelines and
Technical Reports issued by IEC are all numbered, since the year 1997, the number of 60000 to
79999 has been used by IEC. The IEC/ISO international standard numbering system was unified
by the IEC/ISO (International Organization for standardization) Joint Expert Advisory Council.
Numbers are shared by IEC and ISO, and ISO uses any number of 1-59999, and IEC uses any
number of 60000 to 79999 according to the unified numbering. The publications issued before
1997 by IEC is also unified into a new numbering system adding the number of 60000 to the
previous numbering (for example, IEC 950 is set to IEC 60950).
In this chapter, especially Standard IEC 61162: [Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems – Digital interfaces, Single talker and multiple listeners] is chosen from
among IEC standards, and the global standards of hardware and data formats relating to the
interfaces and communications between electronic navigation equipment or between Electronic
navigation equipment and personnel computers is described. IEC 61162 part 1 regulates the
frequency of sentence transmission of about once per second. In addition, IEC 61162 part 2
defines a high-speed transmission of around once per 20 ms. This chapter focuses on the
standard in high-speed communication.
In IEC 61162, it is noted that circuits used in electronic equipment meet the requirements of ITU.
ITU (International Telecommunication Union) consists of ITU-T (International Telecommunication
Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU) and ITU-R (International
Telecommunication Union Radiocommunications Sector of ITU) and each sector issues
recommendations as an International Standards as required. This chapter relates to ITU-T
Recommendations V. defining modem etc.
The portion relating to the data format in IEC standards is strictly in cooperation with NMEA 0183
version 2.30, and both coincide on the contents. NMEA is an acronym for "The National Marine
Electronics Association", and aims at contributing to the spread and the development of the
Maritime Electronic Equipment Industry and the Market, and defines the interfaces between
navigation equipment, the communication protocol, etc. Regarding the data formatter of IEC
standard, only some examples are shown in IEC standard. Therefore, for details, it is necessary to
refer to manufacturer’s instructions or publications of NMEA. IEC recommends manufacturers to
describe necessary information about communication on equipment instruction books or
publications for exclusive use.
However, regarding connector, the standard IEC 61162 introduces “No standard connector is
specified. Wherever possible readily available commercial connectors shall be used.
Manufacturers shall provide means for user identification of the connections used.” In the latter
half of this chapter, the international standards on connectors widely used for the connection
between electronic equipment, is described. Although it has been released as "standard which
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) recommends", many electronic devices including personal
computers support this standard, and it serves as the global standard substantially.
Moreover, IEC 61097-7 standard and IEC 60945 standard are outlined in this chapter.
The Guidelines and the homepage address of publishers related to this chapter are introduced
below.
IEC 60945:
Fourth edition 2002-08, IEC 60945: Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment
C-24
and systems – General requirements – Methods of testing and required test results
IEC 61097-7:
First edition 1996-10, Part 7: Shipborne VHF radiotelephone transmitter and receiver –
Operational and performance requirements, methods of testing and required test results
IEC 61162-1:
1995, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems –Digital
interfaces – Part 1: Single talker and multiple listeners
IEC 61162-2:
1998, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems –Digital
interfaces – Part 2: Single talker and multiple listeners, high-speed transmission
The abovementioned standards are related to IEC, http://www.iec.ch (English)
ITU-T X.27/V.11: (for low speed)
1996, Electrical characteristics for balanced double-current interchange circuits operating at
data signalling rates up to 10 Mbit/s
ITU-T V.11: (for high speed)
1996, Electrical characteristics for balanced double-current interchange circuits operating at
data signalling rates up to 10 Mbit/s, http://www.itu.int/ITU-T/(English)
NMEA 0183 Version 2.30::
1998, National Marine Electronics Association (USA) – Standard For Interfacing Marine
electronic devices, version 2.30, http://www.nmea.org (English)
EIA 485:
1991, Standard for electrical characteristics of generators and receivers for use in balanced
digital multipoint systems, http://www.eia.org（English）
9-2 Hardware specification / Data format ( IEC 61162 standard )

IEC 61162 standard is outlined below. The underlied portions relate only to a high-speed
transmission and does not describe a standard-speed transmission.
In this chapter, the connection between one talker (data transmitting side) and two or more
listeners (data reception side) is assumed. For example, a combination of a GPS receiver (talker),
a personal computer, or a chart plotter (listener) is treated here in detail.
Most of description on standards of IEC61162 below is cited from IEC61162-1/-2.
9-2-1 Hardware specification
One talker and multiple listeners may be connected in parallel through interconnecting wires.
Shielded cables are recommended in order to meet EMC requirements. The number of listeners
depends on the output capability of a talker and is subject to the use of termination resistors.
(1) Interconnecting wires
A cables interconnecting a talker and a listener consists of a shielded twisted-pair wire
(two-conductor: A, B) and a ground wire (C) for a talker an a listener.
Regarding a ground wire, there are two cases as follows.
- another third wire additional to the twisted pair wire, or
- double-shielded wire (an inner shield and an outer shiled are insulated.)
(2) Conductor definitions
The conductors are the signal lines A, B and shield (signal lines A, B, C and shield).
(3) Requirements for Electrical connection/shield
Single-Shielded cable
A talker’s signal line A is connected in parallel with A terminals of all devices and A talker’s
signal line B is connected in parallel with B terminals of all devices and A talker’s common
shiled line C is connected in parallel with C terminals of all devices. If a cable has an
independent shield line (C) and a single outer layer shield, the outer layer shield should be
connected to the chassis of the talker, and should not be connected at each listener. However,
a inner common shield terminal of the talker is interconnected to an inner common shield
terminal of every listener. (Refer to Figure 9.2-1 and Figure 9.2-2 (a))
C-25
Double-Shielded cable
With double-shielded cables and the inner shield used as common line C (signal ground), the
outer shield shall be connected to the chassis of the talker and shall not be connected to any
listener. However, the outer shield shall be continuous (unbroken) between all listeners (Refer
to Figure 9.2-1 and Figure 9.2-2 (b)).
With double-shielded cables and a separate wire as common line C (signal ground), the inner
shield shall be connected to the chassis of the talker and shall not be connected to any
listener. However, the inner shield shall be continuous (unbroken) between all listeners. The
outer shield may be connected to the chassis on either side if required (Refer to Figure 9.2-1
and Figure 9.2-2 (c)).
In cabling, the end of a cable should not left open cables are as short as possible. If a long
cable is required, the end of the cable should be terminaded in accordance with ITU-T V.11.
(Note: In the case of standard transmission speed, all listeners’ shield wires should be
connected only to the chassis of the talker but not to the chassis of the listeners.(Refer to
Figure 9.2-3)
Fig. 9.2-1 Talker/listener connection
C-26
Talker Listener
side side
Chassis Shield to each
Listener’s
shield
Chassis
Shield (Outer) to each
Listener’s
outer shield
The inner shiled is isolated from the outer

shiledChassis
Chassis
Shield (Inner) to each
Listener’s
Chassisi Chassis
The inner shield is isolated from
the outer shield.
*1 and *2 are connected to a
respective chassis.
Fig. 9.2-2 Cables – Electrical shield requirements
Protective
保護回路
circuit
B
Opto-isolator
光アイソレータ
リスナNo.2
Listener No.2
A A
Protective
保護回路
circuit
B B 光アイソレータ
Opto-isolator
シールド
Shield
リスナNo.1
Listener No.1
トーカ
Talker Note: 注：すべてのリスナのシールドはトーカのシャーシに接続し、
Shields of all listeners should be connected to a talker’s
各リスナのシャーシに接続してはいけない。
chassis but not connected to each listener’s chassis.
Fig. 9.2-3 Listener receive circuit
(4) Connector
No standards of connector is specified by IEC61162. Wherever possible, readily available
commercial connectors shall be used. Manufacturers shall provide means for user
identification of the connections used.
(Note: The International Standards of connector is introduced in paragraph 3.)
C-27
(5) Electrical signal characteristics
This subclause describes the electrical characteristics of transmitters and receivers.
(A) Signal state definitions
The idle, marking, logical 1, OFF or stop bit state is defined by a negative voltage on line A
with respect to line B.
The active, spacing, logical 0, ON or start bit state is defined by a positive voltage on line A
with respect to line B.
It should be noted that the above A with respect to B levels are inverted from the voltage
input/output requirements of standard UARTs* and that many line drivers and receivers
provide a logic inversion.
*：UART（Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter）
(B) Talker drive circuits
No provision is made for more than a single talker to be connected to the bus. The drive circuit
used to provide the signal A and the return B shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements of
ITU-T X.27/V.11.
Improved and compatible driver circuits (e.g. EIA-485) used in a compliant way are allowed.
(C) Listener receive circuits
Multiple listeners may be connected to a single talker. The listener's receive circuit shall
comply with ITU-T V.11. Optional termination resistors for the line shall be provided as shown
in Figure 1 and 3. The input terminals A, B and C shall be electrically isolated from the
remaining electronics of the listening device. Reference is made to (D). A termination
resistor is used as required.
The receive circuit shall be designed for operation with a minimum differential input voltage of
2,0 V 1 and shall not take more than 2,0 mA from the line at that voltage.
(D) Electrical isolation
Within a listener there shall be no direct electrical connection between the signal lines A and
signal return lines B, or the shield to ship's mains ground or power line. Isolation from ships’
ground is required.
In the case of high speed, Within a listener there shall be no direct electrical connection
between the signal lines A and B, the signal ground C or the shield to ship's mains ground or
power line. This isolation shall be in accordance with IEC 60945.
(E) Maximum voltage on the bus
The maximum applied voltage between signal lines A and B and between either line and
ground shall be in accordance with ITU-T X.27/V.11.
For protection against miswiring and for unintended connection to earlier TALKER designs, all
receive circuit devices shall be capable of withstanding 15 V between either lines and signal
ground (between A and B, between A and C and between B and C) for an indefinite period.
9-2-2 Data transmission

Data is transmitted in serial asynchronous form according to the standards. The first bit is a start
bit and is followed by data bits, least-significant-bit first, as illustrated by Figure 9.2-4. The logical
level is high during no data sent, and 1 bit of the logic value 0 is sent as a start signal which means
the commencement of data transmission. This is called a start bit. Listeners begin reception once
Logical level becomes Logical 0.
The first bit is a start bit and is followed by 8 data bits. A transmission starts with a
least-significant-bit. Only 7 bits are required for the transmission of Alphabet characters. Therefore,
7 bits mode may be supported. (In Japan, 8 bits are used.)
Stop bit is the logical 1 and the end signal of a transmission of one byte.
C-28
Logical “1”
Logical “0”
Fig. 9.2-4 Data transmission format
The relation between voltage and logic value is described below. For reasons of compatibility with
equipment designed to comply with earlier versions of NMEA 0183, it is noted that the idle,
marking, logical "1", OFF or stop bit state had previously been defined to be in the range –15,0 V
to +0,5 V. The active, spacing, logical "0", ON or start bit state was defined to be in the range +4,0
V to +15,0 V while sourcing was not less than 15 mA.
The following parameters are used:
- baud rate 38,400 bps (in the standard case: 4,800 bps);
- data bits 8 (D7 = 0),
- parity none;
- stop bits 1.
A unit of bps (bits per second) shows how many bits are sent per second. In Japan, 8 bits of data,
a start bit and a stop bit forms one block such as 1 byte and then 10 bits will be sent as 1 byte.
Therefore, the number of bytes sent per second is one third of the number indicated by the unit of
bps. In the case of 4800bps, about 480 characters per second can be sent.
9-2-3 Data format protocol

The type of data transmitted from a talker is ASCII and are printable. For example, data contain a
position, sattelite information,etc.
A typical message consists of 11 to 79 of maximum characters in length, it can be sent generally
not more frequently than once per 20 ms. (In the case of the standard transmission, 20 to 79
characters are sent normally once per second.)
(1) Characters
All transmitted data shall be interpreted as ASCII characters. The most significant bit of the
eight-bit character shall always be transmitted as zero (D7 = 0).
(A) Reserved characters
The reserved character set consists of those characters shown in Table 9.2-1. Except a
character “^” HEX 5E, shall not be used in data fields.
Table 9.2-1 Reserved characters
ASCII HEX DEC Description

<CR> 0D 13 Carriage return
<LF> 0A 10 Line feed – End of sentence delimiter
$ 24 36 Start of sentence delimiter
* 2A 42 Checksum field delimiter
, 2C 44 Field delimiter
! 21 33 Start of encapsulation sentence delimiter
/ 5C 92 Comment block delimiter
Code delimiter for HEX
^ 5E 94
representation of ISO 8859-1 (ASCII) characters
~ 7E 126 Reserved for future use
<del> 7F 127 Reserved for future use
C-29
(B) Valid characters
The valid character set consists of all printable ASCII characters (HEX 20 to HEX 7E) except
those defined as reserved characters. The list of the valid character set is given in Table
9.2-2.
Table 9.2-2 Valid Characters
ASCII HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC
Space 20 32 @ 40 64 ｀ 60 96
Reserved 21 33 A 41 65 a 61 97
"" 22 34 B 42 66 b 62 98
# 23 35 C 43 67 c 63 99
Reserved 24 36 D 44 68 d 64 100
% 25 37 E 45 69 e 65 101
& 26 38 F 46 70 f 66 102
' 27 39 G 47 71 g 67 103
( 28 40 H 48 72 h 68 104
) 29 41 I 49 73 i 69 105
Reserved 2A 42 J 4A 74 j 6A 106
+ 2B 43 K 4B 75 k 6B 107
Reserved 2C 44 L 4C 76 l 6C 108
- 2D 45 M 4D 77 m 6D 109
. 2E 46 N 4E 78 n 6E 110
/ 2F 47 O 4F 79 o 6F 111
0 30 48 P 50 80 p 70 112
1 31 49 Q 51 81 q 71 113
2 32 50 R 52 82 r 72 114
3 33 51 S 53 83 s 73 115
4 34 52 T 54 84 t 74 116
5 35 53 U 55 85 u 75 117
6 36 54 V 56 86 v 76 118
7 37 55 W 57 87 w 77 119
8 38 56 X 58 88 x 78 120
9 39 57 Y 59 89 y 79 121
: 3A 58 Z 5A 90 z 7A 122
; 3B 59 [ 5B 91 { 7B 123
< 3C 60 Reserved 5C 92 | 7C 124
= 3D 61 ] 5D 93 } 7D 125
> 3E 62 Reserved 5E 94 Reserved 7E 126
? 3F 63 _ 5F 95 Reserved 7F 127
(C) Undefined characters

ASCII values not specified as either “reserved characters” or “valid characters” are excluded
and shall not be transmitted at any time. When it is necessary to transmit an 8-bit character
defined by IEC 68859-1, three characters should be transmitted with the reserved character
“^“ (HEX 5E) followed by two ASCII characters.
For example, when "127.5°" is transmitted, as “°”（HEX F8）is not valid character, “127.5 ^F8”
is transmitted. To send the reserved characters <CR><LF>, ^0D^0A” is transmitted. And to
send the reserved character "^", “^5E” is transmitted.
C-30
(D) Character symbols
When individual characters are used in this standard to define units of measurement, to
indicate the type of data field, type of sentence, etc., they shall be interpreted according to
the character symbol in Table 9.2-3.
Table 9.2-3 Character symbols, Characters used as symbols and the meaning
Character Meanings
A Status symbol; Yes; Data valid; Warning flag clear; Auto; Ampere, ASCII
a Alphabet character variable A through Z or a through z
B Bar (pressure, 1 000 mb = 100 kPa(Pascal(Pa))),Bottom
C Celsius (Degrees); Course-up
c Valid character; Calculating
D Degrees (of arc)
E Error; East; Engine
F Fathoms (1 fathom equals 1,828 766 m)
f Feet (1 foot equals 0,304 79 m)
G Great circle; Green
g good
H Compass heading; Head-up; Hertz; Humidity
h Hours; HEX number
I Inches (1 inch equals 0,0254 m)
J Input operation completed
K Kilometres; km/h; kg/m3
k Kilograms（kg）
L Left; Local; Lost target
l Latitude; Litres; l/s
M Metres; m/s; Magnetic; Manual; Cubic metres
m Minutes; message
N Nautical miles; Knots; North; North-up; Newtons
n Numeral; address
P Purple; Proprietary (only when following "$" or “!”); Position sensor; Per cent; Pascal (pressure)
Q Query; Target-being-acquired
R Right; Rhumb line; Red; Relative; Reference; Radar tracking; revolutions/min (RPM)
S South; Statute miles (1 609,31 m); Statute miles/h; Shaft Salinity parts/thousand; Simulator mode
s Seconds; Six-bit number
T Time difference; True; Track; Tracked target
t Test
U Dead reckoning estimate
u Sign, if minus "-" (HEX 2D)
V Data invalid; No; Warning flag set; Manual; Volt
W West; Water; Wheelover
x Numeric character variable
y Longitude
Z Time
C-31
(2) Fields
A field consists of a string of valid characters, or no characters (null field), located between
two appropriate delimiter characters.
(A) Address field
An address field is the first field in a sentence and follows the "$" or “!” delimiter; it serves to
define the sentence. Characters within the address field are limited to digits and upper case
letters. The address field shall not be a null field. Only sentences with the following three
types of address fields shall be transmitted.
(a-1) Approved address field
Approved address fields consist of five digits. The first two characters are for identifing a
talker, and the type of data is identified by these two characters. Tne next three characters
define the form and format of data. These are shown in table 4, 5 respectively.
Regarding the first two characters, equipment, which can transmit data from multiple sources,
shall transmit the appropriate talker identifier. For example a device, which is equiped with
both a GPS receiver and a LORAN-C receiver, transmit GP when data is transmitted by GPS,
and transmits LC when data is transmittd by LORAN-C. If a ship’ s position is determinded by
combining both data of GPS and LORAN-C, IN is transmitted as an integrated navigation.
(a-2) Query address field
The query address field consists of five characters and is used for the purpose of requesting
the transmission of a specific sentence on a separate bus from an identified talker.
The first two characters indicates the talker identifier of a device requesting data, and the next
two characters indicates the talker identifier of a device being requested. The query character
“Q” is used for the last one character.
(a-3) Proprietary address field
The proprietary address field consists of the proprietary character “P” and manufacturer's
mnemonic code (three characters), and it is used to identify a talker issuing a proprietary
sentence. Any additional character may be required, if necessary.
Valid manufacturer's codes can be obtained from NMEA (See (C) in paragraph (3) sentence).
Table 9.2-4 Talker Identifiers

Talker device Identifier
Heading/track controller (autopilot) general *AG
Heading/track controller (autopilot) magnetic AP
Automatic identification system（AIS） AI
Communications: digital selective calling (DSC) *CD
data receiver CR CR
satellite *CS
radio-telephone (MF/HF) *CT
radio-telephone (VHF) *CV
scanning receiver *CX
DECCA navigator DE
Direction finder (DF) *DF
Electronic chart system (ECS) EC
Electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) EI
Emergency position indicating radio beacon (EPIRB) *EP
Engine room monitoring system ER ER
Global positioning system (GPS) GP
GLONASS positioning system GL
Global navigation satellite system (GNSS) GN GN
Heading sensors: compass, magnetic *HC
C-32
Talker device Identifier
gyro, north seeking *HE
gyro, non-north seeking HN
Integrated instrumentation II
Integrated navigation IN
LORAN: LORAN-C LC
Proprietary code P
Radar and/or radar plotting *RA
Sounder, depth *SD
Electronic positioning system, other/general SN
Sounder, scanning SS
Turn rate indicator TI *TI
Velocity sensors: Doppler, other/general *VD
speed log, water, magnetic VM
speed log, water, mechanical VW
Voyage data recorder VR VR
Transducer YX
Timekeeper, time/date: atomic clock ZA
chronometer ZC
quartz ZQ
radio update ZV
Weather instrument WI
*: Identifiers in this standard are used for electronic navigation equipment required by IMO.
This is the minimum requirements for equipment required by IMO in accordance with SOLAS Convention
(1974 amendment)
Table 9.2-5 Approved sentence formatters

Formatter Meaning
AAM Waypoint arrival alarm
ACK Acknowledge alarm
ALM GPS almanac data
ALR Set alarm state
APB Heading/track controller (autopilot) sentence BB
BEC Bearing and distance to waypoint – dead reckoning
BOD Bearing origin to destination
BWC Bearing and distance to waypoint – great circle
BWR Bearing and distance to waypoint – rhumb line
BWW Bearing waypoint to waypoint
DBT Depth below transducer
DCN DECCA position
DPT Depth
DSC Digital selective calling information
DSE Expanded digital selective calling
DSI DSC transponder initialise
DSR DSC transponder response
DTM Datum reference
FSI Frequency set information
C-33
Formatter Meaning
GBS GNSS satellite fault detection
GGA Global positioning system (GPS) fix data
GLC Geographic position – LORAN-C
GLL Geographic position – latitude/longitude
GNS GNSS fix data
GRS GNSS range residuals
GSA GNSS DOP and active satellites
GST GNSS pseudorange noise statistics
GSV GNSS satellites in view
HDG Heading, deviation and variation
HDT Heading true
HMR Heading monitor receive
HMS Heading monitor set
HSC Heading steering command
HTC Heading/track control command
HTD Heading /track control data
LCD LORAN-C signal data
MLA GLONASS almanac data
MSK MSK receiver interface
MSS MSK receiver signal status
MTW Water temperature
MWD Wind direction and speed
MWV Wind speed and angle
OSD Own ship data
RMA Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
RMB Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
ROT Rate of turn
RPM Revolutions
RSA Rudder sensor angle
RSD Radar system data
RTE Routes
SFI Scanning frequency information
STN Multiple data ID
TLB Target label
TLL Target latitude and longitude
TTM Tracked target message
TXT Text transmission
VBW Dual ground/water speed
VDR Set and drift
VHW Water speed and heading
VLW Dual ground/water distance
VPW Speed measured parallel to wind
VTG Course over ground and ground speed
WCV Waypoint closure velocity
WNC Distance waypoint to waypoint
WPL Waypoint location
XDR Transducer measurements
XTE Cross-track error, measured
C-34
Formatter Meaning
XTR Cross-track error, dead reckoning
ZDA Time and date
ZDL Time and distance to variable point
ZFO UTC and time from origin waypoint
ZTG UTC and time to destination waypoint
(B) Data fields

Data fields in approved sentences follow a "," delimiter and contain valid characters (and
code delimiters “^”). Peculiar Data fields in other sentences except approved sentences
rcontain only valid characters and the delimiter characters “,” and “^”, but are not defined by
IEC 61162.
Because of the presence of variable data fields and null fields, specific data fields shall only
be located within a sentence by observing the field delimiters ",". Therefore, it is essential for
the listener to locate fields by counting delimiters rather than counting the total number of
characters received from the start of the sentence.
(b-1) Variable length fields
Although some data fields are defined to have fixed length, many are of variable length in
order to allow devices to convey information and to provide data with more or less precision,
according to the capability or requirements of a particular device.
Variable length fields may be alphanumeric or numeric fields. Variable numeric fields may
contain a decimal point and may contain leading or trailing zeros.
(b-2) Data field types
Data fields may be alpha, numeric, alphanumeric, variable length, fixed length or fixed/
variable (with a portion fixed in length while the remainder varies). Some fields are constant,
with their value dictated by a specific sentence definition. The allowable field types are
summarized in Table 6.
(b-3) Null fields
A null field is a field of length zero, i.e. no characters are transmitted in the field. Null fields
shall be used when the value is unreliable or not available.
For example, if heading information were not available, sending data of "000" is misleading
because a user cannot distinguish between "000" meaning no data and a legitimate heading
of "000". However, a null field, with no characters at all, clearly indicates that no data is being
transmitted.
Null fields with their delimiters can have the following appearance depending on where they
are located in the sentence: ",," ",*"
The ASCII NULL character (HEX 00) shall not be used as the null field.
C-35
Table 9.2-6 Field type summary
Special format fields
Field type Symbol Description
Status A Single character field:

A = Yes, data valid, warning flag clear
V = No, data invalid, warning flag set
Latitude llll.ll Fixed/variable length field:

degrees/minutes and decimal – two fixed digits of degrees, two
fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for a
decimal fraction of minutes. Leading zeros always included for
degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length. The decimal
point and associated decimal fraction are optional if full
resolution is not required.
Longitude yyyyy.yy Fixed/variable length field:

degrees/minutes and decimal – three fixed digits of degrees,
two fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for a
decimal fraction of minutes. Leading zeros always included for
degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length. The decimal
point and associated decimal fraction are optional if full
resolution is not required.
Time hhmmss.ss Fixed/variable length field:

hours/minutes/seconds and decimal – two fixed digits of hours,
two fixed digits of minutes, two fixed digits of seconds and a
variable number of digits for decimal fraction of seconds.
Leading zeros always included for hours, minutes and seconds
to maintain fixed length. The decimal point and associated
decimal fraction are optional if full resolution is not required.
Defined field Some fields are specified to contain pre-defined constants,

most often alpha characters. Such a field is indicated in this
standard by the presence of one or more valid characters.
Excluded from the list of allowable characters are the following
which are used to indicate field types within this standard: "A",
"a", "c", "hh", "hhmmss.ss", "llll.ll", "x", "yyyyy.yy".
Numeric value fields
Field type Symbol Definition
Variable numbers x.x Variable length integer or floating numeric field. Optional
leading and trailing zeros. The decimal point and associated
decimal fraction are optional if full resolution is not required
(example: 73.10 = 73.1 = 073.1 = 73). The specific use of this
formatter and restrictions (for example integer, range) is
defined in the sentence definition.
Fixed HEX field hh- Fixed length HEX numbers only, MSB on the left.
Variable HEX field h--h Variable length HEX numbers only, MSB on the left.
Fixed six-bit field ss___ Fixed length six-bit coded characters only. See Annex C for
field conversions.
Variable six-bit field s--s Variable length six-bit coded characters only. See Annex C
for field conversions.
C-36
Information fields
Field type Symbol Definition
Variable text c--c Variable length valid character field.
Fixed alpha field aa- Fixed length field of upper-case or lower-case alpha
characters.
Fixed number field xx- Fixed length field of numeric characters.
Fixed text field cc- Fixed length field of valid characters.
NOTE 1: Spaces should only be used in variable text fields.
NOTE 2: A negative sign "–" (HEX 2D) is the first character in a field if the value is negative. When used, this
increases the specified size of fixed length fields by one. The sign is omitted if the value is positive.
NOTE 3: Units of measure fields are appropriate characters from the symbol table (Table 3) unless a specific unit of
measure is indicated.
(C) Checksum field

A checksum field shall be transmitted in all sentences. The checksum field is the last field in
a sentence and follows the checksum delimiter character "*". The checksum is the eight-bit
exclusive OR (no start or stop bits) of all characters in the sentence, including "," and “^”
delimiters, between but not including the "$" or “!” and the "*" delimiters.
(For reference: EX-OR is an abbrevation of Exclusive OR. In the case that an input signal A
and an input signal B are used, only when A is 1 or B is 1 (A=1 or B=1), the output is “1”.
Otherwise, when both A and B are “1” etc, the output is “0”.)
The hexadecimal value of the most significant and least significant four bits of the result is
converted to two ASCII characters (0-9, A-F) for transmission. The most significant character
is transmitted first.
Examples of the checksum field are:
$GPGLL,5057.970,N,00146.110,E,142451,A*27 and
$GPVTG,089.0,T,,,15.2,N,,,*7F.
(3) Sentences
The maximum number of characters in a sentence shall be 82, consisting of a maximum of 79
characters between the starting delimiter "$" or “!” and the terminating delimiter <CR><LF>.
The minimum number of fields in a sentence is one (1).
The first field shall be an address field containing the identity of the talker and the sentence
formatter which specifies the number of data fields in the sentence, the type of data they
contain and the order in which the data fields are transmitted.
The remaining portion of the sentence may contain zero or multiple data fields. The maximum
number of fields allowed in a single sentence is limited only by the maximum sentence length
of 82 characters. Null fields may be present in the sentence and shall always be used if data
for that field is unavailable.
All sentences begin with the sentence-starting delimiter character "$" or “!” and end with the
sentence-terminating delimiter <CR><LF>.
(A) Description of approved sentences
Approved sentences are those designed for general use and detailed in IEC 61162 (as shown
below). (in this guideline, it is not described.)
Other sentences, not recommended for new designs, may be found in practice.
Such sentences are listed in NMEA 0183. Information on such sentences may be obtained
from the National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA).
C-37
An approved sentence contains, in the order shown, the following elements:
ASCII HEX Description

“＄” 24 start of sentence, starting delimiter.
<address field> talker identifier and sentence formatter
"," <data field> zero or more data fields
"," <data field>
"*" <checksum field> checksum field
<CR><LF> 0D0A end of sentence, sentence terminating
delimiter.
(a-1) Approved parametric sentence structure

The following provides a summary explanation of the approved parametric sentence
structure:
ASCII HEX Description
“＄” 24 Start of sentence: starting delimiter.
aaccc Address field:

alphanumeric characters identifying type of talker, and sentence
formatter. The first two characters identify the talker. The last
three are the sentence formatter mnemonic code identifying the
data type and the string format of the successive fields.
Mnemonics will be used as far as possible to facilitate read-outs
by users.
“,” 2C Field delimiter:
starts each field except address and checksum fields. If it is
followed by a null field, it is all that remains to indicate no data in a
field.
c----c Data sentence block:
follows address field and is a series of data fields containing all of
the data to be transmitted. Data field sequence is fixed and
identified by the third and subsequent characters of the address
field (the sentence formatter). Data fields may be of variable
length and are preceded by delimiters ",".
“*” 2A checksum delimiter:
follows last data field of the sentence. It indicates that the
following two alpha-numeric characters show the HEX value of the
checksum.
hh Checksum field:
the absolute value calculated by exclusive- OR'ing the eight data
bits (no start bits or stop bits) of each character in the sentence
between, but excluding, "$" and "*". The hexadecimal value of the
most significant and least significant four bits of the result are
converted to two ASCII characters (0-9, A-F) for transmission. The
most significant character is transmitted first. The checksum field
is required in all cases.
<CR><LF> 0D0A End of sentence:
sentence terminating delimiter.
(B) Query sentences

Query sentences are intended to request approved sentences to be transmitted in a form of
two-way communication. The use of query sentences implies that the listener shall have the
capability of being a talker with its own bus. Query sentences shall always be constructed with
the "$" – start of sentence delimiter.
C-38
The approved query sentence contains, in the order shown, the following elements:
ASCII HEX description

“＄” 24 start of sentence
<aa> talker identifier of requester
<aa> talker identifier for device from which data
is being requested
“Q” query character, identifies query address

“,” data field delimiter
<ccc> approved sentence formatter of data being

requested
“*” <checksum field> checksum field
<CR><LF> 0D0A end of sentence
(b-1) Reply to query sentence

The reply to a query sentence is the approved sentence that was requested. The use of query
sentences requires cooperation between the devices that are interconnected. A reply to a
query sentence is not mandatory and there is no specified time delay between the receipt of a
query and the reply.
(C) Proprietary sentences
These are sentences not included within this standard; these provide a means for
manufacturers to use the sentence structure definitions of this standard to transfer data which
does not fall within the scope of approved sentences.
This will generally be for one of the following reasons:
(c-1) data is intended for another device from the same manufacturer, is device specific, and
not in a form or of a type of interest to the general user;
(c-2) data is being used for test purposes prior to the adoption of approved sentences;
(c-3) data is not of a type and general usefulness which merits the creation of an approved
sentence.
The manufacturer's reference list of mnemonic codes is a component of the equivalent
specification NMEA 0183.*
A proprietary sentence contains, in the order shown, the following elements:
ASCII HEX description
“＄” 24 start of sentence
“P” 50 proprietary sentence ID
<aaa> manufacturer's mnemonic code (The NMEA
secretariat maintains the master reference
list which comprises codes registered and
formally adopted by
<valid characters,”^” and ”,” > manufacturer's data
"*”<checksum field> checksum field
<CR><LF> 0D0A end of sentence
Proprietary sentences shall include checksums and conform to requirements limiting overall
sentence length. Manufacturer’s data fields shall contain only valid characters but may
include “^” and “,” for delimiting or as manufacturer’s data. Details of proprietary data fields
C-39
are not included in this standard and need not be submitted for approval. However, it is
required that such sentences be published in the manufacturer’s manuals for reference.
(D) Valid sentences
Approved sentences, query sentences and proprietary sentences are the only valid
sentences. Sentences of any other form are non-valid and shall not be transmitted on the bus.
(E) Sentence transmission timing
Frequency of sentence transmission shall be consistent with the basic measurement or
calculation cycle but generally not more frequently than once per 20 ms (in the case of low
speed, not more frequently than once per 1second). It is desirable that sentences be
transmitted with a minimum inter-character spacing, preferable as near continuous burst, but
under no circumstances shall the time to complete the transmission of a sentence be greater
than 100 ms (in the case of low speed, under no circumstances shall the time to complete the
transmission of a sentence be greater than 1 s) .
(F) Additions to approved sentences
In order to allow for improvements or additions, future revisions of this standard may modify
existing sentences by adding new data fields after the last data field but before the checksum
delimiter character "*" and checksum field. Listeners shall determine the end of the sentence
by recognition of "<CR><LF>" and "*" rather than by counting field delimiters. The checksum
value shall be computed on all received characters between, but not including, "$" or “!” and
"*" whether or not the listener recognizes all fields.
(4) Error detection and handling
Listening devices shall detect errors in data transmission including:
– checksum error;
– invalid characters;
– incorrect length of talker identifier and/or formatter;
– time out.
Listening devices shall use only correct sentences. Checksum error
(5) Example of sentence
(A) In the case of the latitude and longitude of Loran C
$LCGLL, 4728.31, N, 12254.25, W091342 and A, and A*4C<CR> <LF>
In the case that the latitude and longitude of the present location is determined by Loran C.
$: Start of sentence
LC: Result of positioning by Loran C
GLL: The latitude and the longitude of the present location,
4728.3,1N: Latitude 47degrees 28, 31minutes north
12254.25, W: Longitude 122 degrees 54, 25minutes west
091342: Positioning time, 9:13 a.m. 42-second (UTC)
A: Receiver state: not in warning state
A: Display mode: Independent mode
*4C: Checksum hexadecimal number: 4C
<CR><LF>: End of sentence
(B) Example of Query sentence

Query
$GPCRQ, MSK*2E<CR><LF>
GP: GPS Talker Identifier of Requester (Talker)
CR: GPS Talker Identifier for device from which data is being requested
(Listener)
Q: Query character, Identifies Query address
MSK: MSK receiver （Beacon receiver） interface
*2E: Checksum hexadecimal number: 2E
C-40
Reply
$CRMSK,293.0,M,100,A,10,1*6F<CR><LF>
CR: Data receiver
MSK: MSK receiver interface (Beacon receiver)
293.0: Beacon frequency (kHz）
M: Beacon frequency automatic/manual (manual)
100: Bit rate of beacon, 100bits/second
A: Bit rate of beacon automatic/manual (automatic)
10: Communication interval
1: Channel number
*6F : Checksum hexadecimal number: 6
(6) Others
Operator manuals or other appropriate literature provided for equipment that is intended to
meet the requirements of this standard shall contain as a minimum the following information:
a) identification of the A, B and common (C) signal lines;
b) the output drive capability as a talker;
c) a list of approved sentences, noting unused fields, proprietary sentences transmitted as a
talker, data latency and transmission interval for each sentence;
d) the load requirements as a listener;
e) a list of sentences and associated data fields that are required by, or are acceptable to, a
listener;
f) the current software and hardware revision if this is relevant to the interface;
g) an electrical description or schematic of the listener/talker input/output circuits citing actual
components and devices used, including connector type and part number;
h) the version number and date of update of the standard for which compliance is sought.
As latency, filtering, error handling and data transmission interval can have a serious
influence on the performance of a system, the manufacturer shall give careful consideration to
these aspects. Documentation should include such data where applicable.
Therefore, information required for communication is acquired from documents attached to

equipment.
Regarding details of the standard which is a basis, it is good to refer to the homepage etc. in
cluase1.
C-41
9-3 International Standards of Cables and Connectors
Standard cables used for the connection between listeners and a talker are the same as serial
interface cables used for connecting peripheral equipment with personal computers. And three
kinds of standard cables meeting the standard for RS-232C, RS-422 and RS-485 are mainly used.
Such standards define the allocation of the signal line of the port (at terminal) of equipment and
are not the standard for connectors.
Although various types of connectors are adopted for every talker or listener, some typical types
are shown below.
9-3-1 RS-232C
This is one of EIA (Electronic Industries Association) standards and the oldest one in three
standards. Although the official name of this standard came to TIA/EIA-232-E in 1994, a name
called RS-232C usually used till then is still used in many cases.
The feature is shown in Table 7. Since a signal is an unbalanced type a logical value of which
always determined in comparison with 0V, the minimum sensitivity to an input level is high.
Therefore, since it takes time for a status to change from a logical level 0 to 1, it is not suitable for a
high-speed communication in comparison with RS-422 etc. shown blew.
D-sub 25-pin connector is used widely. The arrangement of pins and the shape of a connector are
shown in Figure 9.3-1 and the assignment of typical signals is shown in Table 9.3-2. However, as a
certain connector may have a peculiar assignment, making reference to each manual is actually
needed when used.
Figure 9.3-1 D-sub25 connector (male) Pin arrangement
Table 9.3-1 Feature of RS-232C

Connectable Number Talker 1 Listener 1
Maximum cable length 15 m: at 19.2k bps
Maximum data rate 19.2k bps: at 15 m
Signal Unbalanced
-5V Minimum
Logical level 1
-15V Maximum
5V Minimum
Logical level 0
15V Maximum
Minimum input level sensitivity ±3V
Output current 500mA
C-42
Table 9.3-2 Assignment of pins for RS-232C (EIA-232)
Abbreviation
Pin number Direction Signal Name and Description*
for Signal Name
1 PG G Protective Ground
2 TxD O Transmitted data
3 RxD I Received data
4 RTS O Request To Send
5 CTS I Clear To Send
6 DSR I Data Set Ready
7 GND G Common Ground
8 DCD I Carrier Detect
15 STCE I Sending Timing of DCE*
17 SCR I Receive Timing of DCE*
20 DTR O Data Terminal Ready
22 RI I Ring Indicator
24 DCTE O Transmitting Timing of DTE*
Pins seldom used are not described in this document.

“Symbol”: Each abbreviation in the "symbol" column is used as a common name.
"Direction": an input l is “I”, and output is “0”, looking toward a talker from a listener and G means
ground.
A listener is called DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). On the other hand, the other side equipment
is called DCE (Data Communications Equipment). As for the pin arrangement of DCE, in
arrangement of pins in Table 9.3-2, pins change as pin 2 to pin 3, pin 4 to pin 5, and pin 6 to pin 20
respectively. That is, an output "Transmitted data" of No. 2 pin of DTE corresponds to an input
"Received data" of No. 2 pin of DCE. Therefore, what is necessary is just to use the cable (called
“straight cable”) which connects between the same pin numbers, when connecting DTE and DCE.
These are shown in Figure 9.3-2.
However, DCE type is not always used for all the talkers and DTE type may be used instead of
DCE. In that case, a cable, both wire ends of which are crossed as No. 2 cable to No. 3, No. 4 to
No. 5, and No. 6 to No. 20, is used. A cable of this type is called “cross cable or reverse cable”.
Even if RS-232C standard is applied, as about nine pins are usually sufficient for simple
communication of signals, except for in the complicated signal control. Therefore, a connector of
nine pins is defined as EIA-574 standard or D-Sub9 pin. It may be called RS-232C of nine pins. It
is equipped in DOS/V computers in many cases. The connector shape of nine pins is shown in
Figure 9.3-3 and assignment of pins is shown in Table 9.3-3.
Cross cable for DTE-DTE connection Straight cable for DTE-DCE connection
Figure 9.3-2 Cross cable and straight cable
C-43
Figure 9.3-3 Pin arrangement D-sub9 pin (male)
Table 9.3-3 Pin assignment of EIA-574

Abbreviation
Pin number Direction Signal Name and Description*
for Signal Name
1 DCD I Carrier Detect
2 RxD I Received data
3 TxD O Transmitted data
4 DTR - Data Terminal Ready
5 GND G Common Ground
6 DSR I Data Set Ready
7 RTS O Request To Send
8 CTS I Clear to Send
9 RI - Ring Indicator
9-3-2 RS-422
In comparison with RS-232C, a high speed and a further-distance data communication is possible.
Main features are shown in Table 9.3-4.
Table 9.3-4 Feature of RS-422

Connectable number Talker 1, Listener 10
Maximum cable length 1200 m: at 100K bps
Maximum data rate 10Mbps: at 15 m
Signal Balanced
Logical level 1 -0.3 V minimum, -6V maximum
Logical level 0 0.3 V minimum, 6V maximum
Minimum Input level sensitivity 0.2V difference
In this standard, two signal lines are separated from ground, and when one side voltage is high,
the other side voltage is to be low. At receiving sides, as two voltages are compared and then it
is confirmed whether the result is “0” or “1”, even if a voltage difference decreases due to voltage
drop etc., errors seldom happen.
In order to avoid the distortion and the attenuation of a signal of high frequency, it is necessary to
set a terminator between two input terminals of a listener which is most distant from a talker. In
order to stabilize the output levels of Pins not used in talker side, input terminal (TLL input
side)shall be connected to GND or to Vcc. And pins not used in listener sides shall be left open, if
a fail-safe circuit is internally fitted. If a fail-safe circuit is not internally fitted, in order to stabilize an
output level, input A shall be connected to Vcc, and input B shall be connected to GND.
Regarding RS-422, a connector of 15 pins in accordance with ITU-T V.10 or X.26 or Mini-DIN-8
pin is used in many cases. Mini-DIN-8 pin used in personal computers of Macintosh is called a
modem port.
C-44
The shapes of connectors are shown in Figure 9.3-4 and the assignment of pins is shown in Table
9.3-5.
D-sub 15 pin (male)

Mini-DIN-8
Figure 9.3-4 Pin arrangement of D-sub 15 pin (male) and Mini-DIN-8
Table 9.3-5 Pin allocation of RS-422

Pin number Symbol Direction Meaning
2 T O Transmitted data
4 R I Received data
8 G - Signal ground or common return
9 Ga O DTE common return
11 Gb I DCE common return
9-3-3 RS-485
RS-485 is basically the same as RS-422. Main features are shown in Table 9.3-6.
Table 9.3-6 Feature of RS-485

Connectable number Talker 32, Listener 32
Maximum cable length 1200 m: at 100K bps
Maximum data rate 15 m: at 10Mbps
Signals Balanced
Logical level 1 -1.5V minimum, -5V maximum
Logical level 0 1.5V minimum, 5V maximum
Minimum Input level sensitivity 0.2V difference
Although the type of a signal cable and a connector of RS-422 are also compatible with the
specification of RS-485, since a data collision protection circuit is not fitted in talker of RS-422,
RS-422 cannot be used within a system using RS-485 standard.
Note:
Cited from the Technical Course of Navigation and Electric Equipment Installation held at the year
2003 for the Correspondence Course by The Ship’s Electric Installation Contractor’s Association
of Japan
C-45
D. Navigation and
Fishing System
1. Positioning System Used Now
The table of systems using satellites is shown below.
Table of Global positioning system
Number No. of semi-major
Inclination Freq
Type Country Orbit (whne orbit flatness axis Mod code Mod type in use
(degree) (MHz)
copleted) planes (km)
GPS GNSS USA MED 24 + spare3 6 0 55 26559.7 1575.42 C/A BPSK(1) ○
P BPSK(10) ○
L1C-I BOC(1.1) ×
TMBOC
L1C-Q
(6.1.4/3.3)
×
M MOC(10.5) ×
1227.6 P BPSK(10) ○
L2C BPSK(1) △
M MOC(10.5) ×
1176.45 L5-I BPSK(10) ×
L5-Q BPSK(10) ×
GLONASS GNSS Russia MEO 24 3 0 64.8 25440 1602.0
FDMA
C/A
BPSK
(0.511) ○
P
BPSK
(5.11) ○
1246.0 C/A
BPSK
(0.511) ○
FDMA
P
BPSK
(5.11) ○
1201.5 P BPSK(4) ×
FDMA P BPSK(4) ×
BOCcos
Galileo GNSS EU MEO 27 + spare3 3 0 56 29601.297 1575.42 L1A (15.2.5) ×
L1B BOC(1.1) ×
L1C BOC(1.1) ×
BOCcos
1278.75 E6A (10.5) ×
E6B-I BPSK(5) ×
E6B-I BPSK(5) ×
1176.45 E5A--I AltBOC ×
(15.10)
E5A-I ×
1207.14 E6A-I ×
E6B-I ×
Compass GNSS China GEO 5 - - - 42164.0 1561.098 B1 BSK(2) △
MEO 30 3? 0 55 27840 1589.742 B1-2 BSK(2) △
1207.14 B2-I BPSK(2) △
B2-Q BPSK(10) △
1268.52 B3-I BPSK(10) △
B3-Q BPSK(10) △
RNSS Japan GSO 3 1 0.099 45 42164.0 1575.42 C/A BPSK(1) ×
SAIF BPSK(1) ×
L1C-I BOC(1.1) ×
× 1227.6 L2C BPSK(1) ×
1176.45 L5-I BPSK(10) ×
L5-Q BPSK(10) ×
1278.75 LEX BPSK(5) ×
BOC
IRNSS RNSS India GSO 3 1 0 29 42164.0 1191.795 IRNSS (10.2) ×
MBPSK
IRNSS (10) ×
EGNOS SBAS EU GEO 3 - - - 42164.0 1575.42 C/A BPSK(1) ○
WAAS SBAS USA GEO 4 - - - 42164.0 1575.42 C/A BPSK(1) ○
MSAS SBAS Japan GEO 2 - - - 42164.0 1575.42 C/A BPSK(1) ○
GAGAN SBAS India GEO 3 - - - 42164.0 1575.42 C/A BPSK(1) ×
Notes 1) GNSS: Global Navigation Satellite System
RNSS: Regional Navigation Satellite System
SBAS: Satellite Based Augmentation System
2) MEO: Middle Earth Orbit GEO: Geosynchronous Earth Orbit GSO: Geo-Stationary Earth Orbit
3) ○: in operation, △: under preparation, X : under plan (2007 stage)
The specification of systems except system in use may be subject to change.
There is ground system of “LORAN C” other than satellite systems
LORAN C Long Range Navigation C
Frequency: 100kHz, main station and sub station: 2-4, Type-of-radio-wave:pulse,
Useful Range: 1,000NM from main station, Accuracy: less than 100m (inside of the useful range)
(cited from LORAN C of Japan Coast Guard)
D-1
2. GPS ( Global Positioning System )
2-1 Outline
The first satellite of GPS system was launched in 1978 and 24 satellites which were originally planned were
completed in 1994.
(The system is under operation using 31 satellites, as of October, 2008.)
The whole system consists of control portion, space portion and user portion. The contorl portion consisits
of the Monitor Station (MS) which measures the orbits of the satellites, etc., main control station (MCS:
Master Control Station) which controls Monitor Stations and calculates orbital values, and Transmitting
Station (US: Up-Station) which transmits orbital information etc. to satellites. Transmitting station transmits
orbital information, clock drift and data of propagation delay to each satellite once a day. Old data are
replaced with such data and modulated as navigation signals.
24 satellites go around on nearly round elliptical orbit of orbit inclination (angle to the equator) of 55 degrees
and altitude of 20,183 km, and cycle of each satelitte is 12 hours (acculately 11-hour and 58-minute 02.
02-second: 0.5 sidereal day). Four artificial satellites are arranged on each of six orbital planes. In this case,
at least four satellites can be observed at an elevetion angle of five degrees or more and five satellites can
always be observed on the horizon.
Accuracy obtained by using L band (1575.42 MHz) is about 10m(2drms) since SA was ceased in
May ,2000.
Mark : Reserve satellites
Orbital plane 1: No. 1, 2, 3, 19
Orbital plane 2: No. 4, 5, 6
Orbital plane 4: No. 10, 11, 12,
Orbital plane 6: No. 16, 17, 18
Fig. 1. GPS Satellites and their Orbits
2-2 Technique of position determination

Four satellites are usually required, and using the orbital data transmitted from satellites, a receiver chooses
four satellites automatically so that the best positioning may be obtained. Distances to four satellites can be
found from propagation time and the velocity of light. Since information of 6 orbital elements are transmitted,
a receiver calculates a position of each satellite based on the information at the time of signal transmission.
It is necessary to synchronize time of a satellite with time of GPS first. GPS time can be obtained using
D-2
atomic Frequency Standard of a satellite and clock compensation value transmitted from Control Segment
of the satellite. If the receiver synchronizes with GPS time correctly, three satellites are enough for
calculation, and position can be calculated based on an intersection of three spheres centering on the
respective satellite. The 4th satellite is used for error presumption of the clock of the receiver. In this case,
four unknown factors are included in the equation of position determination. That is, it is a three-dimensional
position (latitude, longitude and altitude) and the clock of the user receiver.
Since the clock which is not so accurate is used in the receiver, the measurement distance is called false
distance (Pseudo-Range) and the fixed bias based on a clock error is included in it. And a definition is
given as follows (refer to Fig. 2).
Ri=Ri+C (tAi+C (tu- (tSi)))
Here
Ri: False distance to a satellite
Ri: True distance
C: Velocity of light
(Δtsi: Offset of i position satellite time from GPS time)
(Δtu: Offset of clock of a receiver from GPS time)
(ΔtAi: Propagation delay time and other errors)
(Offset of Satellite clock)
(True distance) (Offset of a Receiver clock)
(False distance) (Propagation delay, other errors)
Fig. 2 True distance and false distance
Phase shift of PN code (false noise) generated in the GPS receiver which coincides with satellite phase is
measured, and false distance propagation time is measured. The PN code of the receiver is shifted until
correlation with the received PN code reaches the maximum. The shift time is the measured value of false
distance propagation time.
Determination of user position is obtained subtracting fixed distance bias from each presumed distance
(measured false distance). Although circles centering respective satellites are drawn at the respective
radius of the false distances, the circles do not intersect at a point. Circles with the respective radius
obtained by subtracting (or adding) C·Δtu from (to) false distances intersect at a point and it is user’s
position.
D-3
3. GPS Compass
3-1 Outline
Although gyrocompasses and magnetic compasses are generally installed in a ship and heading is
obtained using these compasses, attention is drawn to GPS compass which replaces these traditional
compasses and is cheap and accuracy of which is equivalent to or more accurate than gyrocompasses.
According to the carriage requirement of new SOLAS-V as of July, 2002, all passenger ships and all ships
of 300 to 500 GT engaged on International voyage were required to be fitted with THD (Transmitting
Heading Device). Furthermore, ISO standard ISO 22090-3 of THD was enacted, and GPS compass was
also able to be used as THD using GNSS Principle. In revision of the MED list expected in the near future,
GPS compass is expected to be MED equipment and it is considered that use of GPS compass will be
expanded further from now on.
3-2 Difference between GPS compass and GPS

Difference between a direction measured by using GPS compass and a direction measured by using
general GPS navigation equipment is explained. Each content of measurement is as follows.
- GPS compass: Heading
- GPS navigation equipment:: progressing direction
As shown in Fig. 1, heading and progressing direction do not coincide with each other due to influence of
tide or wind, and it may completely be reverse depending on the case.
Heading
Progressing Direction
Direction measured by GPS navigation equipment
Current or Wind
Ship
Fig. 1 Heading and progressing direction
Although heading is obtained traditionally by using direction sensor such as gyrocompass or magnetic
compass, there are an advantage and a fault respectively. Gyrocompass has sufficient accuracy, but it is
expensive and it takes time to settle. Moreover, Gyrocompass has a problem such as inaccuracy in high
latitude areas.
Magnetic compass is cheap and is easy to use, but it has a fault of instability. GPS compass can resolve
such faults and it can be said that it is a next-generation direction sensor.
Comparison of sensors aforementioned is shown in Table 1.
D-4
Table 1 Comparison of sensors
GPS compass
Gyrocompass Magnetic compass
JLR-20/30
Maintenance not required Required Required (Correction of deviation and deflection)
Less than 2
Settling time minutes About 2 to 3 hours not required
(About 30 seconds)
Follow-up Quick. Middle rank Late.
Bad.
Accuracy Good. Good. (unstable, being easily influenced by circumference
environment )
Latitude
Compensation not required Deflection compensation
compensation
D-5
4. Marine Radar
4-1 System and Circuit of Marine Radar
There are generally two types of Marine Radars. One consists of 3 units such as an antenna unit, a
transmitter/receiver unit and a display unit, and the other consists of 2 units, such as an antenna unit fitted
with transmitter/receiver unit in it and a Display unit, for simplification.
Moreover, Marine Radar is divided into 5 Units based on its functions systematically, as shown in the
following figure,
(1) Antenna Unit (2) Transmitter/receiver Unit (3) Display processing Unit
(4) Display Unit (5) Control unit
The operation outline of each unit is described below.
Slot anntena
Motor Encoder
Rotary
Joint
Antenna Unit
Magnetron Circulator Limitter Down

Converter
Pulse Log
Trans Amplifier
Switching Antenna Video

Element Control Amplifier
Unit
LCD
Antenna
Power to each
Supply unit
Transmitter/Receiver Unit
LCD Back
Control Light
circuit circuit
ADC
GPS I/F
circuit
Display Display
Control Unnecessary to each unit
wave Power
LOG I/F circuit
Supression Supply
circuit
Display Unit
GYRO I/F Target Coordinate
circuit Tracking transformation
circuit
AIS I/F Radar
circuit Glaphics Display
Display Memory Operation Track
Memory Panel Ball
Display
Output
circuit
Operation
Uint
Display
to each unit Control
Power
circuit
Supply
Display Processing Unit Operation Unit
Fig.1 Schematic Diagram of Marine Radar
D-6
4-1-1 Antenna Unit
Antenna Unit radiates radar transmission pulse to space and receives the radar pulse reflected from
targets.
Simple and lightweight slotted waveguide antenna is usually used as an antenna.
An antenna is rotated by a motor and can emit a radar wave over all the directions by operation of rotary
joint. The radiation direction of a radar wave is detected by the encoder.
4-1-2 Transmitter/Receiver Unit

A Transmitter/Receiver Unit generates the radar wave, radiates it and amplifies received radar signals
reflected and then generates radar video signals.
Antenna control circuit drives a switching element periodically to generate a high power pulse signal. After
carrying out impedance conversion of this pulse signal with pulse transformer, it is inputted to a magnetron,
and a pulse modulated microwave of high power is generated, and is supplied to the Antenna Unit through
a circulator.
The received radar wave is led to a receiving circuit through a circulator, and after it passes the limiter for
high power protection, it is changed into IF signal by a down converter. Then, it is amplified and detected by
a LOG amplifier circuit to generate a radar video signal.
4-1-3 Display Processing Unit

The Display Processing Unit processes radar video signals and draws radar echos. Moreover, the Display
Processing Unit exchanges information with control circuit of each Unit and controls the whole system.
After the radar video signals outputted from the transmitter/receiver are changed into digital data in ADC
and unnecessary waves, such as sea clatter, rain/ snow clutter and waves interfered by the other radars,
are removed from these signals. And then these signals are processed with polar coordinate to rectangular
coordinates conversion and the processed signals are drawn as radar echos into a radar display memory.
At the same time, the radar echo trails of moving paths of targets are drawn as well.
A target tracking circuit follows targets automatically using the radar data obtained after unnecessary waves
are removed, and computes the existence position, course and speed.
The display control circuit receives the information on navigation systems, such as GPS, LOG, GYRO, AIS,
etc. connected with it, and uses these signals for control of radar. Moreover, it draws various information,
such as navigational tolls and symbols for target tracking into a graphics display memory as graphic
information
The contents of the radar display memory and the graphics display memory are read by a display output
circuit, and are outputted to the display Unit.
4-1-4 Display Unit

A Display portion displays display signals sent from the Display Processing Unit on a LCD panel.
A back light circuit controls the luminescent brightness of the LCD panel according to surrounding
illuminance.
D-7
4-1-5 Control Unit
A control unit sends information, which are generated by operator’s operation on a navigation panel, or
operation of a track ball, to the Display Processing Unit.
4-2 Example of Radar Display

4-2-1 Display of radar echoes
Marine Radars used at present display radar echoes on a plane centering on own ship. (PPI display)
The following are examples of displaying radar echoes, and unnecessary waves, such as sea clutters, are
removed, and fixed targets of fishing gears and moving targets of other ships are displayed clearly. Echo
trails of moving targets are displayed, and states of the moving targets can be grasped easily.
Other
ships
Other Radar
ships Echo
Fishing
ears
Trail
Own
ship
Fishing
gears
Fig.2 Display of radar echos
4-2-2 Display of symbols for target tracking

The position information of targets computed by using target tracking function are displayed as target
tracking symbols.
A course speed of a target is displayed as a vector and this vector expresses advancing direction of the
target and a future position where the target reaches after an appointed time.
Moreover, information of other ships sent from AIS (Automatic Identification System) can be displayed by
the symbol and a vector.
Target Tracking symbol

Target number: Six(6)
Own
ship
Composition of
AIS information
display of Ship's
name
Fig.3 Display of symbols for target tracking
D-8
4-3 Measurement of Target
4-3-1 Measurement of Direction
When measuring a direction of small target such as a buoy, a cursor mark or EBL (electronic cursor) is
positioned on the center of an echo and the direction is measured.
Since it may be impossible to measure an exact direction due to direction expansion effect when
measuring directions of the end of a target, such as a quay, attention must be paid.
4-3-2 Bearing expansion effect
Actual target
実際の物標
When a beam width of a radar pulse is A in the right figure, at a position of a line
ＸＹ
C or D, radiated radar beam will hit a target, this echo will be displayed while a Ｂ
ＡＡ
line moves from C to D on a scope, and then a width “E” of the target will be ＣＤ
Ｅ
displayed instead of a width “B” of the target. (X end and Y end is expanded
with 1/2 of Beam width A)
4-3-3 Measurement of Distance
A distance is measured by positioning a cursor mark or VRM (Variable Range
ＰＰＩ
Marker) on an inner side of the echo (the center side of a screen).
Fig.4 Measurement of Target
4-4 Minimum Detectable Range

Minimum Detectable Range is a minimum distance at which the approaching target can be displayed on a
screen. A distance ΔR (m) depends on a pulse width τ(μs), and it is calculated by the following formula.
R=150· τ(m) Formula 1
But actually, since a dead angle exists due to an antenna height and a vertical beam width as shown in a
figure below, it is impossible to detect short-range targets in fact.
Although the target A within a vertical beam width
can reflects radiation waves well, since the radiated
wave cannot hit the target B in a dead angle and
there are also few reflected waves, it is hard to Vertical beam width
垂直ビーム幅
θｖ
detect such targets. Then if antenna is located at a ア
Antenna height
Ｈ Target
物標
ン
lower position to shorten a minimum detectable テ Target
物標ＡA
ナ B Ｂ
range, a maximum detectable range will also 高
become short conversely. R min

Ｒmin
Minimum Detectable Range
最小探知距離
In order to satisfy these situations to some extent,
the wide vertical beam width is designed Fig.5 Minimum Detectable Range
to be wide angles of 20 to 30 degrees.
Moreover, this is effective also to lessen
influence of rolling and pitching.
A minimum detectable range will be calculated from the following formula.
Antenna height: H (m),
D-9
Vertical beam width: θ v (degree)
Ｈ
Ｒmin＝　（ｍ）
θｖ Formula 2
tan
２
4-5 Resolution
When detecting targets, in order to display targets as separate targets respectively, range resolution and
bearing resolution are required
4-5-1 Range Resolution
物標１
Target 1 物標２
Target 2
Range resolution depends on transmission pulse width τ
and a size of dot on a screen.
The electric wave goes and returns 150 (m) per 1(μs).
τ
In a condition that two targets exist 150(m) away from each
other on a electric wave propagation line, when an electric Transmission pulse τ
送信パルスτ
wave of pulse width of τ (1μs) is radiated, soon after a wave

reflected from target 1 returns, a wave reflected from target 2
Ｒ
returns, and then two reflected waves overlap, therefore, Ｒ＞150τ(ｍ)
these two waves cannot be identified.

If distance (R) is more than 150(m), targets are able to be
identified. Therefore, if pulse width is τ (μs), resolution R is Ｒ
Ｒ＝150τ(ｍ)
obtained from the following formula.
R=150x τ (m) Formula 3
The narrower the pulse width is, the better the range
resolution is. Conversely, the wider the pulse width is, the Ｒ
Ｒ＝150τ(ｍ)
worse the range resolution is. ＣＲＴ
Fig.6 Range Resolution
4-5-2 Bearing Resolution

θ
Bearing Resolution is a limit of width of transmission pulse which can
discriminate two or more targets which exist at the same distance －３dB点
-3dB point
from a radar antenna.
Bearing resolution depends mainly on antenna directionality.
The directionality of an antenna depends on a beam widthθ （at a
half point (-3 dB) of electric power), it is mostly expressed with the
following formula.
Fig.7 Antenna Directionality
アンテナ指向性
Antenna beam width is proportional
アンテナのビーム幅は、
to wavelength in use and inversely
proportional
使用波長に比例しアンテナto antenna effective
θ : Antenna beam width (degree) length
λ: wavelength in use (m) の有効長に反比例する。
D: antenna effective length (m)
Formula 4
D-10
Fig.8 Bearing Measurement Fig.9 Bearing Resolution
4-5-3 Wavelength type and Feature
Wavelength Bearing / Range Attenuation due to Rain dB/km

Band Detectable Distance
(cm) Resolution 16mm/h 4mm/h 1mm/h
S 10 Long distance Low. 0.122 0.017 0.0024
C 5 Middle of S and X Middle of S and X 0.145 0.021 0.0032
X 3 Middle Distance High. 0.373 0.064 0.011
Q 0.9 Short Distance very High. 3.37 0.286 0.042
Table 1
Reference: The name of S・C・X used in radar frequency band was used as a code during World War II, and there is no meaning
in particular.
[Circularly-polarized wave antenna]
If a circularly-polarized wave antenna is used, it will be hard to be affected by the influence of rain, snow and
fog, however if the size of antenna is the same, sensitivity will fall a little.
4-6 Difference in Radar Wave Propagation of S Band and X Band

Although a long-distance mountain etc. can be seen clearly by S band radar compared with X-band radar, it
may be said that small ships or coastlines nearly 10-20-nm are not clearly caught by S band radar.
Although S band is advantageous to high targets, and X
Ｂ
band is advantageous to low targets which, (however, X
Ａ
band is apt to be affected by the influence of the weather).
ｈ1 ｈ2
It is based on the following reasons.
Ｍ
The figure on the right side shows propagation of radar θ θ
waves. Assuming that point A is a radar antenna and Ｒ
point B is a target, a combined wave of a direct wave 反射体上の伝播

Fig.10 Propagation on reflective object
D-11
from a radar antenna and a wave reflected by the sea surface reaches the target of point B. If the
combined wave is strong, the radar echoes are easy to display clearly.
Then, considering the ratio “F” of the direct wave and the combined wave, in the case of the distance
difference between AB and AMB and that θ is small, the following equation is obtained,
２h h
ＡＭＢ－ＡＢ＝ 1 2 Formula 5
Ｒ
And this formula is changed to the phase difference of
the direct wave and the reflected wave, and then the
following formula is obtained,
４h h
φ＝ψ＋ 1 2 Formula 6 Fig.11 Vertical pattern
Ｒλ
θ is a phase change at point M, and in the actually usual case that θ is less than 2˚ (degrees), even in the
case of X band or S band, even in the case of a horizontally polarized wave or a vertically polarized wave, θ
≈ π, and reflection coefficient θ at the point M is equal to “0” as well.
Therefore, setting the following formulas,
Formula 7
In the case that n is odd, F=2 of the maximum is shown. In the case that n is even, a result of F=0 is shown.
A height at the position of maximum width of the lowest robe which is important for radar, is as follows.
If n=1, h2 is as follows.
Ｒλ
ｈ2＝ Formula 8 Unit of R is (m). 1 (NM) = 1852 (m)
４h1
If this is applied to actual numerical values, figure

below is obtained, and therefore, it turns out that
small ships, small targets, etc. are hard for a wave
of S band to reflect. For example, height required
in order to be vividly reflected in the case of a radar
antenna height of 20 m and a distance to target of
10 nm, is 23.1 m in S band and is 6.9 m in X band.
Fig.12 Maximum point of the lowest robe
D-12
4-7 Propagation and Maximum Detectable Range of Radar Wave
4-7-1 Propagation
The radar wave has the characteristics that a very small amount of radar waves propagate along the
curved surface of the earth. Although this characteristics changes according to differences of density of
atmospheric layer which an electric wave spreads, a distance D (NM) of a radar wave to the horizon is 10%
longer than a distance (D) to the optical horizon, and is shown by the following formula.
D=2.23 h (NM) Formula 8
h shows the height (m) of a radar antenna and the height of a target from sea level.
Earth
Unit NM.
Unit meter.
Radar horizon
Fig.13 Propagation of Radar Wave
For example, in the figure above, and if the height of an antenna is 5 m, the echo of a cliff of 20 m in
height (NM) will appear at D≈15.
However, it may also be that D is short or is long if a climate condition is unusual.
D-13
* Long-Range effect
In the case of the extraordinary propagation due to high mountains in the distance and duct, even if
targets, etc. below the horizon are beyond a radar range, it may appear as an echo.
For example
Case 1: In the case of usual
Own ship
Another ship 1 is caught, but another ship 2 is not Another ship 1

caught.
Another ship 2
Case 2: In the case that the atmosphere is cold and seawater is warm
Neither another ship 1 nor another ship 2 is caught
Case 3: In the case that the atmosphere is warm and seawater is cold
Another ship 1 and another ship 2 are caught
Case 4: In the case that the atmosphere is warm in a low layer and it is cold in a high layer and
sea water is cold.
Another ship 1 and another ship 2 are caught.
Fig.14 Long-Range Effects
D-14
4-7-2 Detectable range
Detectable range is determined by an output and antenna dimension, and if an output and antenna
dimension are changed, the result is like the following table below.
Table 2
magnification l/5 1/4 l/3 1/2 1 2 3 4 5
If an output is one of
1.5
numbers in the column 0.67 0.71 0.76 0.84 1 1.19 1.32 1.41
Detectable range
times
above,
If antenna dimension is
one of numbers in the l/5 1/4 l/3 1/2 1 2 3 4 5 times
column above,
Example: Detectable range will be 1.19 times if an output is doubled.
In order to improve detection

Detectable range
performance, making an
antenna dimension biger is
efficient in comparison with
increasing output.
Output Antenna dimension
4-8 Output Power of Radar

A magnetron generally used as a transmitter tube for pulse radars radiates several thousand times as high
peak power as mean power for a extremely short time (pulse width τ ) at a transmission time.
The ratio of a pulse repetition period and pulse width is called “Duty Ratio”, and although there is a limitation
depending on a magnetron, a sufficient peak power can be outputted within the limitation.
Peak power (Pt)
Mean power (Pav)
Pause time
Pulse repetition period T
Pulse width
Rectangular pulse
Fig.15 Pulse Transmission Timing
In the above figure, in the case that a transmission pulse width is τ (sec), a pulse repetition period is T (sec)
and a repetition frequency is f (Hz), Duty Ratio (Du) is shown by the following formula.
Formula 9
D-15
However, since a perfect square wave shown in the above figure, is not obtained actually, a pulse width is
usually shown as a width which is measured at a point of -3 dB from peak power observing a detection
output of the transmitted wave.
-3dB
Pulse width τ
Pulse repetition period T
Fig.16 Actual Pulse Width
A mean power is obtained using peak power and Duty Ratio. Since any energy is not generated between
pulses (transmission pause period), all the energies contained in Pulse repetition period T are equal to the
product of a peak power Pt and a transmission pulse width τ. Therefore, a mean power Pav is obtained by
dividing all the energies by Pulse repetition period T.
Pt × τ
Pav = = Pt × Du (W) Formula 10
T
Usually, Duty Ratio of a marine radar is as small as one over thousands, for example, in the case of a pulse
width of 1 μs (microsecond) and a repetition frequency of 500 Hz (a repetition period of 2000 μs), even
though a peak power amounts to an output of 25 kW, a mean power remains an output of about 12.5W.
In recent years, the solid-state transmitter using semiconductors, such as FET, as a radiating system which
replaces a magnetron is now being developed with the progress of device technology. Although the
conventional system using a magnetron can make efficient and high output, there is demerit of periodical
exchange of a magnetron or need of a high voltage circuit of kV as well.
In a solid-state system, a peak power is reduced within the tolerance of a semiconductor device used for an
output stage and a detectable range performance equivalent to a magnetron system is accomplished by
enlarging a pulse width to attain the same mean power. However, for reservation of a range resolution,
frequency modulation is applied to the radiated wave within a pulse and a received signal is processed by
performing signal processing, such as pulse compression.
4-9 Antenna Installation

4-9-1 Height and Position for antenna installation
(A) Regarding marine radar, there is installation height of a radar antenna as an element which affects
detectable range in addition to each performance. Antenna installation height is measured from the draft
line of a ship, and the higher antenna position can attain the more distant target detection. However, if it
is installed much higher, energies of radar wave may decline remarkably in a short distance which is not
covered by an antenna vertical beam width (at a point which is -3 dB lower than a peak power of a major
lobe), and then it turns out that detection of small targets is difficult and sea clutters in the distance also
increases more. Regarding a 3 unit type radar, if its antenna is installed higher, length of waveguide
may become long and transmission loss of an radar wave may increase (the loss of waveguide is
affected twice, because the radar wave goes and returns through the waveguide.) and received signal
D-16
strength may fall. Consequently, it leads to declination of long distance sensitivity. Especially waveguide
transmission loss is remarkably great in X-band radar. As mentioned above, as for the waveguide length
in the case of equipping 3 unit type radar, the waveguide length is generally at least 15-30m.
In the content of the ease of equipment installation, 2 unit-type radar which does not need any waveguide
is equipped in many cases in recent years with the improvement in reliability of equipment. For radars
for large ships, cables are generally installed without using junction box for amplifying a signal on the way
if those cables are 65 m or less in full length, depending on characteristics of cables (especially
transmission of video signals).Therefore, regarding the installation height of an antenna, 2 unit-type radar
is more advantageous than 3 unit-type radar because that a performance decline due to transmission
loss of a waveguide is decreased.
On the other hand, when the installation height of an antenna is low, it is hard to detect long-distance
targets, and a mast, derricks, a chimney, etc. of a ship serve as an obstacle, and the dead angles, which
cannot be seen by a radar, increase. In this case, it is desirable to install an antenna at a height so that an
angle (θ), which looks down on the peak of an obstacle (a dashed line AB in the following figure), may be
more than l/2 of an antenna vertical beam width (generally 10-12.5 degrees) from an antenna.
B
θ: more than l/2 of a vertical beam
θ:
A
Fig.17 A minimum installation height of an antenna
Further, regarding usual radars, depending on installation heights of an antenna, electric wave phases of
a radar wave interfere due to the direct wave and the reflected wave from the surface of the sea, and then
an electric wave cannot reach around the surface of the sea over about 20 miles away from a radar,
consequently, since a power reflected from a target may be extremely weak, it is considered to be usual
except for unusual electric wave propagation that a maximum detectable range is limited and it is the
smaller than a theoretical value.
(B) As for a platform of a mast, at which a radar antenna is installed, it is desirable that it is on a keel line
and there are no obstacles interrupting the sight around it over 360 degrees. If there is a mast etc. which
interrupts a field of view, since its angle (α in the following figure) is a shade and shadowed (grade is
such that sensitivity will fall if it is 1-2 degrees) on a radar display, it is serious when there is an obstacle of
a mast or are other obstacles in the direction of a bow.
In order to clear obstacles, when raising antenna installation height in the case of a 3 unit type, since a
length of waveguide becomes longer, consideration should be paid to a performance decrement.
D-17
There are various obstacles which interrupt a visual field of radar installed in a ship. For example, derrick
posts, a chimney, a radar mast for a sub-radar, etc. may be shades or obstacles casing a false echo on a
radar display, these conditions may be cleared during designing stages or in some cause, false echoes
may be found for the first time after used for voyages for a long time.
When a structure is within a vertical beam width and a false echo is suspected, effective way is such that
wave absorbers (As there are two types of absorbers, such as
a wide band type which do not have the specific resonant
frequencies or a narrow band type which absorbs only the
specific frequencies, these are used depending on purposes
in use.) may be installed on the structure or a reflecting metal
plate may be installed between a structure and a antenna for a
wave not to hit a structure.
It is effective to install the metal passive reflectors reflected
upwards between an antenna and a structure.
In all cases, navigating officers and those who navigate a ship
Fig.18 An angle of a shade of an obstacle
should know a possibility of generation of false echos. It is also
required to discuss such items with shipyards and designers
in charge enough.
(C) Safety conditions for Structure of mast, Platform for maintenance and Handrails
(C-1) Radar mast should be such the structure that should not sway simply or it does not incline, due to
starting of rotation of an antenna, vibration of hull, shocks, etc. Depending on a size and structure of an
antenna, it is required not to cause resonance of a mast and to make resonance frequency high using
reinforcement etc. if needed.
(C-2) An antenna platform should be large because it is a place for check and maintenance of an
antenna as much as possible, and it should be taken into account that workers can work safely there.
There is a entrance to the platform, and a ladder is located for climing up to the entrance, and a lid should
be attached to this entrance.
A steel plate patterned with non-slip should be used as a platform, suitable steel plates shouudl be fitted
along the edge of the platform so that a tool etc. may not fall during maintenance and check.
Moreover, it is desirable to desgin a platform, taking into account structures around the platform, in order
to carry out easily the maintenance to the tip of an antenna radiation part if possible. Moreover, it is
necessary to take into account the design that rotation may not be barred with a rope, a signal flag,
etc.,twining round a reflector.
D-18
A handrail is raised to a height of the
waist.
Drain holes are opened at a few places.
A lid is fitted.
A plate should be fitted around the platform.
Fig.19 An example of a platform for a radar antenna
4-9-2 Fixing of an antenna

A steel plate, which is thick enough to fix an antenna, and enhancement steel are used as a plate (mount
base) for fixing an antenna, it is necessary that its surface should be flat (smooth) to reduce vibrations and
impacts on an antenna etc.
When a gap exists partly between the mount base and an antenna pedestal, it is necessary to smooth the
mount base, or to adjust the gap inserting metal shims. If an antenna is tightened hard and fixed in the state
that there is a gap, an antenna case may be distorted and the case itself may be damaged by vibration.
In addition, since the amplitude of vibration may be large and may lead to breakage of an antenna if elastic
materials such as rubber and resin are inserted into the gap between the mount base and the antenna
pedestal for vibration proof, such method is not be adopted.
Stainless bolts should be generally used for fixing of an antenna, and all nuts are doubled for slack
prevention and all bolts should be equally tightened. And in order to prevent corrosion, the head of bolts and
all nuts are shielded applying sealant etc.
Moreover, the antenna case and the mount base are grounded with an earth wire, and sealant etc. is
applied to connections an earth wire for the prevention from damage by vibration and corrosion.
D-19
Earth cable
Silicon rubber
Sealant Do not put in rubber
Fig.20 Grounding and corrosion prevention
4-10 Example of Waveguide Installation and Name of each part

Coaxial cable (S band) and flexible waveguide (X band) are generally used for installation of 3 unit type
radar. Since the inside of Coaxial cable and flexible waveguide is hollow, it is necessary not to fasten too
much while fastening by using cable fastening band. If fastened too much, there is a possibility of receiving
sensitivity fall or transmitter/receiver damage caused by the dent inside Coaxial cable and flexible
waveguide or blockade.
waveguide
Fig.21 Coaxial cable Flexible waveguide
In connectting a coaxial cable or a flexible waveguide with an antenna case, a connection part is kept level,
and for prevention of fall by vibration, as shown in the following figure, cable supports are fitted.
In addition, a distance between a connection part and a nearest support and a distance between support is
suitable to reduce the metal fatigue by vibration.
Connection part
Connection part
Coaxial cable (it is kept level) Waveguide (it is kept level)
Cable support
Waveguide support
Cable
Ground
Fig.22 Support position for S band Support position for X band
D-20
Scanner Unit
Scanner Terminal
Scanner stand
Flat bar
Waveguide Clamp
Flexible Waveguide
Protective Cover
Putty
Through Metal
Note
R*
E-Bent Radius R=200 or more
H-Bent Radius R=400 or more Transmitter Terminal
Transmitter Terminal
Transmitter/Receiver
Note
If a unit is not specified, a unit is mm
Fig.23 Example of Flexible waveguide Installation
D-21
4-11 False Echo
Even though the actual target does not exist, its echo, which appears on the screen of a radar as if it existed
really, is called a false echo. The following cases can be considered as a cause of a false echo.
4-11-1 Secondary reflected echo

Echoes other than actual echo reflecting from a target when a radar antenna target, reflecting from a mast
or a funnel when a radar antenna is in the direction of the target, is called “Secondary reflected echo”
(Secondary reflected echoes appear in the direction of a mast or a funnel.)
Direct reflected Electric wave

Target
path
Heading
True echo
Radar antenna
False Echo
Secondary reflected
Electric wave path When a distance between a radar antenna and a funnel is
short, both echoes appear at a nearly equal distace from the
center of a display.
Funnel
Fig.24 Secondary reflected echo
As shown in the above figure, when an obstacle onboard is a cause, a false echo and a true echo appear
in an equal distance from an own ship.
Since these echoes are displayed at an equal distance, generations of false echoes are found by setting
VRM on the false echo or the true echo. Under such circumstances, false echoes present generally an
unnatural motion in many cases.
4-11-2 Multiple reflection echoes

If buildings or large-size of ships, Heading
which have big vertical plane, exist

or stay at a short distance from an
own ship, multiple echoes appear.
(Although these echoes appear at
equal intervals, the nearest echo is
an echo of a true target.)
Fig.25 Multiple reflection echo
D-22
4-11-3 Side lobe
A beam radiated from a radar antenna always generates some side lobes.
Depending on circumferential conditions or gain adjustment of a radar, a circular Heading
arc of false echoes appear at a distance equal to a distance of a true echo as

shown in the right figure.
Especially during voyages, it can be seen as an actual phenomenon, during an
observation of a large target approaching near etc. Moreover, when an
obstacle exists near an antenna, since side lobes increases due to diffraction,
in a direction that a influence of the obstacle exsits, side lobes appear remarkably.
Side lobes are reduced a little by adjusting Gain and STC. Fig.26 Side lobe
4-11-4 Radar interference

Radar interference is that, if other radars using the same frequency band are close, many spots appear on
a radar display due to the interference.
Since spots appear in various aspects and do not always appear at the same positions, it can be
distinguished from an echo of a true target in many cases.
Heading Heading
Fig.27 Circular spots on a display
However, when radar with a frequency of a near repetition period is close, interference appears circularly on
a display. It may not be removed by interference elimination processing.
4-11-5 Shadow
A shadow differs from a false echo, and consideration should be given to shadows for antenna installation.
That is that, a radar wave is interrupted by a mast and a funnel near a radar antenna,
an echo of a target which exists in the direction of a mast and a funnel is hard to appear on a display.
In order to investigate whether there are shadows, at the sight of sea clutters on a display, confirmation is
carried out that the echoes of sea clutters are thin or that there is a zone at which no echo can be seen.
Such shadows always exist in the same direction as ever.
Moreover, as described in the paragraph (3) side lobe, false echoes are apt to appear in the inside of such
zones,
Since the signal strength reflected from targets also declines, echoes of targets may be removed by signal
processing etc.
D-23
4-11-6 Secondary echo
As shown in the following figure, target echoes from distant places are not displayed within the transmission
repetition period, but during the next transmission repetition period, such echoes are displayed at a nearer
position than the true position. These echoes are called a secondary echo.
The thing of the phenomenon displayed is said.
Transmission Repetition Period
Pulse
Transmission
Apparent
Distance
Target Echo
Actual Distance of a Target
Fig.28 Secondary Echo
Secondary echoes are reduced by changing a transmission repetition period at each transmission and by
carrying out reduction of interference together.
MEMO
D-24
4-12 Magnetron Table
Typical models of Magnetron manufacturers are shown in the following table.
A type which aims at extension of life-span and spurious reduction is developed in recent years.
X band S band
Output
9375MHz 9410MHz 9445MHz 3050MHz
M1516
1.5kW
RMC-1
MAF1560N M1568
2kW
MAF1610B RMC-2
MＳF1421B M599A
MG4004 JP9-25D
E3571 JP9-25F
4kW MG5248 MSF1421C
MAF1561N MRF1421C
MSF1611B
MAF1611B
9M80
5kW
M5115
MSF1422B
MAF1422B
MG4006
6kW
MAF1562N
MSF1562B
MAF1562B
2J42 9M61
M1347 M5108
JP9-7 MSF1425B
10kW
MAF1425B
MSF1565N
MAF1565N
12kW MSF1615N
9M40 9M90
20kW 2J42A
6027
M1304 M1312
22kW M513B M598B
YJ1110 JP9-18
M1311 9M72
M5039 9M72A
E3509L E3509
QKH1535 M1437(A)
25kW 2J70A
M1475A M1458A
M1568B(J)
M1568BS
M1569
30kW M1302
M1555
2J55 9M31 2J55H
50kW
M1348
2J70B
60kW M5063
M1461
Life of Magnetron
Even when a radar is used in a standby condition for a long time, a life of a magnetron becomes short by
consumption of a cathode electrode etc.
D-25
Magnetron type for JRC RADAR Typical Model
RADAR Model Magnetron Output RADAR Model Magnetron Output

JMA-9252/9253 (X-BAND) M1437(A) 25KW JMA-5350 (X-BAND) 2J55 50KW
JMA-9303 (S-BAND) M1302 30KW JMA-5360 (S-BAND) M1461 60KW
JMA-7252/7253 (X-BAND) M1437(A) 25KW JMA-5352 (X-BAND) 2J55 50KW
JMA-7303 (S-BAND) M1302 30KW JMA-5362 (S-BAND) M1461 60KW
JMA-9822/9823 (X-BAND) M1437(A) 25KW JMA-7710 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-9832/9833 (S-BAND) M1302 30KW JMA-7725 (X-BAND) M1437(A) 25KW
JMA-9922/9923 (X-BAND) M1568B(J) 25KW JMA-7750 (X-BAND) 2J55 50KW
JMA-9932/9933 (S-BAND) M1302 30KW JMA-7776 (S-BAND) M1461 60KW
JMA-9953 (X-BAND) 2J55 50KW JMA-3910 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-9963 (S-BAND) 2J70B 60KW JMA-3925 (X-BAND) M1437(A) 25KW
JMA-9110 (X-BAND) MAF1565N 10KW JMA-3810 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-9122/9123 (X-BAND) M1568BS 25KW JMA-3811 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-9132/9133 (S-BAND) M1555 30KW JMA-3806 (X-BAND) MSF1422B 6KW
JMA-7110 (X-BAND) MAF1565N 10KW JMA-3807 (X-BAND) MSF1422B 6KW
JMA-7122/7123 (X-BAND) M1568BS 25KW JMA-3204 (X-BAND) MSF1421B 4KW
JMA-7132/7133 (S-BAND) M1555 30KW JMA-3210 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-922B/923B (X-BAND) M1568BS 25KW JMA-3211 (X-BAND) 9M61 10KW
JMA-932B/933B (S-BAND) M1555 30KW JMA-2343 (X-BAND) MSF1421B 4KW
JMA-5104 (X-BAND) MSF1421B 4KW JMA-2344 (X-BAND) MSF1422B 6KW
JMA-5206 (X-BAND) MSF1422B 6KW JMA-610 (X-BAND) MAF1562R 25KW
JMA-5210 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-5220 (X-BAND) M1568B(J) 25KW
JMA-5212 (X-BAND) MAF1565N 10KW
JMA-5222 (X-BAND) M1568BS 25KW
JMA-5310 (X-BAND) MSF1425B 10KW
JMA-5320 (X-BAND) M1568B(J) 25KW
JMA-5330 (S-BAND) M1302 30KW
JMA-5312 (X-BAND) MAF1565N 10KW
JMA-5322 (X-BAND) M1568BS 25KW
JMA-5332 (S-BAND) M1555 30KW
D-26
4-13 Waveguide Loss ( X-BAND )
Waveguide type Loss [dB/m] Remarks
Straight waveguide about 0.1 X band
E, H Bent about 0.04 Loss is smaller in using each one of E,H Bent in
comparison with in using twisted
Twisted waveguide about 0.3 waveguide.
Flexible waveguide about 0.1 Flexible waveguide: FR-9
Coaxial cable about 0.08 For S band (HF-20D)
4-14 Slot Antenna Beam Width Standard
X band S band
Radiation part Length Radiation part Length

Beam width θ [°] Beam width θ [°]
[ft] [ft]
3 3 10 2.3
4 2 12 1.9
5 1.5
6 1.2 θ=2.3×λ/D
θ: Beam width [°]

7 1.0
D: Antenna aperture length [f t]
λ: wavelength [cm]
8 0.9
9 0.8
D-27
5. Raster Scan Radar
5-1 High-intensity Radar Display
5-1-1 Outline
The Type of Display used for marine radars has changed from a display fitted with Analog type PPI monitor,
then a display fitted with Cathode-Ray Tube CRT monitor, to LCD monitor fittd with LCD panel.
The problem of a analg type of display fitted with PPI monitor (Analog display type) is that, CRT brithtness is
related to a sweep time of a trace, since CRT brightness dose not reach the maximum brightness in the
case of selection of a short range, it is sometiems difficult to use the display in a britht place without a shade
hood.
Distance (nm)
Fig.1 Brightness Characteristics of CRT
To resolve this problem, In some case, received radar echo signals are once written in a memory (Video
Memory) in real time, next, while reading out and displaying, read-out time is expanded more than 80 μs, a
trace may be synchronized with this time-extended radar echo signals, and a trace time is expanded and
then the maximum brightness is able to be accomplished in any range scale,. For example, radar JMA-650,
JMA-850, etc. are this system.
A raster scan type of display exists in display types of CRT monitor fitted with Cathode Ray Tube (digital
display type), and information for PPI scan is transformed for Television scan (Raster Scan) and is
displayed in high brightness.
For example, JMA-8000 series, JMA-6000 series, JMA-9700 series, JMA-9800 series, and color radar are
this system.
Regarding a LCD monitor type of display fitted with LCD panel, information for PPI scan is also transformed
for Television scan (Raster Scan) and is displayed in high brightness. For example, JMA-9900 series,
JMA-9100 series, JMA-900M series, and JMA-900B series are this system.
A LCD monitor type of display fitted with LCD panel is not only a high brightness display for displaying radar
videos, but to memorize radar information, the following functions are able to be added easily and distortion
of a picture etc. is able to be improved.
D-28
- as for a common PPI display, the brightness of radar video decays with the progress of time, but it
can keep the brightness constant until the next video is updated.
- trail of moving target can be displayed.
- radar data from two or more sensors can be displayed synthetically, For example, spectral
indication of target symbols, speed, course and routes, etc. are possible to superimpose on a
display like an ARPA display.
- distortion of a picture by earth magnetism, a color gap, etc. such problems are pointed out on PPI
monitor/ CRT monitor, it is hard to receive such problems.
Now, a display of LCD monitor type (Raster scan display) fitted with LCD panel is in use.
5-1-2 TV display (Raster Scan Display)

In order to understand a raster scan display, it is necessary to understand a TV picture display method. TV
picture is shown in Fig.5-1. Generally, a TV picture consists of 525 scanning lines, and the number of the
effective scanning lines except a fly-back line period is 448. 224 scanning lines are scanned at a rate of 60
scans per second totally by Interlace Scanning. One display consists of 448 dots vertically and horizontally...
1 dot 448 dots

Horizontal- fly-back line period
Vertical scanning
525 lines
448 lines
Vertical fly-back line period
448 dots
Horizontal scanning 15.625 kHz

(b) 448x448 dot matrix
(a) TV picture
Fig. 2 TV picture and dot matrix
That is, the display which consists of 448x448 dot matrix is refreshed 30 times per second. Although a
raster scan radar displays the PPI scan radar data on this TV picture, a polar coordinate is used for a PPI
display which uses a distance “R” from own ship and bearing “θ” from heading to display a target.
Rectangular coordinate is used for TV a picture which displays targets by X and Y component of
rectangular coordinates. In order to display Radar data received by the PPI scan, the data needs to be
converted to TV scan. A device which performs this conversion is called Scan converter.
For this scan converter,
D-29
PPI display TV picture
Fig.3 PPI display and TV picture
there are two types of converts such as an analog type and a digital type. An analog type converter uses a
Storage Tube, and digital type converter uses IC memory (radar data written into the memory by PPI scan
is read out in the form of TV scan). Now, since the digital scanning method is used in many cases as for the
raster scan radar, in this book, a digital scan converter is to be described.
5-1-3 Principle of Scan Converter

If as for the position P on a PPI display, its coordinates is convertd to the rectangular coordinates, the posion
ican be shown by the following formula.
X = R·Sin θ Formula 1
Y = R·Cos θ
The principle of this scan converter is shown in Fig. 5. A distance R is acquired by counting with Range
Clock. Moreover, a direction ”θ” is convertible to Sin θ and Cos θ using a signal characterizer. The formula
(1) is realized by multiplication of these signals,
A minimum unit value of a distance which a range clock counter is set to Δr, and Δx and Δ y of a respective
change component in X axis and Y axis to Δr is shown as Fig. 6.
In Fig. 6, the rectangular-coordinates component (xn, yn) of a quantization point Tn can be expressed with
the following formula.
xn = n·Δx = xn-1+Δx Formula 2

yn = n-Δy = yn-1+Δy
The rectangular-coordinates component (xn, yn) of the quantization point Tn can be obtaiend by adding the
change component of X axis and of Y axis. A block diagram of a scan converter is shown in Fig. 7. Signals
from an antenna are convertd into digital signals with a Sin/Cos function generator (ROM), and the
converetd signlas become Rate input signals to B.R.M. (Binary Rate Multiplier) and the signals are
multiplied by Range signals in B.R.M. and then the procesed signals are outputted from B.R.M.. These
D-30
outputted signals are counted by a address counter and become address data of the rectangular
coordinates (xn, yn) of TV display.
Signal characterizer
(θ→Sinθ)
Distance calculating circuit

(RANGE COUNTER) Range clock
Signal characterizer
(θ→Cosθ)
Fig. 4 Polar coordinate - Rectangular Fig. 5 Polar coordinate - Rectangular-coordinates conversion

coordinates
Principle figure
Sampling point
Sampling interval
Rectangular-coordinate
change component
Fig. 6 Polar Coordinate – Rectangular Coordinates Conversion Diagram
D-31
Range clock
X-Address Counter
Antenna
Bearing signal
Y-Address Counter
Fig. 7 Block Diagram of Coordinates Exchanger
D-32
6. Target Tracking System
6-1 Basic Concept of Collision Prevention
The following two items, such as prediction and avoidance of collisions, should be considered for
prevention of collisions.
In an extreme case, regarding prediction of a collision, prediction of the case that two or more vessels may
occupy the same point at one and the same time is carried out, and avoidance is that navigation of each
ship is carried out so that each ship may not occupy the same point at one and the same time.
It is necessary to consider one blockade area in actual navigation, and this can be caught by the concept of
CPA (Closest Point of Approach). Moreover, regarding prediction, time taken to reach CPA about prediction
must be taken into account, and danger of collision is judged by using TCPA (Time to CPA)
Target True Vector
TCPA
Time to reach CPA
Target ship
Collision
rectangular Relative Vector
Own Ship
Own ship True Vector

CPA Ring
Fig.1 Concept of CPA and TCPA
[Explanation of a collision triangle]

By a relative speed vector, CPA and TCPA can be known easily. There is an advantage that danger of
collision can be grasped at a glance by such concept. By a true speed vector, speeds and courses of other
ships can be grasped easily and a relative attitude of each ship (crossing, overtaking, head-on, alongside,
etc.) can be grasped as well.
In the above figure, when a relative vector is in the direction of a CPA ring, (that is, when a CPA is within a
CPA ring), a danger of collision may occurs.
In addition, according to a situation, each ship operator sets up a CPA ring.
D-33
6-2 Rule
According to the new IMO radar performance standards in effect on July 1, 2008, the rule relating to target
tracking function is as follows.
IMO Performance Standard IEC Standard

Previous standard A.823(19), IEC-60872-1/2/3
New standard MSC.192(79) IEC-62388
Therefore, a target tracking function called ARPA/ATA/EPA is now called TT (Target Tracking). With the
revision of the standard, in the following description, a target tracking function is described as TT function,
and a tracked target is described as TT target.
6-3 Basic Concept of System

6-3-1 The 1st step: detection and acquisition of targets from radar video signals
That is, ship navigators plot targets using trackball etc. After radar signals are processed with elimination
of interference and sea clutters and such processed radar signals are sent as sweep data to a target
tracking processing circuit. A target tracking processing circuit contains functions such as quantization of
video signals, detection of targets in positions picked up (for use in manual acquisition), detection of targets
in a sector (for use in automatic acquisition) and prediction of movement of moving targets, and a function of
target tracking processing circuit is that position data of target required are sent to a main CPU.
6-3-2 The 2nd step: Tracking of targets
Prediction of a position to which a target may move from a position of a previously detected target, is carried
out, for every antenna rotation. A target which is considered to be most suitable is detected from previously
predicted video signals around a predicted position, and finaly detected target position is set as the latest
target positionlet. Target tracking function is performed repeatedly by predicting and detecting targets.
6-3-3 The 3rd step : Judgment of ship in danger of collision
Based on the position information of the targets described in the above previous steps, target vectors
(speed, course) are computed, and then a judgment of whether any danger of collision exists is made.
Once targets’ vectors are found, the closest point (CPA: Closest Point of Approach）approaching own ship
and a time taken (TCPA: Time to CPA) for the target to approach that point from the target position can be
computed. Such computed CPA and TCPA are compared with a limit of CPA and a limit of TCPA which
have been beforehand set up according to situations surrounding own ship and a judgment of danger of
collision is made. At this time, a function which simulates how a target vector changes by simulating a
speed and a course of an own ship is called “Trial Manoeuvre”.
6-3-4 The 4th step: Display
The changing situations of the targets processed in the above steps, are displayed on a display and ship
navigators are notified of these information.
Displaying is performed with symbols or numerical values and a course and a speed and a status of each
target can be judged by the forms and the colors of symbols. Moreover, it is possible that audible alarms
and alarm indications draw notice of ship navigators.
D-34
6-4 Description of Term of Operation
Alarm Alarm display

CPA/TCPA Alarm for target in danger of collision
Alarm for targets entering a automatic
New Target
acquisition area
Lost Alarm for Lost Target
Target Data Numerical data display for target

tracking
BRG (Bearing) Bearing of Target
Range Range of Target
Course Direction in which a target is moving
Speed Speed of Target in direction of target’s moving
CPA Closest Point of Approach
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach
BCR (Bow Crossing Range) Range to a collision point for bow to cross
BCT (Bow Crossing Time) Time taken for bow to cross a collision point
Trial Maneuver Trial Maneuver Manual simulation, Course,/Speed, and setting of

dynamic characteristics
Target Vector Target vector Displaying Information of Course and Speed of
acquired target as vectors on a target echo.
True/REL True vector / Relative vector indication
Length Selection of Vector Length

(1 to 60 minutes, unit: 1 minute)
Limit Safe full limits
CPA limit Setting of Safety limit of Closest Point of approach

TCPA limit Setting of Safety limit of Time to Closest Point of
approach
Own Speed Speed of Own ship Change and Manual setting of speed of own ship
MAN/LOG/2AXW/2AXG/ GPS
Azimuth Mode Display mode

RM Relative motion
TM True motion
CNCL TT Cancellation of a tracked target
(CaNCeL Target
Tracking)
All Cancel TT Cancellation of all tracked targets
ALARM ACK Acknowledge Alarm Cancellation of audible alarm
(Alarm ACKnowledge)
ACQ Acquisition Starting of selection and tracking of targets required
(ACQuisition) to track.
Acquisition of a target by manual using cursor
Automatic acquisition of target within a automatic
acquisition zone
D-35
AZ Automatic acquisition zone Setting of zone with EBL/VRM/Cursor
(Acquisition Zone) Automatic acquisition of target entering automatic
acquisition zone
Generation of New Target alarm
The same as for the automatic activation zone for
AIS
Past POSN Past position Display of the maximum of ten(10) past
(Past POSitioN) positions at convenient intervals.
TT Test Menu Functional Check of system
Association Identification of Tracked Target and AIS Target as the
same target.
Reference Target Finding and displaying of own ship speed by tracking

target fixed on the ground.
D-36
6-5 Example of Display
(NORTH UP, Relative vector mode)
Automatic Symbol for Tracked target

acquisition dangerous target number
Past position Lost target
sector
Associated target Cursor marker CPA Ring Associated target Vector for tracked target
Priority is given to AIS targets Priority is given to TT targets
Fixed Range Marker (Range Ring) / Variable Range Marker (VRM) / Electronic Cursor other than
the above (EBL) displayed symbols etc. are displayed.
In the relative vector mode, CPA Ring is indicated as a solid line.
D-37
7. AIS Superimposition Display
7-1 Basic Concept of System
7-1-1 The 1st step : reception/decoding of AIS target information
Data of an AIS target (VDM sentence) are transmitted as compressed data. These data are received and
decoded, and dynamic data, such as latitude/longitude, COG, SOG, and navigation status, and static data,
such as ship's name, call sign, destination, etc. of an AIS target are acquired.
7-1-2 The 2nd step: Complement of target position
AIS target data are transmittd at intervals of 2 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on target speed, turning
round, etc. When an interval between neighboring transmissions is long, the present target position is
predicted and displayed using COG/SOG received last time.
7-1-3 The 3rd step: Judgment of ship in danger of collision
This step judges whether ships are in danger of collision. Once speed and course of target are found, it is
easy to calculate CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to CPA). Such calculated CPA and
TCPA are compared with a limit of CPA and a limit of TCPA which have been beforehand set according to
situations surrounding own ship and danger of collision is judged. At this time, a function, which simulates
how a target vector changes by simulating speeds and courses of own ship, is called “Trial Maneuver”.
7-1-4 The 4th step: Filtering
If AIS filter is set, AIS targets in such area can be displayed preferentially, or only AIS targets in the area can
be displayed. The form of filter can be chosen from the three following types.
- a circle centering on own ship
- a shape of a fan enclosed by two bearings positioned on either side from right ahead
- a zone enclosed by two bearings positioned on either side from right ahead and by two lines based
on own ship
7-1-5 The 5th step: Judging of being the same target
Complicatedness of a radar display can be reduced by displaying one association symbol instead of
displaying two symbols such as AIS symbol and TT symbol, when AIS target and TT target can be judged
as the same target. Judgment of being the same target is carried out by a difference in course/speed of
each target, and bearing /distance from own ship.
7-1-6 The 6th step: Display
The changing situations of the targets processed in the above steps, are displayed
on a display and ship navigators are notified of these information. Usually, AIS target
is displayed as a symbol of sleeping target shown in the right figure. Sleeping target
Direction of vertex of a triangle shows a heading or a course of a target.
activated
AIS targets entring an automatic activation zone are activated automatically or
activated by manual, such activated AIS targets are displayed as a symbol as
shown in the right figure. A heading is displayed as a solid line and a course Activated
target
vector is displayed as a dotted line. A line perpendicular to a heading line shows
a direction of turning.
D-38
Moreover, ship navigators’ attention are called by audible alarm or alarm indication
other than symbol indication.
7-2 Description of Term for Operation

Alarm Display of Alarm
CPA/TCPA Alarm for dangerous target
New Target Alarm for target entering an automatic activation area
Lost Alarm for Lost target
Target Data Numeric data display of AIS target
Name Ship's name
Call Sign Call sign
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
COG or CTW Course Over the Ground (Course relative to the ground) or
Course Through the Water(Course relative to the water)
SOG or STW Speed Over the Ground (Speed relative to the ground) or
Speed Through the Water (Speed relative to the water)
CPA Closest Point of Approach

(The closest point of approach from own ship)
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach

(Time to approach the closest point from own ship)
BRG Target Bearing

Range Range to Target
HDG Target Heading
ROT Rate of turn (turning speed)
POSN Latitude/Longitude
Destination Destination
NAV Status Navigational status data
Trial Maneuver Setting of Trial Maneuver Setting of Manual Simulation, Course/Speed and Dynamic
Characteristics
Vector Target vector Information of a course and a speed of an AIS target are
displayed as a vector on a target echo.
True/REL True vector, Relative vector
Length Selection of Length of a vector

(1 to 60 minutes, per 1-minute)
Limit Safety limit values
CPA limit Setup of the safety limit of Closest Point of Approach
TCPA limit Setup of the safety limit of Time to Closest Point of Approach
ACT AIS ACTivate AIS target

Activation of AIS targets
DEACT AIS DEACTivate AIS target

Deactivated AIS targets
ALARM ACK ALARM ACKnowledgef
Cancellation of Audible alarms
D-39
Activation Zone Automatic activation region Sector setup using EBL/VRM/cursor
Sleeping AIS target in the zone is activated automatically.
Generation of alarm for New Target
The same as for the automatic acquisition zone for target
tracking function
Past POSN Past POSitioN

A maximum of ten Past positions are displayed at convinient
intervals.
Association Identification of Tracked Target and AIS Target as the same
target.
D-40
7-3 Example of Display
(NORTH UP, TRUE vector mode)
Activation Zone Past position Activated target Associated target

Priority is given to AIS.
A target entering AZ Lost target Cursor mark sleeping target
In addition to the above markers, Fixed (Fix) / Variable (VRM) Range Marker, Electronic cursor, etc.
are displayed.
In the relative speed vector mode, a CPA ring is displayed as a solid line.
D-41
8. ECDIS and INS
8-1 Outline
ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display System) can display information such as own ship position, course,
speed ,etc. required for safe navigation other than Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) which has been
published under Each Government Organization such as the Hydrographic Department.
ECDIS consists of a display part, a control part, and a processing part, and in the processing part,
hydragraphic information displaying, input signal processing and realtime route monitoring are carried out.
The conceptula scheme and the example of ECDIS display are shown in Fig.1 and Fig.2 respectively.
ECDIS is described in the Performance Standards for ECDIS adopted by IMO (International Maritime
Orgatinzation ) as follows.
“ECDIS means a navigation information system, which, with adequate back-up arrangements, can be
accepted as complying with the up-to-date chart required by regulation V/20 of the 1974 SOLAS
Convention, by displaying selected information from a system electronic navigational chart (SENC) with
positional information from navigation sensors to assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring,
and by displaying additional navigation-related information if required.”
ENC is a vector method type of Hydrographic Chart which is compatible with IHO Transfer Standard for
Digital Hydrographic Data “S-57” about hydrographic information sepcified by International Hydragraphic
Organization, but since it is not suitable for being displayed as a hydrographic chart due to its data structure,
it is transformed into SENC (System ENC) for use. The hydrographic chart is updated by taking the latest
information periodically published about ENC into SENC. SENC is displayed as a hydrographic chart which
is processed according to Standard S-52 Appendix 2 "Colour and Symbol Specifications for ECDIS"
published by IHO.
Display Part
Navigation Route Hydragraphic Information

Operation Part Monitoring Display Processign
Human Interface
Processing Part
Input Signal Processign Hydragraphic Information

(SENC)
Navigational Sensors
GPS navigation equipment
Gyro Compass
Speed Log
Fig. 1 Conceptual Scheme
The main functions of ECDIS are shown below.

- All the information in SENC can be displayed.
D-42
- There are two steps such as the first step of "cautions" by indication and the second step of the
"alarm" by a visible alarm and an audible alarm. An alarm is be provided when own ship is going to
cross the safety depth contour or reaches a dangerous area closely.
- An alarm should be provided when the actual position of own ship deviates from the planned
track beyond a preset cross track limit, or when own ship is reaching the next waypoint.
- A caution indication should be provided when the planned route crosses a safety contour line or a
dangerous area.
- can preserve the record of the previous 12 hours and of the voyage track to reconstruct the
Navigation.
- may display radar image information and other ships’ information of a radar and an AIS (Automatic
Identification System)
Integration of systems like Integrated Navigation System (INS), which is a combination of systems, such as
a Conning Display, which indicates various navigation information, Radars, an Autopilot and ECDISs, which
are interconnected between or to, aiming at safe and efficient navigation, and the other integration of
systems like IBS (Integrated Bridge System), which is a combination of INS, Machinery systems and Cargo
systems, etc., have progressed. And ECDIS serves as a core of such systems.
As future trends, expansion of ships which is fitted with ECDIS, and development of S-100 that a data
structure type and time-varying information like a current is added to S-57 has been also considered.
8-2 ECDIS
8-2-1 ENC and its Updating
Since ENC is not suitable for being displayed as a hydrographic chart due to its data structure, it is
transformed into system ENC (SENC) for use. The hydrographic chart is kept latest by taking the
up-to-date information periodically published about ENC into SENC. SENC is displayed as a hydrographic
chart which is processed according to Standard S-52 Appendix 2 "Colour and Symbol Specifications for
ECDIS" published by IHO. This structure is shown below.
Display
Hydrographic
office of each
country or
distributors Electronic
hydrographic
information
Fig. 2 Chart Updating Flow
D-43
8-2-2 Electronic hydrographic charts applicable to JRC ECDIS
Since ENCs published by the Hydrographic Office of each country have not covered the whole world yet,
other types of charts overing the area uncovered by ENC are used as well. Types of Electronic
hydrographic charts which are applicable for JRC ECDIS are shown below.
Table 1
ENC C-MAP CM93/3 ARCS
Hydrographic Office of UK Hydrographic

Publisher Jeppesen Marine
each country Office
Data format Vector data Vector data Raster data
This does not cover all This covers charts in the This covers charts in the
Cover area
charts in the whole world. whole world. whole world.
Feature This covers charts for the Since this is the digital
The electronic
hydrographic chart
whole world and it is facsimile of UK paper
known all over the charts,
officially accepted by IMO.
world. However, it cannot the completely same
It can be used instead of
be used instead of paper charts as paper charts are
a paper chart.
charts. displayed on LCD.
According to the Performance Standards for ECDIS adopted by IMO, it is defined that, when ENCs are not
produced or not published, RNCs can be used in ECDIS instead to satisfy the carriage requirements of
charts on board a ship. However, when using RNCs in ECDIS, an appropriate portfolio of up-to-date paper
Charts are carried onboard a ship and are used together with RNCs.
RNC: Raster Navigational Chart

a facsimile of a paper chart originated by, or distributed on the authority of, a government-authorized hydrographic
office. RNC is used in these standards to mean either a single chart or a collection of charts
8-2-3 Vector data and Raster data

(1) Vector data
Vector data consists of attributes and coordinate values.
The following data are taken for instance. Table 2
No. Attribute 1 Attribute 2 Coordinate value
P0 Black Solid line (x0,y0)
P3 Red Solid line (x3,y3)
P4 Red Dotted line (x4,y4)
P5 Red Dotted line (x5,y5)
If a computer reads these data and displays such data, it is shown in the following figure. Moreover,
for an attribute, it is possible to define data such as the coastline and depth contour other than color
and the types of lines freely.
D-44
(x3,y3) (x5,y5)
(x1,y1)
(x0,y0) (x2,y2) (x4,y4)
Fig.3 Vector data
(2) Raster data

Raster data consists of a collection of pixels (points). A pixel is the minimum component of display.
This data only has the information of color as an attribute. When people watch what is displayed on a
screen, people can recognize what it is. But a computer cannot recognize.
Fig.4 Raster
8-3 Performance requirements

The performance requirements of ECDIS are shown below.
(1) All the SENC information can be displayed.
(2) A safety contour and a safety depth can be chosen, emphasized and displayed.
(3) ENCs can be updated and a means for ensuring of loading it into SENC should be provided.
(4) The same Geodetic System should be used for all navigation information inputted to ECDIS.
(WGS-84).
(5) A means of setting waypoints is provied in route planning, and addition, cancellation, revision ,etc.
can be carried out.
(6) Route monitoriing, during which the waters included in ENC can be drawn out arbitrarily, can be
performed, and when the own ship’s planned routes are included in a screen being displayed, the
D-45
own ship’s position can be always displayed on the screen.
(7) The recorded last 12 hours’ voyages can be played back.
(8) Have the following alarm function.
- when planned routes cross safety contours.
- when own ship’s position deviates from the planned track beyond a preset cross track limit.
- when approahing a waypoint.
- when interfaced equipment is abnormal.
(9) The display size for route monitoring should be not less than 270x270 mm.
Not less than 270
Not less than

270 mm
Safety contour
Own ship
Copy and use of this drawing is prohibited
Planned route Fig.5 Example of display
8-4 Acquisition of ENC

8-4-1 Encryption of ENC and Acquisition of the license for decryption
Most of ENCs are encrypted in accordance with S-63 (IHO Special Publication No.63) defined by IHO and
provided to users.
Users can use ENC by acquiring a license according to the following flow. "key (Cell Permit)" shown in the
following figure corresponds to a license. In addition, five sets of ECDIS can be used with one license per
ship.
D-46
Japan Radio Ship Owner Distributor of ENC
Co.,Ltd.
User permission User permission User permission
User’s own code issued for each Procuction

equipment
Key (Cell Permit) Key (Cell Permit)
Encrypt
Chart CD Chart CD
Fig.6 Acquisition of license
8-4-2 Introduction of C-MAP

C-MAP CM93/3 of Jeppesen Marine are introduced in the following procedures.
- inform C-MAP of eToken* number.
- one set of CD-ROMs which covers the whole world is sent from C-MAP.
- load the CD-ROM sent from C-MAP in ECDIS.
- select an area which will be used in ECDIS
- file for order is created and it is sent to C-MAP.
- licensed file is sent from C-MAP.
- licensed file is loaded in ECDIS and then the ordred area of C-MAP chart can be dysplayed.
Japan Radio
Ship Owner
Co.,Ltd.
Kit
shipment informing eToken No. system ID
Chart Chart
Install CD Shipment CD
Instruction eToken No. system ID

Informing of area in use
book order information
Kit for C-Map issue
Install
License Shipment License
Registration
Fig.7 ntroduction of C-MAP
D-47
* eToken and its number
eToken is an option item and the device shown below is inserted in USB memory jack of ECDIS.
eToken
number
8-5 Track Control System (TCS)

According to the revised SOLAS chapter V Regulation 19 “Carriage requirements for shipborne
navigational systems and equipment”, all ships of 10,000 gross tonnage and upwards are required to have
a heading control system (HCS) or track control system (TCS), or other means, to automatically control and
keep to a heading and/or straight track. An autopilot is normally installed on board a ship and it is fitted
with Heading Control function. In JRC ECDIS, TCS which is fitted with in ECDIS is interfaced with an
Autopilot to meet the SOLAS requirement.
In addition, TCS provided by JRC is established by interfacing it with only autopilots of YOKOGAWA
Denshikiki Co., Ltd. And TOKIMEC, Inc..
8-5-1 Characteristics of Heading Control System /Track Control System

(1) Characteristics of Heading Control System
Although a Heading Control System (HCS) keeps a ship’s heading in a preset direction automatically, the
ship is drifted by the wind, the wave or the tide and the ship’s course may deviates from the course of the
preset direction.
Drift (Wind, Wave, Tide)
Heading Control
D-48
(2) Characteristics of Track Control System
Track Control System (TCS) keeps a ship’s position on a preset route automatically, by computing a new
direction with a planned route and a present position and sending the new direction to a autopilot. A ship
is drifted by the wind, the wave or the tide and then ship’s course may deviate from the preset route.
Compensation signals for such deviations are sent to a steering system for keeping a ship’s route.
Drift (Wind, Wave, Tide)
Waypoint-1 Waypoint-2
Planned route Width of a routee

Track Control
8-5-2 Configuration of TCS

A TCS function is establisehd as shown in the following figure.
Command
direction
Command
direction
8-5-3 Category for TCS

There are following three categories in TCS and JRC supports the categories B and C of these.
Category A: Single straight leg track control or multiple straight leg track control without assisted
turns between legs;
Category B: Multiple straight leg track control with assisted turns between legs (Assist Turn);
Category C: Full track control on straight legs and turns (Full Automatic).
D-49
8-5-4 Route Keeping and Turn performance
(1) A brief outline of route keeping in a straight line route
Command directions are calculated for Category-B and C practically according to the following formula in
TCS of JRC to keep planned routes.
N N
Next waypoint
θr θs: commanded derction

θs
LD θ: Directio of planned route

LD: XTD
waypoint
Own ship
dL D
θs = θr − ( a1 LD + a 2 ) (in the case that own ship is at the right side of a route.)
dt
dL D
θs = θr + ( a1 LD + a2 ) (in the case that own ship is at the left side of a route.)
dt
Note: "a1" is called “tracking Gain”, it is set by an operator.

"a2" is called “difference parameter”,
(2) Turn Performance

a) Category-B
An alarm is generated before own ship reaches a WOL (Wheel over line), at this time, if an operator
depresses a key [TURN], a turn is initiated. If the key [TURN] is not depressed, own ship is kept on
the straight line.
A turning point changes depending on the Depress [TURN] key.

timing of depression of [TURN] key.
If [TURN] key is not depressed, turning is

not initiated (The course is kept on the
same straight line). An alarm is generated.
(R)
D-50
b) Category-C
An alarm is generated before own ship reaches a WOL, and a turn is initiated automatically.
A turn is initiated automatically.
8-5-5 Monitoring of alarms required for TCS

Monitoring of the following alarms is required for TCS according to the Performance Standards.
- power supply abnormal
- monitoring of position information
(monitoring of a position difference of two positioning equipment )
- monitoring of the actual heading
- positioning sensor abnormal *1
- monitoring of a position deviation
- monitoring of a course difference
- monitoring of a low ship speed
- monitoring of a End of track *1
- monitoring of TCS abnormal *1
- monitoring of reaching Wheel Over Line (WOL)
* 1: If an officer in charge does not acknowledge the alarm, a back-up navigator call is generated and
is sent to captain room etc..
D-51
9. Echo Sounder
9-1 Outline
An echo sounder transmits an ultrasonic wave into water like a fish finder and receives echoes reflected
from the seabed and a shoal of fish and records those data, and measures the depth of water. Although a
fish finder aims at various information in water such as a shoal of fish or the seabed, an aim of echo
sounder is to search only the seabed and to measure the depth of water and to display it. An echo sounder
is a mandatory equipment for large vessels and should meet IMO Resolution MSC.74 (69). Annex
The main specifications are as follows.

Refer to chapter 8. fish finder as to the basic explanation of an ultrasonic wave.
Specification of Requirements Remarks

Sounding Range 2m-200m The previous standards
requires up to 400m.
Main display The displaying of 15 minutes of measured sounding
records as a minimum.
Data storage Measured depth data should be recorded on a The previous standards
recording paper or displayed by other means for requires only recording on
more than 12 hours. paper.
Accuracy Based on a sound speed in water of 1,500 m/s,

± 0.5 m on the 20 m range scale, respectively
± 5 m on the 200 m range scale; or
± 2.5% of the indicated depth,
Whichever is greater.
[ Frequency ]
The typical frequency currently used for an echo sounder is 50 kHz and/or 200 kHz. The overwhelming
majority of customers have chosen 200 kHz. Some customers who demand deep sounding exceeding a
standard depth have chosen 50 kHz. As a general character, 200 kHz is short in wavelength and is
resistant to air bubbles caused by the navigation of a ship. Although 50 kHz is long in wavelength and its
sounding range is much longer, it is easily affected by the influence of air bubbles. Therefore, a mounting
position should be selected carefully.
[ Density of Reflective Substance and Reflection loss ]

A sound wave is reflected from an object the density of which is different from the density of water. If the
seabed is a rock, since the density difference between seawater and the rock is large, a sound wave
reflects best. Conversely, in the case of a substance like mud, a density difference between mud and
seawater is small and the reflection of a sound wave is weak.
D-52
9-2 Example of Echo Sounder Configuration
Signal Image Recording

Amplification Detection A/ D
Processing output paper or
Display
Transducer Switching of
(Oscillator) Transmit/
Receive
Transmission
Oscillation
Output
Fig.1 Echo Sounder Configuration
9-3 Operation of Eco Sounder
A recording method using discharge recording paper is used to be applied for previous echo sounders. For
present models, a color LCD is used for displaying echoes, and sounding records of more than 12 hours
are able to be displayed on a screen as well. In the case of a paper recording method, sounding data are
drawn on a long continuous sheet of paper. Therefore, in order to confirm sounding data of 12 hours
recorded, it is necessary to trace back the rolled recording paper unrolling it in order.
Features of a color LCD are summarized below in comparison with a recording paper method.
(1) Since there is no mechanical rotation part, the wear of parts does not occures. And, a mechanical
malfunction rate is low.
(2) Since the strength of a signal was displayed with multiple colors (for example, eight colors, 16 colors)
in proportion to the intensity of signals, it is easy to identify the seabed.
(3) Sounding records for the past 12 hours or the past 24 hours, such as the depth of water, time and
position (only when a position data is inputted.), are stored in at regular intervals. These data are
displayed as a form of a line graph and data are able to be displayed by placing a cursor on a line
graph.
(4) Recording paper is not necessary for a color liquid crystal dysplay and the cost of running can be
reduced.
D-53
9-4 Mounting Position of Transducer
When mounting a transducer of an echo sounder on the bottom of a ship, it is important to take into account
not receiving the influence of air bubbles generated during navigation of a ship. If a position at a ship’s
bottom is not suitable, air bubbles coming in from the bow at the time of navigation will cover the surface of
transducer oscillators and causes the generation of noises, the pausing of recording of images, etc. and
then it turns out to be impossible to bring out the best performance.
Moreover, as the number of high speed ships increases, it has been difficult to determine a mounting
position of a transducer. Therefore, a mounting position should be selected with care.
Regarding a mounting position of a transducer for commercial ships, a flat surface, which is as near to the
bow as possible, is recommended. However, as the shape of a bow normally belongs under the
know-how of each shipyard, it is difficult to predict the flow of air bubbles. It is effective to follow mounting
positions of similar types of ships which are being constructed in series or in which similar or the same
equipment were installed, etc. As the number of large ships increases, the case increases where a
transducer is mounted at a bow and at a stern respectively. Mounting at a stern is still more difficult because
a stern part is subject to the influence of air bubbles
Next, general recommendable positions are shown below.
9-4-1 Installation of one position or two position:

(1) In case of one transducer position
Generally near front bulk head of engine room in the stern ( not limited in the area of 8 /10 of over all teng
of a ship from a front line.)
(2) In case of two transducer position ( second transducer )
A general type of ships without a bulbous bow: near an area of 1 /10 of overall length of a ship from a front
line.
D-54
9-4-2 Ships with a bulbous bow:
Between the point at which crosses a line of upper bow and a bottom line and a bow.
Line of upper bow
Cross point A
Recommended area line
9-4-3 Ships with a round bulbous bow or similar ones:

As the case of ship’s bow line is dull, air bubbles do not go to the side of ship but go down to the bottom of a
ship, a transducer may be mounted in an especially prepared gondola.
Gondola
( A transducer is installed in here )
D-55
9-5 Trial Running Test
Sensitivity (GAIN)
At the time of finishing installing an Echo sounder,
0 Range m
a trial running test is carried out and the performance
Rotation frequency: r.p.m.
of sounding and the influence of noises should be
confirmed during the trial test. At a deepest point in an
area where fishery is performed actually, at first, a trial
running test is carried out at a speed of dead slow, and
while a sensitivity knob is set at every point of 0 to 10,
the performance of sounding is confirmed. Next, with
a speed of a ship being increased gradually, the same
test is carried out several times and ascertaining up to
which speed (Revolution) sounding performance is
available at the deepest range without the influence of
noises is carried out.
Next, after an above mentioned test is over,
at a sea area of depth of 20 to 30 m Ｆig.2 Example of the result of Trial test
selected for a test, in ranges

of dead slow to full speed, Line for start of Seabed
Oscillation
the same test as above is carried
out again. (Appearance of air
(1)
bubbles may be different under Noises like dots come
a shallow area and a deep area) out, but the echo of the
seabed is displayed
normally.
If a mounting position of a Time
mark
transducer is not suitable, noises (2)
Echoes of seabed
caused by the influence of air
are broken off due to
bubbles during a ship’s running may air bubbles.
occurs.
The recording of the generation of (3)
Echoes of the
air bubbles is shown in a figure.
seabed are much
As shown in a picture on the right broken off due to
air bubbles.
side, the seabed may not be Noises like dots
may not come out
identified due to the influence
(4)
of air bubbles. In this case, since a The echoes of the
mounting position of a transducer seabed can hardly
be seen.
is not suitable, it is necessary to
ascertain it.
Fig.3 Example of recording of bubble generating
D-56
9-6 Judgment of Quality of Oscillator ( 500V Megger should be used. )
Magnetostriction Type Electrostriction Type
A-B=0Ω D-E= more than 2MΩ

B-C= more than 2MΩ E-F= more than 2MΩ
A-C= more than 2MΩ D-F= more than 2MΩ
9-7 Calculation of Transmitted Electric Power
2
E
a. P= (W)
8R
2
E
b. P= (W)
2R
E: Voltage p-p at secondary side output (oscilloscope used)
1. In the case of measuring at both terminals, formula a is applicable
2. In the case of measuring between one side and a ground, formula b is applicable.
R: Load impedance
Example: A voltage between one side and a ground is 500 VP-P, in the case of load 100Ω.
D-57
10. Fish Finder
10-1 Introduction
A fish finder transmits a supersonic wave into the seawater and receives echoes reflected from the seabed
and a shoal of fish and is one of fishing equipment aiming at development of a catch of fish. The reason
why a supersonic is used for a fish finder is that other methods except for a supersonic wave are not used
for the purpose of a fish finder. That is, a radio wave cannot propagate through the seawater, and light is
able to be used only for measuring a closely near distance precisely and the maximum range is about 200
m due to the characteristics of excessive attenuation. Moreover, the wavelength of light is very short in
comparison with the wavelength of a sound wave and light cannot be used for searching objects on the
seabed (through the seawater) at all. Sound wave attenuation is much less than light attenuation in the sea
and its propagation range is far longer. As a result, a sound wave is used for a fish finder.
10-2 Supersonic Wave and Audible Sound

A frequency of a supersonic wave is so high that people's ear does not hear it. As to an audible sound, it is
possible for people's ear to hear it, as depends on an individual or age, and the range is usually about 20
Hz - 20 kHz. Therefore, a sound wave of more than 20 kHz is called a supersonic wave. In the case of a
fish finder, a supersonic wave of 28 kHz to 200 kHz is used well. (However, fish finders of low frequency of
15 kHz also exist.)
10-3 Character of Underwater Supersonic waves

10-3-1 the speed of sound
in the sea: 1500 m/s (20° Centigrade)
in fresh water: 1372 m/s
in the air: 340 m/s
through iron: 4663 m/s
The speed of sound relates to the density of materilas as described above, the higher the density is and
the higher the temperature is, the faster the speed is. Therefore, although the speed of sound chages to a
certain extent in the seawater, 1500 m/s is used for designing. The speed of sound changes depnding on
temperature, salt content and pressure of seawater, and since the amount of the change is about within ±
4% as a maximum, a supersonic wave functions well for a fish finder.
10-3-2 Sound wave propagation attenuation

[ Frequency ]
A frequency of 15 kHz to 460kHZ is permitted according to the Authority’s rule and a frequency of 15 kHz
to 200 kHz is used for fish finers on the market. A frequency of more than 100 kHz is called “High
frequency” and a frequency of less than 100 kHz is called “Low frequency”. The wavelenght of Low
frequency sound wave is long and low frequency propagates further, but idenificaton of small objects is
difficult. On the contrary, The wavelenght of High frequency sound wave is short and high frequency cannot
propagates further, but idenificaton of small objects is possible.
D-58
[ Diffusion loss ]
A sound wave transmitted from a transducer spreads radiately. The face of a sound wave increses in
propotion to the square of a distance, and as the strength of a sound wave is defined per unit area, the
strenght of a sound wave gets weak in inverse propotion to the square of a distance. This kind of
attenuation is called “Diffusion Loss”.
This is expressed with a logarithmic function as follows.
= 20log (X/X0) (dB)
X: Distance (m), X0 : unit distance (1 m)
[ Absorption loss ]
A sound wave is affected by the influence of viscosity etc. during the propagation of it. A sound wave is
absorbed at a regular rate in proportion to a propagation distance. This kind of attenuation is called
“Absorption Loss”.
Absorption Loss is expressed as follows.
Absorption Loss = α X (dB)
α: Absorption index (dB/m)
note: α is usually a unit of “dB/km” for easy of understanding it.
A propagation loss is the sum of a diffusion loss and an absorption loss. In the case of a round -
trip propagation, it is expresed as shown Fig.1. The following is obtained obviously from a figure below.
The higher the frequency is, the bigger an absorption loss is. As a result, a propagation loss inreases and a
reaching range becomes short.
L: Diffusion loss (alpha=0 db/km)
Propagation attenuation
of a round trip
(db) Lw of
<-
Sounding Distance x (m)
Lw: Propagation attenuation of a round trip

x0: Unit distance (1 m)
α: Absorption coefficient in sea water
Fig. 1 Propagation loss curve of a sound wave underwater
D-59
[ Relation between Wavelength and Reflection ]
Generally, In the case that a wavelength is shorter than the size of a reflective object, the sound wave is
reflectedd well. However, since attenuation is also large if a wavelength is short, a frequency in use is
determined based on fish species and operating depth.
Frequency underwater wavelength Remakrs

30 kHz 5cm
velocity
50 kHz 3cm wavelenght =
frequency
200 kHz 0.75cm
[ Density of Reflective object and Reflection loss ]

A sound wave is reflected well from the boundary between the two objects with a different density (a
difference in sound wave speed)
Fishes are well caught by a fish finder, it is because, as a fish's air-filled swim bladder has a different density
than seawater, a sound wave reflects at the boundary between a fish ‘s swim bladder and seawater. For
fishes and cuttlefishes like a flat fish, as a sandfish without a swim bladder, a sound wave reflects from
borne, skin and meat a little, such fishes are hard to catch by a fish finder. Likewise, if the seabed is like rock,
a sound wave reflects well. On the contrary, if the seabed is like mud, a sousnd wave does not reflect well.
10-4 Basic Principle of Fish Finder

Regarding to the reflection of a sound wave, an "echo" in the air is known well. This is a phenomenon that
voice is reflected back from mountains and valleys. In the sea, the same phenomenon occurs, and if a
sound wave pulse is transmitted towards the seabed, it is reflected form the seabed. This principle makes
sounding possible. If a shoal of fish exists, a sound wave is reflected from it and it is detected and the
information of it can be obtained.
Assuming that the character of the sea is the same everywhere, basically, a fish finding is possible using the
following characters of a sound wave in the sea.
(1) Reflectivity that reflection occurs well at the boundary between two different substances
(2) Straightness of propagation
(3) Uniform velocity
A sound wave pulse transmitted downwards from near the ship's bottom, hits a shoal of fish or the seabed,
etc., and a part of a sound wave returns to the original direction of a transducer according to the principle of
reflectivity (1). A receiver is fitted at a transmission side and the receiver receives returned signals and the
received sound signals are converted to electric signals. The electric signals are displayed on a screen as
a shoal of fish and the seabed.
Since a supersonic wave has the straightness of propagation (2), if the beam of a supersonic wave is
narrowed, it is possible to determine the direction of a signal to be transmitted and to identify the direction of
a returned signal (echoes).
D-60
Using the nature of uniform velocity makes distance measuring possible. The elapsed time between the
time of transmission of a supersonic wave and the time of reception is measured and a round trip distance
can be obtained by multiplying the elapsed time by the sound velocity. And then, a half of a round trip
distance is a distance to a shoal of fish.
Take reflection from a depth of 1500 m for example, if a supersonic wave is transmitted from a transducer
fitted onto a ship’s bottom towards the seabed, since it propagates straight in seawater at a speed of 1500
m/s, it reachs the seabed one second after it is transmitted. A pulse reflected at the seabed returns to a
transducer one second later. It takes two senocnds for the pulse to go and return. That is, the relation
between depth and the elapsd time is drawn as follows.
Depth: N (m)
Elapsed time: T (s) (time taken to go and return along a depth of N)
N (m) =(T/2 (s)) / 1500 (m/s) = Tx750
10-5 Example of Fish Finder Configuration
Amplification Signal Image Recording

Detection A/ D
Processing output paper or
Display
Transducer Switching of
(Oscillator) Transmit/
Receive
Transmission
Oscillation
Output
Fig.2 Fish Finder Configuration
10-6 Color Fish Finder

10-6-1 Basic principle
A cathode-ray tube for color televisions and a color liquid crystal display are used for a fish finder, and such
a fish finder is called “a Color Fish Finder”. A predecessor of a color fish finder used to record echoes
shading in the strength of echoes on a piece of paper. A color fish finder indicates the strength of echoes in
multicolor. A color cathode-ray tube used to be used as a color display until the beginning of the 2000s. And
now, a color liquid crystal display is normally in use.
10-6-2 Feature
A Color Fish Finder is mostly characterized by being able to use a wide dynamic range (for example, 40 dB).
Since a paper recording type of fish finder indicated only the strength of echoes, was expression of only a
shade, its dynamic range was at most 20 dB. Moreover, for a color fish finder, a dynamic range can be set
up freely.
D-61
The strength of signals returning from a shoal of fish and the seabed depends on reflective objects, and
how to display such data is shown in the following figure.
Red A supersonic wave signal transmitted from a

transducer is reflected from plankton in the
sea, a shoal of fish, the seabed, etc., and
Display Green
Color
returns to a transducer.
As the strength of reflected supersonic
waves is shown in the left figure, the echoes
of a shoal of a small fish is weak, in the case
Blue
of a big shoal of fish and of high density,
echoes are strong, and echoes from the
Transmitted
seabed is reflected more strongly.
pulse
In the left figure, a strong response like d

shows a strong electric signal level as well,
and it is colored with "reddish brown”. A big
shoal of fish and of high density like c is
colored with "orange", and a rather strong
response like b is colored wit “green”, and a
small shoal of fish is colored with “blue”.
Weak Signal strength Strong
Fig.3 Signal strength
The followings are characterized below in comparison with an outdated recording paper method.
1. Since there is no mechanical rotation part, the wear of parts does not occures. And, a mechanical
malfunction rate is low.
2. Since the strength of a signal was displayed with multiple colors (for example, eight colors, 16 colors)
in proportion to the intensity of signals, it is easy to identify the seabed.
3. Since records cannot be reserved, if necessary, a hard copy unit is required outside.
D-62
Example of display
Multiple echoes
Like a picture on the left, two or more echoes other than an
echo reflected from the seabed are observed sometimes.
A supersonic pulse outputted from a transducer is reflected
direct from the seabed, and the reflected echo is called “the
First Echo”. Furthermore, the first reflected echo is reflected
1st echo from a ship's bottom (the sea surface) and it reaches the
seabed and is reflected from the seabed again. Such an
echo is called “the Second Echo" and it is displayed twice
2nd echo at a distance of the First Echo.
As mentioned above, after multiple round-trips of an original
signal between the seabed and a ship’s bottom, echoes are
displayed at a constant interval. Such echoes are called
“Multiple Echoes”.
Interference
If other ship near own ship is using an ultrasonic
equipment, a picture shown on the left side is
displayed sometimes.
It is because that own ship and other ship use nearly
equal frequency for Fish Finder and signals
transmitted from other ship are displayed as echoes.
This is called “interference by other ship”. If the
Echoes transmission cycle of a ship is different from that of

caused by other ship, interference echoes are displayed as a
interference
line of dots, and it is possible to remove such
Interferences by applying an anti-interference effect.
In a picture shown on the left side, as each
transmission cycle is nearly equal, interference
echoes are displayed as a tilt line, and it is impossible
to remove these kinds of interference echoes.
Fig.4 Multipule echoes and Interference In order to remove such interference echoes, shifting
a transmission cycle is effective. It is effective to shift
a transmission cycle on a adjust menu and/or to
change a range.
D-63
10-7 Installation Position of Transducer
For mounting a transducer of an echo sounder in the bottom of a ship, it is important to take into account not
receiving the influence of air bubbles generated at sea. If a position on the bottom plate of a ship is not
suitable for mounting, air bubbles coming in from the bow at sea may cover the surface of oscillators and
causes the generation of noises, the pausing of recording of images, etc. and then it turns out to be
impossible to bring out the best performance.
Moreover, as the number of high speed ships has increased, it has been difficult to determine a mounting
position of a transducer. Therefore, a mounting position should be selected with care.
For an installation position for a fishing vessel, at first, the overall area between the keel head and a
propeller is divided into three equal areas as shown in Fig.6, like a picture in the first raw, and a center area
among those three areas is suggested for an installation position. Moreover, after the central area is divided
into three equal areas again as shown in Fig.6, like a picture in the second raw, it is necessary to ascertain
which area in such areas is suitable, taking into account the structure of a ship’s hull.
Below, an installation position for a fusing vessel is shown under fish type and tonnage in paragraph 8.
Since various shapes of hull exist and a certain shipyard may not issue such information, the determination
of an installation position should be taken into account. If existing equipment is replaced with another one,
the place at which equipment was removed is normally used again for reinstallation. Otherwise,
reinstallation may costs much because of appurtenant works. Therefore, frequency, character, etc. of
existing equipment, in use is checked in advance, and it should be ascertained whether the place is suitable
for reinstallation. Normally, by confirming a good installation in the same model of ship and referring to it and
determining a position, a good result can be obtained in many cases.
Side view
Bottom view
:
The installation tolerance for a
transducer is shown. Notes * --
This gas is as large as possible in
odder to avoid air bubbles. However,
Sectional for grounding, this is normally almost
view equal to the depth up to the keel
surface or a little shallower than the
Keel
keel (one centimeter)
Fig.5 Installation position for a Transducer
D-64
10-8 Tolerance for Transducer Installation classified by Ship’s Type
Various cases of installation positions are shown below. A,B,C,W: Refer to Fig.6
10-8-1 Tuna long-liner (around 200-400 GT)
Tolerance: A-B-C
W : 1300-1700 mm
Since freezers, auxiliray machines and a propeller are close to a engine, a installation position of a
transducer is apt to receive vibrations and noises. Such things should be taken into account.
10-8-2 Bonito Pole and Line fishing vessel (around 200-400 GT)
Tolerance: A-B-C
W : 1300-1700 mm
Since fishery warehouses are used for keeping sardines alive as a live bait in seawater as well, in order to
circulate seawater, draft is enough deep to install a trancducer.
10-8-3 Fishing vessels for such various fishes as bonito, tuna and cuttlefish fishing
(around 59-100 GT)
Tolerance: A-B-C
W : 800-1000 mm
Fishing vessels which belong to a small type to a midium type have been speeded up.
Therefore, shapes of such ships are showing a tendacy to change. Smaller ships are taken into account.
10-8-4 Fishing vessels for one-hook fishing, cuttlefish fishing, and All round fishing boat
(around 10-20 tons)
Tolerance: B
W : 800-1000 mm
An area for mounting a transducer in especially high speed ships made from FRP is limited. Moreover,
because fishery warehouses are close, mounting of a transducer near a engine room should be avoided.
＊ Regarding
Trial Runnig Test ,Judgment of Quality of Oscillator (500V Megger should be used.) and
Calculation method of Transmitted Electric Power , refer to the same sections in the chapter 9
Echo Sounder
D-65
11. SONAR
11-1 Outline
SONAR is an acronym for sound navigation and ranging (combined with SO (SOund), N (Navigation), A
(And), and R (Ranging).
It derives from the arms term of the U.S. navy.
11-2 Type of SONAR
11-2-1 Searchlight Sonar

A transducer of a fish detector is set horizontally, and the tilt angle and turning of the transducer is able to
be controlled mechanically. Since it is still used for small ships these days since searchlight sonars are less
expensive, but performance of a searchlight sonars is inferior to that of a scanning sonar. Therefore,
scanning sonars are preferred to it for large ships.
Frequency in use: 60 kHz - 200 kHz
11-2-2 Omnidirectional Scanning Sonar

Many oscillators are fitted on to a transducer cylindrically and supersonic pulses are transmitted
ominidirectionally from the transducer, and during a receiving interval, searching is carried out by scanning
directional beams electronically at a high speed. It is a significant feature that all the directions can be
searched by one transmission. However, since control of the tilt angle is performed by controlling the phase
of a beam electronically and a variable range of the tilt angle is limiited from 0 degree to 60 degrees, the
direction right under a keel is impossible to search. Display method is a PPI display, and a relative position
between own ship and a shoal of fish is easy to identify.
11-2-3 Semicircular Scanning Sonar

A searching range covers 180 degrees. However, since the tilt angle is varied mechanically from 0 degree
to 90 degrees and it is possible to set the tilt angle at any angle freely. Then, the direction right under a keel
is searched unlike the Omnidirectional Scanning Sonar. Since a transducer is turned mechanically over
360 degrees, there is no area which is not able to be searched.
For the Semicircular Scanning Sonar, generally a high frequency is used, and it is suitable for the purpose
of short distance searching with a high resolution. In the Omnidirectional Scanning Sonar and the
Semicircular Scanning Sonar, there are individual features, and selection of either one depends on
purposes.
D-66
11-3 Scanning Sonar
11-3-1 Theory of operation
As for the searchlight sonar, a transducer is directed to a certain direction and a narrow beam of sound
wave is transmitted from a transducer. A transmitted sound wave is reflected from a shoal of fish etc. and
reflected sound waves are received. And then, the transducer head is changed to a different direction
mechanically by using a transducer turning mechanics and a sound wave is again transmitted from the
transducer and reflected signals are received. Such process for searching is repeated horizontally.
However, the speed of sound wave propagating through the water is slow (1500 m/s), for example, in the
case of searching at a depth of 0 to 750 m, if 10 degrees is selected as a width of sound wave (called beam
width), it takes 18 seconds to search a width of 180 degrees by turning a oscillator. While an oscillator
faces a certain direction, another direction is in a blind angle. Therefore, an omission in search occurs.
[(180degree/ (beam width)) x (a round-trip distance / sound speed)]

= (180 degrees/10 ") x (750x2/1500) = 18 seconds
A new type of scanning sonar has been developed to compensate for the fault of aforementioned
searchlight sonar. For this type, a transducer to which many oscillators are fitted is used, and during a
transmission interval, strong supersonic pulses are transmitted over all the directions simultaneously, and
during a receiving interval, oscillators of the transducer are scanned electronically at a high speed. By
repeating such operations, targets around a ship can be observed at a time.
As a basic structure, it consist of a display, a transducer which is fitted with oscillators, a circuit of
transmitter/receiver unit which consist of a transmission circuit of high power output and a receiving circuit in
which is fitted with a electronic circuit of a high speed electronic switching of beams, etc.. A block diagram of
a scanning sonar is shown in Fig. 1.
Display
Transmission
circuit
Hearing
circuit
Coordinate Timing Transmission Transmit /

conversion Generation Tilt Angle control Receive
circuit circuit Change
circuit
Signal Receiving Beam Pre-Amp

Processing Gain circuit Synthesizing circuit
circuit circuit
Transducer
Fig.1 A block diagram of a scanning sonar
D-67
The whole system operating is controlled by a timing circuit, and this functions is basically similar to the
function of searchlight sonar. During a transmission interval, supersonic sound waves are transmitted
simultaneously in all directions from all the oscillators which are cylindrically arranged. When supersonic
sound waves are transmitted at a tilt angle, an electric effect that a transmission frequency sent to each
vertical layer of oscillators is phase-shifted is applied. During a receiving interval, target echoes in a
designated direction are detected and identified, by switching receiving sharp beams electronically in turn at
a high speed. Receiving sharp beams are made by combining some horizontal oscillators in a beam
combinig cirucuit. A certain tilt angle for receiving is made by adding a different phase of signal generated in
a local oscillator to signals received. A distance and a direction of a received target echo are detected by
switching beams electronically, and the coordinates of the distance and the direction of a target is
transformed for display and is displayed. Based on this method, it takes only 1.3 seconds to search a
range of 1000 m, and the omission of searching which occurs in the searchlight method does not occur in
this method.
The aforementioned describes an omnidirectional scanning sonar. A semicircular type (180 degrees) of
scanning sonar is used widely as well.
A distance to a target displayed on a screen corresponds to a direct distance between a target and a
transducer and it does not means a horizontal distance. If a tilt angle is big, it is taken into account that the
difference between a direct distance and a horizontal distance becomes big as well. Accoring to the
relation between the direct distance, the horizontal distance and the tilt angle, the relation between a sound
wave and an echo is shown in Fig.2 (Omnidirectional sonar: 360 degrees) and Fig.3 (Semicircular sonar:
180 degrees) in the case of an omnidirectional scanning sonar and a semicircular scanning sonar
respectively.
11-3-2 Relation between sound wave and echo ( Omnidirectional SONAR )

(1) Horizontal search ( Surface and Medium layer )
Shoal A
of fish
Trail Shoal A of
fish
Shoal B
Shoal B
of fish
of fish
Trail
Sound wave
Fig.2
D-68
(2) Search of a shoal of fish living near the seabed
Seabed
Tilt Angle Sound

wave
Shoal A
of fish
Shoal A
of fish
Seabed
* If a tilt angle is applied, a sound wave becomes narrower circularly like a closing umbrella.
Fig.3
11-3-3 Relation between sound wave and Echo ( Semicircular SONAR )

(1) Holizontal search ( Surface / Medium layer )
Shoal A of fish
Shoal A of fish
Shoal B of fish
Shoal B of fish
Own ship
(Sound wave) position
Seabed
Fig.4
(2) Vertical plane search ( Rapids, Fish living near the seabed )
(Sound wave)
Seabed A shoal of
fish
A shoal of fish
(Own ship) Sea surface
Seabed
Fig.5
D-69
(3) A shoal of fish in a rope
Rope
Ship
contoling a
rope
A shoal of
fish
A shoal of fish
(Own ship)
Ship
contoling a
Rope rope
(Sound wave)
Fig.6
D-70
11-4 Installation position for each component and How to install
According to hull drawings, installation positions of equipment will be determined, and then cabling routes
between equipment will be discussed. Generally, a display unit is installed in the bridge and
transmitter/receiver units are installed in a sonar room. Avoiding installing equipment in places of high
temperature and/or of high humidity and in places with excessive vibration, and is installed in places where
equipment are maintained easily. Particularly, temperature and humidity in a sonar room should be taken
into account, and ventilation fan, a fresh air inlet, etc. are fitted if necessary.
Regarding existing ships, since hull drawings may not match the present status of ships, the present status
of each ship should be confirmed actually.
Especially an important matter for installation of a transducer is to select a place where influence of air
bubbles is less.
The example of standard installtion is shown in Fig.7
Display
Transmitter/ Sonar Compartment

Receiver
Transducer
Allover length (L)
Fig. 7 Example of Standard Installation
D-71
11-5 Installation of Transmitter / Receiver
Taking the followings into account, installation positions should be determined.
(1) A position at which a transducer projects enough into the sea from a ship's bottom (keel).
(2) normally at a position of about 1/3 of the overall length of a ship from the bow of a ship.
(Refer to Fig. 4)
(3) normally installed on a keel or within 800 mm from a keel (Refer to Fig. 5, 6 )
(However, in the case of installation on a keel, after confirming with a shipyard enough, the guarantee
on strength of the keel should be obtained)
(4) a position at which air bubbles do not come or seldom come during running.
(5) a position out of which a transducer does not come in the air in a stormy weather.
(6) a position which does not receive noises from a propeller, Maine engine, generators, etc.
(7) a space enough for maintenance or test around transmitter and receiver is repair.
(8) compartment for transmitter and receiver is prepared and is waterproofed.
compartment
room
Engine
Sonar
Installation
area
Fig.8
within 800
(1) Installation on a keel (2) Installation off a keel
Fig.9
D-72
12. Doppler Log / Doppler Sonar
12-1 Outline
A Doppler Sonar and a Doppler log transmit an an ultrasonic wave to the tilted forward direction in the water
from a transducer fitted on the bottom of a ship, and receive waves reflected from the seabed or from the
water and mesure a ship speed.
The difference between Doppler Sonar and a Doppler Log cannot be defined clearly. Geneally, a
Doppler Log indicates only the forward and backward direction of a ship seepd, and in additon, a
Doppler Sonar indicates the right and left direction of a ship speed as well.
12-2 Principle ( Doppler Effect )

When a sound wave or an electric wave transmitted from one object is reflected from the other objects, if
the relative velocity between two objects exsits, the difference between a transmitted frequency and a
received frequency occurs. When an object is going out, the received frequency is lower than the
transmitted frequency. When an object is coming toward the ship, an adverse phenomenon occurs. This
phenomenon is called “Doppler effect”.
12-2-1 Doppler log
(1) An ultrasonic wave signal is transmitted at

a tilted angle forward and backward from a
transducer which is fitted onto a ship’s
bottom.
(2) An ultrasonic wave trnsmitted is reflected

diffusedly in the warter, some signals to the
transducer.
(3) At that time, supposing the ship is moving

forward, a wave coming from an foreward
oblique angel is positively affected by the
Doppler shift, and its frequency will be high,
and conversely, a wave returnig from a
backward oblique angle is affected by the
Doppler shift of minus, and it will become
low.
(4) The amount of Doppler shifts is computed based on the following formula.
(Doppler equation)
fd: Amount of Doppler shifts, v: Ship speed, θ: Transmission angle

c: Velocity of Supersonic wave (1500 m/s) in the sea water, fo: Transmission frequency
(5) After this Doppler shifted signal is amplified, it is detected in a processor, and it is converted to a ship
speed for indication of it.
D-73
Theoretically, a ship speed can be calculated only by a signal of one way. However, according to the
Doppler equation above, if a transmission angle changes, the amount of Doppler shifts will also
change. As a result, it leads to a big error (A transmission angle changes according to a pitching of a
ship).
Therefore, in order to compensate a pitching, a supersonic wave is transmitted to the other opposite
direction as well, and this pitching error is compensated using a reflected signals from an opposite
direction. This system is called a "dual beam" system.
12-2-2 Doppler SONAR

A Doppler SONAR is theoretically the same as a Doppler log. However, a Doppler log indicates only a ship
speed, but a Doppler SONAR indicates a lateral ship speed and the depth of the sea as well. In order to
reduce the influence of propeller noise, a transmission direction is rotated 45 degrees.
There are two types of Doppler SONARs. One is to calculate a longitudinal and lateral ship speed using a
transducer fitted onto the ship’s front bottom (Two-axis method), and the other is also to indicate a rear
lateral ship speed by calculating a turning angle velocity signal from “ROT” (Three-axis method). A
three-axis method is able to indicate a lateral ship speed of a front and a rear position required.
A Doppler SONAR has a function to track a ship speed over the ground up to hundreds m. And since an
accurate motion of a ship is obtained by using this function, this type of Doppler SONAR can be used
effectively during docking. Therefore, three-axis type of Doppler sonar may be called “Docking Sonar”.
Moreover, since the information of this accurate ship’s motion is also outputted to external equipment, ARPA
and navigation systems function more effectively. (If it is used in ARPA, the motion of own ship can be more
exact, and the motion of another ship can be obtained more correctly.)
The direction of a transmitted

T T urutrasonic wave
The direction of indicated a ship

speed
T Transducer
R R ROT
Two-axis method Three-axis method
D-74
13. Doppler Log / Doppler Sonar Adjustment Procedure
13-1 Scope
A Doppler Log should be adjusted for the compensation of a mounting angle of a sensor. This adjustment
procedure is applied to a work of obtaining data for the adjustment of a log.
13-2 Outline of Measurement

A correct ship speed is obtained by averaging two speeds by a round trip between two mileposts usually
prepared ashore. Speeds measured at that time must be recorded accurately on a Log speed test
recording sheet and kept. Such data will be useful for readjusting a system accurately at the time of the
malfunction of a system.
13-3 Staff Assignment for Measurement

(1) for confirmaiton of A point and B point in Fig.: 1 person
(usually Dock master etc.)
(2) for measurement of t1 (usually dock staff in charge): 1 person

(3) for calculation of speed (usually dock staff in charge): 1 perosn
(4) for keeping a fixed course: 1 person
(quarter master at under Dock master’s command)
(5) for keeping a propeller revolution (machinery persons): some persons
(6) for reset ting a Log distance meter
for measuing t2 staff (or two persons) 1 person
for Log speed calculation (or 2 persons)
Note: 1. (1) - (5) usually dock persons concerned.

2. Refer to following page (5) and (6) for t1 and t2.
13-4 Measurement Apparatus

(1) binocular for confirmation of A point and B point 1 piece
(2) actual speed conversion table for a milepost (between point A and point B) 1 sheet
(3) Stopwatch for measurement of t1, and t2 2 pieces
(4) calculator for the calculation of log speed 1 piece
(5) log speed test data sheet 3 pieces
Note: When a test is carried out while a ship is laid down in a dock, (1), (2) and one of two stopwatches
may be prepared by a Dockyard.
D-75
13-5 Measurement Procedure
13-5-1 Speed test between mileposts

Several preliminary speed tests should be carried out sufficiently before actual speed tests are carried out,
and it is necessary to pay an attention to decide the time when a speed is steady as much as possible, and
it is important to run a ship correctly in a designated direction in a speed test area. If the influence of drift and
wind is considered to be almost or completely steady during a speed test, one round - trip test would be
enough. But, if such influence seems to be changing during a speed test, it is desirable that two round-trip
tests should be carried out, but if the difference between speeds measured one way is over 0.5 knots, it is
necessary to measure a speed repeatedly until the difference is within 0.5 knots.
(1) A round-trip speed test may be normally carried out at a revolution of 1/4, 2/4, 3/4 and 4/4 of a main
engine rated revolution one time each and totally four times be carried out.
(2) A propeller revolution and a course should be kept steady at least one (1) mile before a ship enters a
speed test line, and the test condition of the ship should not be changed until speed test
measurement is over for each test.
(3) When the ship passes A point in Fig. l, stopwatch 1 and a distance meter are reset.
(4) Stopwatch 2 is depressed as a distance meter shows 0.01NM.
(5) When the ship passes B point in Fig. l, stopwatch 1 is depressed and the time required t1 is
confirmed. At this time, the reading of a distance meter is also confirmed.
(6) Stopwatch 2 is depressed as the ship passes as a distance meter shows 1.01NM. And the time t2
required for the ship to run 1 NM measured by the Log is confirmed.
(7) Each speed is calculated according to the respective elapsed times.
3600
Constant speed = a x (KT) a: Distance between mileposts (NM)
ｔ1
3600
Log speed =1x (KT)
　 t: Time required (second)
ｔ2
(8) Furthermore, the ship runs the other test course off the outward course as shown Fig.1. When the
ship enters a homeward course from an outward course, it should take a large roundabout route and
a steady speed and a straight course are maintained between two mileposts and the same
measurement as on an outward course is carried out on a homeward course.
(9) Measurement data are recorded as shown in table 1.
D-76
Milepost Milepost
Land
Course
Point A Point B
Point B Point A
Fig. 1 Speed test between Mileposts
13-5-2 Simplified speed measuring method

(used when a speed test using a milepost cannot be carried out) (using radar)
This method is that, a ship runs a course of one mile on a straight line which aims at a target on the land
and the measurement of speed is carried out at that time. Even in this case, preliminary speed tests should
be carried out sufficiently before actual speed tests are carried out, and it is necessary to pay an attention to
keep a test speed steady as much as possible and to run a ship correctly in a designated direction in a
speed test area.
If the influence of drift and wind is steady with time during a speed test, one round - trip test would be
enough. But, if such influence seems to be changing with time during a speed test, two-round-trip test is
desirable.
(1) A round-trip speed test may be normally carried out at a revolution of 1/4, 2/4, 3/4 and 4/4 of a main
engine rated revolution one time each and totally four times be carried out.
(2) A propeller revolution and a course should be kept steady until a ship runs completely one mile.
(3) When the ship passes C point (on a fixed marker) in Fig. 2, stopwatch 1 and a distance meter are
reset.
(4) Stopwatch 2 is depressed as a distance meter shows 0.01NM.
(5) When the ship passes D point in Fig. 2(2) (D point is one (1) mile away from C point.), stopwatch 1 is
depressed and the time t1 required for the ship to run one (1) mile is confirmed. At this time, the
reading of a distance meter is also confirmed.
(6) Stopwatch 2 is depressed as the ship passes as a distance meter shows 1.01NM. And the time t2
required for the ship to run one (1 ) NM measured by the Log is confirmed.
D-77
(7) Each speed is calculated according to the respective the times required.
3600
Constant speed = a x (KT) a: Distance between point C and D (NM)
ｔ1
3600
Log speed =1x (KT)
　 t: Time required (second)
ｔ2
(8) Furthermore, the ship turns 180 degrees after an outward course test is over and runs a homeward
course and the same speed measurement is carried out.
(9) Enter measurement data in a predetermined data paper respectively.
a= 1 mile
Land
Land
X is a target.
Fig. 2 Simplified speed measuring method by radar
Reference: A table on the next page is an example of data for Doppler Log measurement.
D-78
Table 1 Example data for Doppler Log measurement
D-79
14. Doppler Finder ( Current Meter )
14-1 Outline
The principle of this equipment is fundamentally the same as a Doppler sonar and a Doppler log, and
directions of fishes etc. are searched at each depth three-dimensionally. Supersonic waves are transmitted
from a transducer, which is fitted onto the bottom of a ship, at tilted angles of four directions such as forward
and backward, to the right side and to the left side, and waves, which are reflected from the seabed and a
shoal etc, such as moving objects in the selected layer of the water, are received and then actual speeds
and directions of such shoals etc. as moving targets can be obtained free from any ship speed.
This device can measure tidal currents and directions in the surface layer of the sea and the deep-sea layer.
However, since this is based on the Doppler-effect principle of detecting speeds of acoustically-reflective
objects in the water, a measured speed is not actually a tidal current speed. On the other hand,
acoustically-reflective objects moving in a tidal current are small organisms etc., which may have a certain
relative speed to a tidal current, and when the relative speed is very small, indicted speed is considered to
be almost the same as a tidal current. Therefore, this device is useful for predicting a tidal current speed and
direction.
14-2 Features
(1) Speeds and directions of shoals etc. at three points in desired layers of the water can be measured
simultaneously.
(2) It is possible to assume easily how much a fishnet spreads since a relative display on the basis of
the speed of a desired depth can be made.
(3) A speed over the ground at a depth of up to 400 m, and a speed of a shoal etc. at a depth of up
to100 m, is possible to detect stably.
(4) A measurement error caused by a ship movement has been reduced by using 4 direction beams.
(5) A source of failure can be easily discovered by a self-diagnostics.
14-3 Explanation of Principle for detecting speeds of moving objects in the water by
the Doppler Effect
Generally, when sonic or electric waves transmitted from a certain objects return from other objects, if a
relative speed between both objects exists, a frequency difference between a transmitted wave and a
received wave is caused. While an object is moving out, a received frequency is lower than a transmitted
frequency, and conversely, while an object is coming toward, an adverse effect is caused.
When a sound source moves at a speed of “ν” in the same direction as a sound wave transmitted, the
relation among the frequency “f0 “a sound source, the velocity of the sound “C” and a wave length “λ” is
given by a formula (2-1) as follows.
.................................................................................................................. (2-1)
D-80
When this wave refelcts from a fixed object and a receiver, which is moving at a speed of “ν” in the direction
of the sound source, receives the reflected wave, a frequnecy at this time is given by a formula (2-2).
……………..(2-2)
When the frequency “f0” of a supersonic wave transmitted at a tilted angle of “θ” in the water in a direction in
which a ship is moving at a speed of “V0”, the frequency “f1” of the supersonic wave in the water is given by
a formula (2-3).
....................................................................................... (2 - 3)
When this wave reflects from the seabed and the ship moving at a speed of “V0” receives the reflected
wave, the frequency “fB” of the received wave is given by a formula (2-4).
The next subject is to consider waves reflected from moving objects such as a shoal etc. in the water.
When the wave with the frequency “f1“ reaches a object moving at a speed of “VM” in the water in the same
direction as a ship is moving, the frequency “f2 “ of the wave at the object is given by a formula (2-6).
The frequency “f3 “of a wave reflected from this object moving toward a sound source is given by a formula
(2-7).
When this reflected wave is received at the ship, the frequency “fM “of the received wave is given by a
formula (2-10). This is a wave reflected from a moving object.
D-81
As a result, the following formula is obtained.
Since VM is the smaller than C (VM ≪C) in a formula (2-13), members below the third member of a formula
(2-13) can be omitted and it can be approximated by a formula (2-14).
From a formula (2-14), the following formula is obtained.
According to the aforementioned, a speed of a moving object can be obtained on the basis of a wave
reflected from the seabed and a wave reflected from a moving object.
For Doppler Finders, in order to cancel changes of a reflection angle “θ” caused by the rolling and pitching
motion of a ship, one beam each in a forward and a backward direction, and one beam each in each side
direction, 4 beams of supersonic waves in all are actually used.
Moreover, Doppler finders (Current Meter) such as JLN -610/612/615/616/626/627/628 / 650 type are
manufactured based on patent No. 805192.
COFFEE BREAK
The reference level for the depth of the water

* The height of object on land, it is measued from a mean water level.
The depth of water is measured from a minimum tide level.
Coastline is based on this value.

(area of a country).
Height of a mountain Height of an island

Maximum tide level
Mean water level
Minum tide level
Washing Hidden
Rock Rock Depth of the water
D-82
15. Color Plotter
15-1 Outline
A color plotter is connected with GPS navigation equipment etc. and draws wakes of own ship continuously
on Mercator charts in color on a screen.
By using the function of indicating coastlines, it is easy to confirm an own ship position visually, and
consequently, it contributes to safe navigation and increase in efficient fishery work.
In addition, as shown below in the paragraph “Specification”, there are many functions, and it is possible to
indicate necessary data according to users’ demands.
15-2 Specification
Display 15-inch TFT liquid crystal display (Horizontal type of display)

Effective display range Latitude 70 degrees or less
Chart data ERC version Seashore data / Bathymetry data
Display scale 1 / 1,000 to 1/10,000,000, or 0.1 nm to 1000 nm
Display motion mode North up, South up, East up, West up, Course up, Head up
Position information Latitude longitude, loran C, the loran A, Decca
Main display screen Two-dimensional screen, Three-dimensional screen,
Three- and Two-dimensional screen together
Sectional view and Two-dimensional screen together
Sectional view and Three-dimensional screen together
Numerical display screen, Tide forecast screen,
Weather information screen
Wake Memory interval 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300, 600 seconds or
0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 nm
Memory point 2000, 5000 points x 10 blocks
Display color Seven colors
Another ships’ wakes 30 targets, 500 points each
Mark Kind Mark 28 types (including event marks)
Line 3 types
Memory Mark 15,000 points
point Line 1,000 points
Comment input 12 characters
Route Memory point 49 routes (up to 50 waypoints per route)
Comment input 12 characters
Drawing Memory point 500 points x 7 blocks
D-83
Others External event input
External buzzer output (log pulse)
Tidal current data input
GPS buoy data input
direct connectable to DGPS212, GPS112 receiver
15-3 Screen Feature
Many data are sorted into several functions and arranged intelligibly.
By giving the gradation of the depth of the water which is based on not only coastline data, but isobath data
and isobaths (depth contour lines), it is easy to confirm the ups and downs of the seabed visually.
2 SEC TRACK MARK
Note: All Copyrights are reserved. Copy and use of this as a chart is prohibited.
D-84
16. AIS ( Automatic identification system )
16-1 Ouline
Universal shipborne AIS has been developed newly, in order to ensure the safety of navigation of ships
more and it was introduced into ships as a mandatory eauipment as of 1 July, 2007. AIS transmits ship’s
name, position, course, speed, etc. to the coast stations using VHF band frequency with TDMA method and
displays information transmitted from other ships. If AIS is interfaced with Radar or ECDIS and if AIS
information are superimposed, other ships’ status can be confirmed visibly. Consequently, safety of
navigation of ships is able to be improved further.
16-2 Basic Specification

The basic specification of the main rule “Recommendation ITU-R M.1371-1 and IEC61993-2 for Class A
Ship mobile equipment, which is required to be installed on ships of SOLAS Convention, is as follows.
(1) International channel: CH87B (161.975 MHz), CH88B (162.025 MHz)
(2) Modulation: GMSK
(3) Bit rate: 9600 bps
(4) Communication method: SOTDMA, 2250 slot/min/CH
SOTDMA:Self-Organized Time Division Multiple Access,
(5) Identification: MMSI is added to all the transmitting information.

(6) Static data: IMO number, ship's name, call sign, type of ship, dimension of ship
(7) Dynamic data: time (UTC), latitude, longitude, COG, SOG, Heading, Rate of turn
(8) Voyage related data: Draft, Hazardous cargo type, Destination and ETA
(9) Reporting Rate of Static Information:
Every 6 min or, when data has been amended, on request.
(10) Reporting Rate of Static Information:
Dependent on speed and course
Ship’s dynamic conditions Nominal reporting interval

Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots 3 min(1)
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots 10 s (1)
Ship 0-14 knots 10 s(1)
Ship 0-14 knots and changing course 3 1/3 s(1)
Ship 14-23 knots 6 s(1)
Ship 14-23 knots and changing course 2s
Ship > 23 knots 2s
Ship > 23 knots and changing course 2s
(11) Reporting Rate of Voyage related information:

Every 6 min or, when data has been amended, on request.
D-85
16-3 SOTDMA Communication Protocol
A SOTDMA (Self-Organized Time Division Multiple Access) protocol is used for Class A AIS communication.
This is characterized by transmitting AIS information including reservation information of time slot
information for the next transmission. The conceptual figure for time slots in use is shown in Fig. 1.
Fig.1 Conceptual Figure of Time Slots in use (for one channel)
AIS communication is carried out as shown in Fig.1. AIS of ship A transmits own ship’s information and
reservation information for the next own slots as a one packet, and AIS of ship B transmits own ship’s
information and reservation information for the next own slots, avoiding the slots reserved by ship A. AIS of
ship C transmits own ship’s information and reservation information for the next own slots, avoiding the slots
reserved by ship A and B. SOTDMA is a communication protocol that such processes is repeated by each
AIS and each AIS avoids collisions between transmissions. Two channels are used for AIS. Therefore, a
conceptual image of slot allocation is that the above slot is doubled actually
16-4 General System Configuration of shipborne AIS

A Class A AIS consists of the following functional blocks, as generally shown in Fig. 2.
(1) VHF antenna
(2) An antenna change / distribution part
(3) TDMA/DSC transmit part
(4) TDMA receive part (two units)
(5) DSC receive part
(6) GPS antenna
(7) GPS receive part (PPS;Pulse Per Second reception)
(8) Control part
(9) Display (keyboard included)
Moreover, the following inputs (10) (11) are required as main navigation equipment data from
external equipment.
D-86
(10) GPS receiving signal
(position information, course over the ground, speed over the ground)
(11) Gyrocompass signal (Heading, Rate of turn)
VHF TDMA/DSC GPS

ANT Tansmit part position information
Antenna change / Distribution part
course over the ground

GPS
speed over the ground
ANT
TDMA receive part
Gyrocompass
Control part
a heading,
TDMA receive part a turn rate
GPS
ANT
DSC receive part
Display
PPS (operation board
Is included)
GPS receive part
AIS transponder
Fig. 2 General System Configuration of shipborne AIS
16-5 AIS Display

AIS Display and Keyboard which has the minimum functions is defined as a MKD (Minimum Display and
Keyboard) by the International Standards. The Standards requires that at least 3 other ships or more can
be displayed on it. The basic screen of AIS display is the displaying of a list of other ships (Fig.3), and AIS
display is capable of indicating bearings, ranges, ship’s names of other ships as a list and is capable of
indicating own ship’s latitude, longitude, SOG, COG in the lower part of the screen of the display. If one of
the ships displayed in the list is selected, the information about it is displayed in detail.
SORT:RANGE UTC11:43
BEARING:RANGE SHIP’S NAME
270° :0.18NM JRC MARU1
10° *8.20NM JAPAN RADIO>
35° 32.865 N SOG 14.5kt

139° 50.874 E COG 45.1°
Fig. 3 Displaying of other ships as a list
D-87
17. VDR / S-VDR
VDR (Voyage Data Recorder) maintains continuously sequential records of preselected data items
relating to the status and output of the ship’s equipment, and command and control of the ship, such as
date and time, ship’s position, heading, speed, conversations in the Bridge, other ship status, etc. to
investigate causes of an incident.
S-VDR (Simplified Voyage Data Recorder) is for existing cargo ships, and requirements for data
recording and the capsule are relaxed.
17-1 Carriage requiremnts and Related ships
The carriage requiremnts for VDR/S-VDR is as follows. (SOLAS Chapter V Regulation 20)
Ship Equipment Trems of

Installation
Ship engaged in Passenger ships Existing ships / VDR

International and RORO Passenger Ships to be newly
voyage ships of 150 gross constructed
tonnage
and upwards
Cargo ships of 3,000 Ships constructed VDR

and upwards after July 1, 2002
Ships constructed VDR or 20,000 GT and

before July 1, 2002 S-VDR upwards
July 1, 2006
to July 12009
3,000 - 20,000GT
July 1, 2007
to July 1, 2010
Note: Definition of “Constructed”

.1 the keel is laid; or
.2 construction identifiable with a specific ship begins; or
.3 assembly of the ship has commenced comprising at least 50 tonnes or 1% of the estimated
mass of all structural material, whichever is less.
17-2 Performance Requirements

- Record specified data for 12hours into a capusule.
- Power supply : supplied from ship’s emergency source of electrical power supply
- Annula inspection is carried out by manufaturers approved by a Classiification Society
- If the ship’s emergency source of electrical power supply fails, VDR should continue to record Bridge
audio from a dedicated reserve source of power (Battery) for a period of 2 h.
- Recording should not be terminated except for the following cases.
a) during essential maintenance purposes whilst the vessel is in port;
b) when the vessel is laid-up;
c) upon request by an investigation authority, for example after the vessel had been involved in a
marine incident.
D-88
17-3 Data items to be recorded
Data VDR S-VDR
Date, Time ZDA Required Required
Ship’s position GNS (GGA), DTM Required Required

Speed VBW Required Required
(through the water or
over the ground)
Heading (true value) THS, HDT Required Required

(Magnetism) HDG
Depth of water DPT Required Required, when data in
The main alarm ALR, ALA, FIR, WAT Required IEC61162 is outputted
Rudder order and Required

Response Rudder
angle Automatic condition is
required when autopilot is
(Manual) RSA equipped.
(Automatic) HTC, HTD

Engine order and Required
Response ETL, PRC, TRC,
TRD, RPM, XDR
Watertight door, Fire DOR, GEN, XDR Required

door, Hull opening Required in the case of
Ro-Ro passenger ship
Acceleration and Hull HSS, XDR, ALR Required, when equipped

stress
Wind speed and MWV Required, when equipped

Direction
Data VDR S-VDR
Radar data, post-display selection Required when I/F for connection is

(every 15 second) fitted.
AIS Optional Required, when radar

data cannot be recorded.
VHF communications (transmitted and Required Required

received conversations)
Bridge audio (Microphone) Required Required
D-89
17-4 Performance Requirements for Protective Capsule
Endurance
Item VDR S-VDR
Item
Environmental-proof Shock A half sine-wave pulse of 50 g, with a duration of 11 ms

performance
There are not breakage of a Penetration A mass of 250 kg with a pin of 100 not required
memory media and a deficit mm diameter, dropped from a
of data under mentioned height of 3 m
environment.
Fire A low temperature fire of 260 °C nominal for 10 h
A high temperature fire of 1 100 °C nominal for 1 h
Deep-sea 60Mpa (water pressure equivalent to a depth of 6000

pressure m)
Underwater Acoustic Frequency

Beacon band Center frequency: 37.5kHz±1kHz (25 to 50 kHz)
Operation time 30 days (min.)
Distance
range 1800m-3600m ( subject to environments)
17-5 Microphone Setting Position

Connection of a maximum of nine microphones is possible for VDR/S-VDR. However, voice data of three
microphones are combined and recorded into CH1-3, CH4-6, and CH7-9 each. Microphones are so
installed that each of 3 areas is covered by three microphones.
- Central Conning station, Wings, Main radar display, Chart table, Steering stand, Communication area
17-6 Sitting Position of Protective Capsule

A protective capsule shall be sited in the vicinity of the bridge on the external deck area of a ship so as to
maximize the probability of its survival and recovery following an incident. The protective capsule shall be
positioned clear of rigging and other potential obstructions and as near to a ship’s centerline of the ship as
practically possible.
(1) Separation from fuel or other potential fire sources.
(2) Separation from probable sources of mechanical damage.
(3) Operational environment for continued serviceability.
(4) Facilitation of underwater removal and retrieval by both divers and ROVs. There shall be a
clear unobstructed space in the vicinity of the capsule to allow an ROV or diver to work.
17-7 Alarm of VDR/S-VDR

Since it is necessary to monitor the operating status of VDR/S-VDR in a Bridge, a monitor unit which
generates an audible alarm and a visible alarm is installed in the Bridge. If Operation indication Unit is used,
it is to be installed in the Bridge, and a main unit can be installed in a place other than the Bridge.
D-90
17-8 Reproduction Software for Investigation Authorities
According to the IMO Resolution (MSC.214 (81): amendments to A.861(20) and MSC.163(78)), the
software for the investigators, which is compatible with the following requirements, is required to be provided
together with VDR/S-VDR installed after 1 June, 2008. The software etc. for VDR/S-VDR provided by
JRC is described below.
- Download of stored data
It is possible to download the stored data from a sub-medium (CF-card etc.) in the Rerecord Control
Unit using LAN. *1
- Data format conversion (additional function)
It is possible to change the data stored in an original format into general-purpose formats.
Setting data: Text file
IEC61162-1/-2 Sentence data: Text file
Voice data: WAV file
Radar image data: PNG file (BMP, JPEG2000)
- Playback software
Special purpose software for playing back the stored data downloaded
*1: According to the amendments to the original performance standards, a means was required to
download the stored data to an external computer for Investigation authorities. Termination of the
recoding should be executed upon request by an investigation authority.
Before amended, it was only possible to download the stored data from the protective capsule.
17-9 Annual Testing

An annual testing of VDR/S-VDR is required to be carried out in accordance with SOLAS Chapter V
Regulation 18.8. Only the engineers qualified by a Classification Society, who have received trainings for
the annual testing by a manufacturer, can carry out an annual testing. The annual testing items are briefly
as follows.
(The followings are the annual survey contents introduced by IMO MSC.1/Circ.1222)
- the overall condition of the equipment is satisfactory (no alarms are present)
- external power removal test (Only voice in the bridge should be recorded for 12 hours.)
- the acoustic beacon for the capsule is functional and validity of its battery
- data have been recorded correctly for 12 hours
- validity of batteries reserved in a main unit
- alarm function (receiving error for input data)
- existence of software for investigation authorities
D-91
Issuance of test report
The manufacturer must complete a review, record any changes and issue the completed test report
within 45 days.
The period of the annual testing is specified as follows.
- Passenger ships: Testing may be carried out up to 3 months before the due date
(The maximum period between subsequent testing: 15 months)
- Cargo ships: Testing may be carried out up to 3 months before or after the due
- date for a cargo ship. (The maximum period between subsequent testing: 18 months)
D-92
E. General Materials
1. Grouping of Radio frequency by Frequency Band
Frequency band Name (normally used)
(9)～30 kHz VLF（Very Low Frequency） Extreme long wave
30～300 kHz LF（Low Frequency） Long wave
300～3,000 kHz MF（Medium Frequency） Medium wave
3～30 MHz HF（High Frequency） Short wave
30～300 MHz VHF（Very High Frequency） Very short wave
300～3,000 MHz UHF（Ultra High Frequency） Ultra short wave
3～30 GHz SHF（Super High Frequency） Micrometer wave
1～2 GHz L band
2～4 GHz S Band
4～8 GHz C Band
8～12 GHz Microwave band X Band
12～18 GHz Ku Band
18～26.5 GHz KB and
26.5～40 GHz Ka Band
30～300 GHz EHF（Extremely high Frequency） Millimeter wave
300～(400)GHz Sub millimeter wave
Value in ( ) means upper limit or lower limit distributed in RR.
2. International Conventions related to Maritime

management
International Conventions
SOLAS International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974

Load Lines International Convention on Load Lines, 1966
Convention on the International Regulations for the Preventing
COLREG
Collisions at Sea, 1972
International Convention on Standards of Training, Certification and Watchkeeping
STCW
for the Seafares, 1978
SAR International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue, 1979
MARPOL The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as
73/78 modified by the Protocol of 1978
TONNAGE International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969
Torremolinos Protocol of 1993 to the Torremolinos International Convention for the
SFV PROT
Safety of Fishing Vessels , 1977
E-1
3. Abbreviation used in this document
Abbreviation Structure of Original Words
AIS Automatic Identification System
UAIS：Universal AIS
AMVER Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue System
AtoN Aids to Navigation
CIRM Committee International Radio Maritime
COMSAR Communications and Search and Rescue
Cosmicheskaya Sistyema Poiska Avariynich Sudov

COSPAS
(Space System for the Search of Vessels in Distress)
DSC Digital Selective Calling
ECDIS Electronic Chart Display
EGC （Inmarsat） Enhanced Group Call
ELT Emergency Location Transmitter
EMC Electromagnetic Ｃompatibility
EPIRB （Satellite） Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons
GLONASS Global Navigation Satellite System
GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System
GPS Global Positioning System
DGPS Differential GPS
HCS Heading Control Systems
HSC High Speed Craft
IALA International Association of Light-house Authorities
IBS Integrated Bridge System
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IFRB International Frequency Registration Board
IHO International Hydrographic Organization
IMO International Maritime Organization
INM INMARSAT（International Maritime Satellite Organization）
INS Integrated Navigational System
IRCS Integrated Radiocommunication System
ISPS International Ship and Port Facility Security Code
ITU International Telecommunication Union
ITU-R ITU Radiocommunication Sector
ITU-T ITU Telecommunication Sector
LES Land Earth Station
LRIT Long Range Identification and Tracking of ships
LUT Local User Terminal
MCC Mission Control Center
MEPC Marine Environment Protection Committee（of the Organization）
E-2
MES Mobile Earth Station
MID Maritime Identification Digit Code
MKD Minimum Keyboard Display
MMSI Maritime Mobile Ship Identification
MSC Maritime Safety Committee （of the Organization）
MSI Maritime Safety Information
NAV Safety of Navigation
NAVAREA Navigational Area
NAVTEX Navigation Telex
NBDP Narrow Band Direct Print
NCS Network Coordination Station
PLB Personal Locator Beacon
RADAR Radio Detecting and Ranging
Radar SART Radar Search and Rescue Transponders
AIS SART AIS Search and Rescue Transmitters
RCC Rescue Coordination Center
ROT Rate-of-Turn indicators
RO-RO ship Roll-on / roll-off ship
RR Radio Regulations
SAR Search and Rescue
SARSAT Search and Rescue Satellite Aided Tracking
SDME Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment
SES Ship Earth Station

SOLAS International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea
SLF Stability and Load Lines and Fishing Vessel Safety

SRR Search and Rescue Region
SSAS Ship Security Alert System

International Convention on Standards of Training Certification and
STCW
Watchkeeping for Seafarers
TCS Track Control System
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access

THD Transmitting Heading Device
TMHD Transmitting Magnetic Heading Device
USCG United States Coast Guard
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
VDR Voyage Data Recorder
SVDR：Simplified VDR
VTS Vessel Traffic Services
WMO World Metrological Organization

WRC World Radiocommunication Conference
WWNWS World-Wide Navigational Warning System
E-3
4. Method of Error expression
4-1 Probable Error
When measured data have a normal distribution
and a half of these data are distributed within a
deviaition from the mean of a normal disitribution,
the value of a deviaiton is called “probable error”.
In the graph below, the value of “P0” indicates
“Probable Error”.
4-2 One Sigma Error

When measured data have a normal distribution
and 68.3% of these data are distributed within a
deviation from the mean of a normal disitribution,
the value of the deviaiton is called “One Sigma Error”.
In the graph below, the value of “σ ” indicates
“One Sigma Error”.
4-3 Two Sigma Error

In the paragraph 5.2 above, when the value is 95.4% instead of 68.3%, the value of 2 σ is called
“Two Sigma Error”.
4-4 RMS ( Root Mean Square ) Error

Each measured value (m1, m2, --mn) and an average value (X 0 ) is compared, and a value
obtained from a formula “1/n {(ml - X 0) 2+(m2 - X 0) 2+ .... + (mn - X 02} “(dispersion) is “Mean
Square Error” and the square root of that value is RMS. When measred data have a normal
distribution and the number of data is large, a mean value (X 0) is close to a true value “X”, and at
this time, RMS is also close to “1 σ ”.
4-5 CEP ( Circular Error Probable )

When a half of measured data are expected to be included within a circle of a radius centered
about the mean, the value of this radious is called “CEP”.
4-6 SEP ( Spherical Error Probable )

When a half of measured data are expected to be included within a sphere of a radius centered
about the mean, the value of this radious is called “SEP”.
4-7 DRMS ( Distance Root Mean Square )

When at least 68.3 % of position data measured at a point are expected to be included within a
circle of a radius centered about the mean, the value of this radious is called “DRMS”. It is also
called “rms (σ) radial error”. (63.2 to 68.3%). RMS of the distance from a true position to the
measuring point can be calculated.
4-8 TDRMS ( Two the distance root mean square )

In the paragraph 4-7 above, when the value is 95.4% instead of “63.8” , the value of this radious is
called “TDRMS”. The value is equal to twice DRMS and TDRMS is also called “2 σ radial error”.
E-4
4-9 R95 ( 95% Error Probable )
When 95% of measured data are expected to be included within a circle of a radius centered
about the mean, the value of this radious is called “R95”. It is considered to be the maximum error.
4-10 RSS ( Root-Sum-Square )

When a system error is considered, RSS is used. On each different item such as δ1, δ2 .... δn, the
square of each data is added and then the root of its sum is calculated. This value is “RSS”.
4-11 GDOP( Geometric Dilution of Precision )

Geometric dilution of accuracy
σxx = standard deviation of the direction of the east

σyy = standard deviation of the direction of the north
σzz = standard deviation of the direction of the zenith
σtt = standard deviation of time
σp = standard deviation of a false distance
4-12 Predictable( Geodetic or Absolute )Accuracy

Accuracy of a position about the Earth Geodetic Coordinates
4-13 Repeatable Accuracy

Accuracy that a user can return to a position where the user was measured last time.
4-14 Relative Accuracy

Consistency of values which are simultaneously measured by using two or more receivers at the
same place.
E-5
5. Marine Storage Battery Etc.
5-1 Lead storage battery for Auxiliary Power
5-1-1 Principle
If lead peroxide (PbO2) and lead (Pb) are immersed into dilute sulfuric acid, a voltage of about 2 v
occurs between this PbO2 and Pb, PbO2 serves as an anode and Pb serves as cathode. The
above-mentioned is the principle of lead storage battery, and anode, cathode and electrolytic
solution (dilute sulfuric acid) change with charge and discharge as follows. However, all the active
substances of two poles do not change to lead sulfate and all of the electrolytic solution do not
change to water, respectively, with the progress of electric discharge.
Anode Electrolytic Cathode Anode Electrolytic Cathode

solution solution
Electric discharge
PbO2 + 2H 2SO4 + Pb → PbSO4 + 2H 2O + PbSO
←
Charge
(Lead peroxide) (sulfuric acid) (Spongy pure lead) (Lead sulfate) (Water) (Lead sulfate)
5-1-2 Change of electromotive force by specific gravity

The relation between specific gravity of electrolyte and electromotive force can be estimated by
the following formula.
Eo = S+ 0.85～0.84
S: Specific gravity of electrolyte (20˚C)
5-1-3 Characteristic of Capacity to Discharge rate

There are types of 60, 84, 108, 200, 300, and 400AH, as capacity, and discharge and re-charge
are repeated continuously in turn down to a discharge final voltage (1.8V) at a ten-hour rate, and it
is assumed that the capacity bears this process 5 times and keep 95% of a capacity.
If a battery of 10-hour discharge rate “200AH” discharge at a current of 20A, it means that the
battery can be used, maintaining a specified voltage for 10 hours.
Specific gravity is based on 1.24±0.01 in a state of complete charge.
The left chart indicates the

Charactrsistics of Discharge to
Capacity
Capacity and is based on a battery

with a capacity of 100% at a
10-hour discharge rate.
When a battery of 200AH
discharges at a 7-hour rate (28.6A),
the capacity of the battery is 91%
(l82AH), and is able to bear a load
for 6.4 hours.
Hour rate
Minute rate
Characteristic Chart of Electric discharge hour rate to Capacity
E-6
5-2 Alkaline Battery for Auxiliary Power
5-2-1 Alkaline battery
Generally an alkali storage battery is a nickel cadmium storage battery, and nickel oxide is used
for an Anode and a cadmium compound is used for a Cathode and caustic potash is used for an
electrolyte. During discharging, chemical reaction of nickel oxyhydroxide occurs at an Anode and
chemical reaction between metal cadmium and cadmium hydroxide occurs at a Cathode, and
the caustic potash of an electrolytic solution cannot participate in a reaction directly and
concentration of an electrolytic solution can be disregarded mostly.
5-2-2 Charge and Discharge reaction formula
Electric discharge
→
2 NiOOH+Cd+2H 2O 2nickel(OH) 2+Cd(OH) 2
←
Charge
5-2-3 Feature
(1) Charges and discharge of 500 times or more are possible. (JIS conditions)
(2) Internal resistance is very small and large current discharging is possible.
(3) Voltage variation under electric discharge is small.
(4) It is equal to overcharge and overdischarge and handling is easy.
5-2-4 Characteristic
(1) Charging characteristic
If charge is continued, charge voltage, inner gas pressure, and battery temperature change with
the elapse of time. Such characteristic is affected by the influence of charging current, ambient
temperature, etc.. From a final stage of charging to a stage of overcharging, oxygen gas is
evolved from an anode plate and it is absorbed at a Cathode. If charging is continued without
control by a current of more than an allowable current, the amount of evolved gas increases and
inner gas cannot be absorbed adequately. Consequently, a pressure of the gas increases
abnormally and then a safety valve activated to release the electrolyte. As a result, poor
contracting may be caused due to the dirty of the overflowed electrolyte.
(2) Ambient temperature while charging

The charging characteristic of a battery varies with the change in ambient temperature, and if a
charging temperature goes up, charging efficiency gets worse. For example, after a battery is
charged at a temperature of 20˚C and then discharged, the charged battery can be used for 100
minutes. However, if a battery is charged at a temperature of 40 ˚C, it cannot be used only for 85
minutes (down to about 85%). Therefore, a temperature range of from 10˚C to 25˚C is extremely
ideal for charging efficiently.
(3) Ambient temperature while discharging

A battery can be discharged at a temperature range of 20˚C to 60˚C, and discharging at high
temperatures can be carried out like discharging at normal temperatures, but discharging
performance deteriorates at low temperatures.
E-7
5-3 Battery currently used for Shipborne equipment
5-3-1 Nickel-metal hydride battery (Ni-MH battery)
(1) about Nickel-metal hydride battery
The Nickel-metal hydride battery (NiMH) uses a hydrogen-absorbing alloy for the negative
electrode active material instead of cadmium (Cd) of a nickel-cadmium battery. Eelectromotive
force of a Ni-MH battery is nearly the same voltage of 1.2 v as a nickel-cadmium battery.
(2) Charge-and-discharge reaction formula

Electric discharge →
NiOOH + MnO2 + Zn + H2O ←→ Ni (OH) 2 + MnOOH + ZnO

← Charge
(3) Feature
a. Charges and discharge of 500 times or more are possible.
b. In comparison with a nickel-cadmium battery, energy density is high and capacity is
large.
c. Since the cadmium of a toxic substance is not used, an impact on environment is low.
d. There is memory effect (Ni-Cd battery gradually lose its maximum energy capacity,
if it is repeatedly recharged after being only partially discharged.) like a nickel-cadmium
battery.
e. in comparison with a nickel-cadmium battery, it is weak to overcharge.
5-3-2 Lithium battery

(1) about Lithium battery
The most common type of lithium cell is manganese dioxide lithium cell type in which metallic
lithium as anode and manganese dioxide as cathode, and electrolytic solution in which a salt of
lithium is dissolved in an organic solvent, are used respectively. It has a maximum ionization
tendency among metals, and since it has very low potential, if this is used as anode, the high
potential difference will be obtained, and as compared with a manganese cell, capacity is very
large, and lithium has few voltage drops till the electric discharge last stage, and its
self-discharge is small.
(2) Reaction formula
Electric discharge
Mn(IV)O2 + Li → Mn(III)O2 (Li+)
(3) Feature
a. Electromotive force per cell is high, and one cell can be used for memory backup.
b. Since energy density is very high, it can be miniaturized.
c. Self-discharge is very low, and it has a life time of about five years.
d. Voltage drop is small till the last stage of electric discharge.
e. Its characteristic is not deteriorated even at lower temperatures and can be used even
at lower temperatures,
f. Since energy density is high, it is necessary to pay attention very much to generation of
heat in the case of a short circuit accident.
E-8
5-3-3 Lithium ion battery
(1) about Lithium ion battery
In a typical Lithium ion battery, carbon as anode, lithium transition metal oxide as cathode, and
organic solvent + lithium hexafluorophosphate(lithium salt), such as ethylene carbonate or
diethyl carbonate, as electrolyte, are used respectively. Lithium ion in electrolyte acts as
electrical conduction. There are two types of lithium ion batteries such as the primary battery
which is not rechargeable, and the secondary battery which is rechargeable.
(2) Charge-and-discharge reaction formula

Charge →
Li(1←→X) CoO2 + LixC ←→ LiCoO2 + C
← electric discharge
(3) Feature
a. Electromotive force per cell is high, and one cell can be used for memory backup.
b. Charges and discharge of 500 times or more are possible.
c. Energy density is very high, and it can be miniaturized.
d. Voltage drop does not occur due to memory effect which exists in nickel-cadmium
battery.
e. Self-discharge characteristic is good.
f. Since the difference between a common use range and a safety use range is very small,
a protection circuit is necessary to supervise charging and discharging for safety
reservation.
g. Since electrolytic solution is an organic solvent, a fire may be caused by its volatilization.
E-9
6. Standing Wave and SWR
Standing Wave
Standing wave excitation is used for feeding high frequency currents to an antenna wire. If
both ends of an antenna wire are electrically open, a state is presented that an infinite load is
connected, and traveling waves are reflected completely at both end. That is that, regarding a
standing wave excitation, traveling and reflected waves are feeded to an antenna wire to radiate
electric waves.
A traveling wave and a reflected wave are nothing more than electric energy currents
substantially. However, only the differnece between both waves is that directions of both waves
are reverse to each other. As both waves are advancing, the phase of each wave is delayed.
At points which are λ/4 odd times separate from a receiving terminal, a traveling wave and a
reflected wave are in phase and emphasize each other. Conversely, at points which are λ/4 even
times separate from a receiving terminal, two waves weaken each other. Such points always stay
at the same points. Therefore, such waves are called “Standing Waves”.
Standing points stay on a feeding wire as well (If a load impedance is equal to the
Characteristic Impedance of a feeder, a reflected wave does not exist.). SWR (standing wave
ratio) is used to indicate the state of a standing wave.
When SWR is indicated by the ratio of the maximum voltage to the minimum voltage of a standing
wave, VSWR is used especially as a unit of SWR.
SWR usually used is obtained from the following formula by measuring a traveling wave and a
reflected wave with CM type power meter.
Traveling electric power – Reflected electric power - VSWR

conversion diagram
Pf: Traveling wave

Pr: Reflected wave
The case of SWR = 1 is

(Pf) W
referred to as being full

matched. If there are some
standing waves, the SWR is
Reflection electric power
more than one (1). If the value

of SWR is large, a feeder loss
is large as well. Therefore,
SWR should be as small as
possible.
Traveling electric power (Pf) W →
E-10
7. Marine Cables
Marine Cables for power and signal /communication used in Japan should comply with JIS C
3410 (1999). JIS C 3410 (1999) is compiled based on the following IEC standards relevant to
marine cables. In 2004, JIS C 3410 was reviewed periodically, and the latest version of JIS C 3410
is 1999-revised one. For High frequency signal, cables compatible with US Military specification
MIL-C-17 (or the Defense Ministry specification DSP C 3102 in Japan) ,such as RG(Radio Guide)
cable, are normally used. Marine Cables for power and signal /communication (telephone) use is
specified in Regulation 45 (Precautions against shock, fire and other hazards of electrical origin),
5.2 (SOLAS II-1, Part D, Electrical installations), Regulation 45 requires that all cables are flame
retardant, and it is specified that installation of cables should be flame-retardant. However, the
Administration permits that high frequency cables, such as RG cables, are installed onboard
ships.
IEC 60092 Electrical installation in ships
IEC 60092-350 :1998 Shipboard power cables - General construction and test requirements
IEC 60092-351 :1983 Insulating materials for shipboard power, telecommunication and
control data cables
IEC 60092-353 :1995 Single and Multicore non-radial field power cables with extruded solid
Insulation for rated voltages 1 kV and 3kV
IEC 60092-359 :1987 Sheathing materials for shipboard power and telecommunication
cables
IEC 60092-375 :1977 Shipboard telecommunication cables and radio-frequency cables -
General instrumentation, control and communication cables
IEC 60092-376 :1983 Shipboard Multicore cables for control circuits
7-1 Cable Type and Use

7-1-1 Cable Type, Use and Flare retardant （Power, Signal, Flare retardant）
Regarding Cable type, there are two types, such as power and signal/ communication use, and
0.6/1.0kV EP (ethylene-propylene) rubber insulated, PVC(Polyvinyl Chloride)sheathed and steel
wire braided cable is used for power use, and 250V EP (ethylene-propylene) rubber insulated,
PVC(Polyvinyl Chloride)sheathed and steel wire braided cable is used for signal/ communication
use. As aforementioned, all cables except for high frequency cables, shall be flame-resistant. In
particular for flame retardant cables, symbol ”FA” denoting flame retardant is added to the head of
cable symbol (FA –DPYC -120) . (Refer to table 3)
Note : FA ： Initial letter “F” of Flame Retardant and, as Flame Retardant falls in IEC60332-3
Category ”A”, F and A is combined. Cable meeting IEC60332-1 is called “flame resistant” and
any Symbol is not assigned.
7-1-2 Cables for signal/ communication ( pair-twisted, multicore )

For signal not susceptible to interference (pilot lamp, alarm (contact signal etc.), multicore cable is
used. For communication (telephone) and instrumentation/control (digital signal etc.) susceptible
to interference, pair-twisted cable (i.e. TTYC) is used as it is noise-resistant. Furthermore, for
signal highly susceptible to interference, shielded cable is used. There are two types of shielded
cable, and the one is that whole conductors or pairs are common-shielded and the other one is
that each conductor or each twisted pair is individually shielded. For the whole shield, the
symbol ”S” is added to the end of cable symbol (i.e. TTYCS), and for individual shield, the
symbol ”- S” is added to the end of cable symbol (i.e. TTYC-S). (Refer to table-2 symbol in
column “Other”).
E-11
7-1-3 High Frequency cables
This type of cables is used in particular for Radiocommunication signal transmission. It is called
RG (Radio Guide) cable and specified by US Military Specification MIL-C-17(or The Defense
Ministry specification DSP C 3102). In addition, there are other types of high frequency cables (i.e.
3C-2V etc.) which are specified by JIS C 3501. As to RG cable, RG-10 or RG-12 cables are often
used.
7-1-4 Others
Nowadays, LAN cable is often used for intercommunication between systems onboard ships.
Normally, for LAN cable onboard ships, steel-wire-braided armored LAN cable is used. Additionally,
cable(s) prepared by a manufacturer for the specific purpose is used.
7-2 Cable symbol

Cable symbols and use for JIS C 3410 （1999 version） are shown below. Table 1
Symbols for number of cores and use
FA Flame retardant F Four cores, Lighting and power
S Single core, Lighting and power M Multicore, control and signal
Telecommunication and
D Double cores, Lighting and power TT
instrumentation
T Three cores, Lighting and power P Portable or flexible
Note: Generally any cable except flame retardant type cable is flame resistant cable
(except for flexible cables).
Table 2
Symbol for constituents
Protective covering
insulation Outer covering Armoring*２ Others
*３
Common
P EP rubber Y PVC sheath S
PVC shield
Steel wire
C Y protective
braid Individual
Silicone Lead covering
SR L -S core or pair
rubber sheath
shield
Copper
Y PVC N PCP sheath CB alloy wire E Earth wire
braid
Flame
C retardant
XLPE
Legend 1: The nominal voltage 0.6/1kV of cable means the following:
Legend is the rated power-frequency voltage between conductor and earth or
metallic screen, for which the cable is designed.
1 kV is the rated power- frequency voltage between conductors for which the cable is
designed.
Legend 2: EP means ethylene-propylene.
Legend 3: PVC means Polyvinyl Chloride.
Note 1: 0.6/1.0 kV is assigned for lighting and power use. 250V is assigned for
communication / instrumentation/ control use.
Note 2: As for material for wire braided arming, in the case of steel wire braided cable, symbol
“C” is used, and in the case of copper alloyed wire braided cable, symbol “CB” is used.
Note 3: Insulation symbol for SPY (PVC insulated wires for controlling machines and
apparatus) and for SCP (Flame retardant cross-linked poly ethylene (XLPE) insulated
flexible switchboard wire) is not indicated on cable symbol.
E-12
Note 4: Asbestos insulated flexible switchboard wire is revoked and 0.6/1 kV SCP (Flame
retardant cross-linked poly ethylene (XLPE) insulated flexible switchboard wire) is
newly specified.
Note 5: For PVC protective covering cable, protective covering symbol(Y) is added to the end
of cable symbol (MPYCY) (refer to table 3)
Note 6: Cable symbol for lighting and power is based on number of conductor and nominal
sectional area of conductor. Cable symbol for multicore is based on number of
conductors, and twisted -pair cable symbol is based on number of pairs.
Cable symbol Table 3

Sectional
area
Symbol for Number
Voltage Type of cable
cable of cores
Number
of pairs
DPY-120 Double core, EP rubber insulated and PVC sheathed cable
Double core, EP rubber insulated, PVC sheathed and steel
DPYC-120
wire braided cable
DPYCY-120
wire braided cable with PVC protective covering.
Double core, EP rubber insulated and PVC sheathed flame
FA-DPY-120 120 mm2
0.6/1 kV retardant cable
FA-DPYC-120
wire braided flame retardant cable
FA-DPYCY-120 wire braided flame retardant cable with PVC protective
covering.
“S” added to symbol means “with common shield”.
MPY-12 Multicore, EP rubber insulated and PVC sheathed cable

Multicore, EP rubber insulated, PVC sheathed and steel
MPYC-12
wire braided cable
MPYCY-12
wire braided cable with PVC protective covering.
Multicore, EP rubber insulated and PVC sheathed flame
FA-MPY-12
retardant cable
250V 12 cores
FA-MPYC-12
wire braided flame retardant cable
FA- MPYCY-12 wire braided flame retardant cable with PVC protective
covering.
“S” added to symbol means “with common shield”. “-S” added to symbol
means “with individual shield”.
Twisted pair, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed telephone
TTY-3 3 pairs
cable
Twisted pair, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire
TTYC-3
braided telephone cable
250V Twisted pair, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire
TTYCY-3
braided telephone cable with PVC protective covering.
Twisted pair, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed flame
FA- TTY-3
retardant telephone cable
FA- TTYC-3
braided flame retardant telephone cable
E-13
FA- TTYCY-3 braided flame retardant telephone cable with PVC
250V protective covering.
“S” added to symbol means “with common shield”. “-S” added to symbol
means “with individual shield”.
2(3,4) core, EP rubber insulated and polychloroprene (PCP) 2(3,4)
D(T,F)PNP
sheathed flexible cord cores
1core
Single core, flame retardant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
SCP (1.5-95
0.6/1 kV insulated flexible switchboard wire 2
mm )
1core
SYP PVC insulated wires for controlling machines and apparatus (0.75-16
2
mm )
7-3 Layer of cable

As marine cables may be mechanically damaged during cable installation or gas cutting/welding
or welding, etc. steel or copper alloy wire braided armored cable are normally installed except
flexible cord etc.). Cable layer of cables which are normally used are shown drawing 1 below.
Drawing 1 Cable layer
E-14
7-4 Characteristics of cables
Characteristics of cables which are normally installed are summarized below.
7-4-1 Lighting and power cable cited from JJIS C 3410(1999) table 1,2,3 Table 4
0.6/1kV EP rubber insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire braided cable
SPYC, DPYC, TPYC
0.6/1Kv EP rubber insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire braided cable
with PVC protective covering
SPYCY, DPYCY, TPYCY
Nominal overall diameter Approximate weight
Conductor
mm Kg/10m
No.
Nominal SPYC SPYCY SPYC SPYCY
of No.
core sectional
of wire DPYC DPYCY DPYC DPYCY
area
2 /Diameter
mm TPYC TPYCY TPYC TPYCY
1.5 7/0.52 7.2 9.0 1 1.35

１ 2.5 7/0.67 7.6 9.4 1.2 1.5
4 7/0.85 8.2 10.0 1.4 1.75
1.5 7/0.52 11.7 13.7 2.05 2.6
２ 2.5 7/0.67 12.8 14.8 2.5 3.1
4 7/0.85 13.9 15.9 3.0 3.65
1.5 7/0.52 12.5 14.5 2.45 3.0
３ 2.5 7/0.67 13.5 15.5 2.95 3.55
4 7/0.85 14.7 16.9 3.65 4.4
7-4-2 Multicore cable ( for pilot lamp and alarm signal ) Table 5
250V EP rubber insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire braided cable
MPYC
MPYCY
Nominal overall diameter Approximate weight
Conductor
mm Kg/10m
No.
of Nominal
No.
core sectional
of wire MPYC MPYCY MPYC MPYCY
area
2 /Diameter
mm
2 10.0 12.0 1.55 2.05
1 7/0.43
4 11.2 13.2 2.05 2.6
7 13.2 15.2 2.90 3.5
12 16.8 19.0 4.45 5.3
19 19.6 22.0 6.15 7.2
27 23.4 26.0 8.40 9.8
37 26.1 28.9 10.7 12.4
44 29.3 32.1 12.9 14.7
cited from JIS C 3410(1999) table 8
E-15
7-4-3 Twisted pair cable ( for communication, instrumentation and control )
Table 6
TTYC
TTYCY
Nominal overall
Approximate weight
Conductor diameter
Kg/10m
No. mm
No. of
of Nominal
core No.
pair sectional
of wire TTYC TTYCY TTYC TTYCY
area
2 /Diameter
mm
1 2 9.2 11.0 1.3 1.7
0.75 7/0.37
1T 3 9.9 11.7 1.55 2.05
1Q 4 10.6 12.6 1.8 2.3
4 8 15.5 17.7 3.2 4.0
7 14 18.2 20.6 4.4 5.45
10 20 23.0 25.6 6.4 7.75

14 24 24.8 27.4 7.7 9.2
19 38 27.7 30.5 9.65 11.4
24 48 33.7 36.7 13.8 16.1
30 60 35.8 39.2 15.9 18.6
37 74 38.7 42.3 18.6 21.7
48 96 44.6 23.8 27.6
cited from JIS C 3410(1999) table 11
7-5 Maximum rated conductor temperature

Table 7
EP Silicone Flame retardant
Type of Insulation PVC
rubber rubber XLPE
Maximum rated
85 95 60 75 85
Conductor temperature ℃
E-16
7-6 Current rating of EP rubber insulated cable
First 10 items of Nominal Sectional area 1.5-300mm2 are shown here. Current is shown at
continuous rating.
Table 8
Single core （d.c.） Double core （a.c., d.c.） Three core （a.c., d.c.）
Nominal
section Ambient temperature Ambient temperature Ambient temperature
al area
mm
2 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃
A A A A A A A A A
1.5 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
2.5 30 28 26 25 24 23 21 20 19
4 42 38 36 34 32 31 28 27 26
6 51 48 45 43 41 39 36 34 32
10 71 67 63 60 57 55 50 47 45
Remarks 1. The values given above are for 6 cables or less bunched or laid together. When more
than 6 cables are bunched or laid together, correction factor 0.85 should be applied to
the values given above.
2. Frequency is 60Hz in the case of A.C.
cited from JIS C 3410(1999) informative reference table 1
7-7 Current rating of EP rubber insulated and PCP sheathed flexible cord
Table 9
Double core Three core Four core
Nominal
sectional Ambient temperature Ambient temperature Ambient temperature
area
mm
2 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃
A A A A A A A A A
0.75 12 11 10 10 9 8 10 9 8
1 15 14 13 12 11 11 12 11 11
1.5 18 17 16 15 14 13 15 14 13
2.5 25 24 23 21 20 19 21 20 19
4 34 32 31 28 27 26 28 27 26
6 43 41 39 36 34 32 36 34 32
Remarks: Frequency is 60Hz in the case of A.C.
cited from JIS C 3410(1999) informative reference table 4
E-17
7-8 Maximum Length of cable
7-8-1 DC and 2 phase AC.
1000 × e × A
Simplified formula = (m)
35.6 × I
e = Voltage drop 5% (V)
I = current (A)
A = conductor nominal sectional area （mm２）
Example Table 10
2 2 2 2
Cable→ 1.25 mm 2.0 mm 3.5 mm 5.5 mm
Voltage(V)→ 24 100 24 100 24 100 24 100
Current(A)
2 21 87 33 140 58 254 92 386
4 10 44 16 70 29 122 46 193
6 7 29 11 46 19 81 30 128
20 3.3 14 5.8 24 9.2 38
30 3.9 16 6.1 25
7-8-2 AC 3 phase / 3 cable method
1000 × e × A 3
Simplified formula =＝ x (m)
35.6 × I 3
E-18
8. Current rating and Voltage drop of Cable
8-1 Current rating of Insulated cable ( rubber insulated , PVC insulated )
- Ambient temperature: 30℃
- This is based on “Electrical Constitution
Technical Standards”.
Remarks :
Cable size should be determined taking into
account both current rating and voltage resistance Current
(voltage drop). Rating
In the case of use in apparatus, this shall be used

as reference value.
8-1-1 Decrease in Current rating due to

ambient temperature.
30℃ : 1.0
35℃ : 0.91
40℃ : 0.82
45℃ : 0.71
50℃ : 0.58
8-1-2 Decrease in Current rating due to
bunching cables.
(cables in a steel pipe)
3 cores : 0.7
4 cores : 0.63
5-6 cores : 0.56
7-10 cores : 0.49
8-2 Example of Voltage Drop of EP Rubber Insulation Cable

8-2-1 AC100V, 1φ AC Voltage Drop ( Conductor Nominal Cross Section of 1.5-95 mm2 )
Voltage Drop
(%)
Cable Length (m)
E-19
8-2-2 AC220V, 3φ AC Voltage Drop ( Conductor Nominal Cross Section of 1.5-185 mm2 )
Voltage Drop
(%)
Cable Length (m)

Note:
1. This figure shows the relation between a voltage drop and a cable length while supplying an
allowable current.
2. Allowable current : a current which is able to be supplied at an ambient temperature of 45 ˚C
continuously, and is shown in ( ) above each straight line in a graph above.
3. Conductor resistance is a value which is measured when "Plated conductor" is used.
4. Conductor resistance is a value which is measured at the maximum rated conductor temperature
of 85˚C for insulator, and its temperature coefficient is 1.26.
(Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Rules for the Survey of Steel ships H2.9.6)
5. A power-factor of 80% in 4) clause is used for an AC voltage drop coefficient.
8-2-3 DC24V DC Voltage drop (Conductor nominal cross section of 1.5-50 mm2)
Voltage Drop
(%)
Cable Length (m)

Note :
1. Conductor resistance is a value which is measured when "Plated conductor" is used.
2. Conductor resistance is a value which is measured at a maximum rated conductor temperature
of 85˚C for insulator, and its temperature coefficient is 1.26.
(Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Rules for the Survey of Steel ships H2.9.6)
E-20
8-2-4 EP Rubber Insulation cable ( 2 conductors, 3 conductors ) AC voltage drop coefficient
Frequency: 60Hz
Conductor Power Factor (%) Inductance

Nominal Cross
Section (mH/km)
(mm2) 100 95 90 85 80 75 70
1.5 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.370
2.5 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.341
4 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.317
6 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.299
10 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.78 0.73 0.279
16 1.00 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.263
25 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.82 0.78 0.259
35 1.00 0.99 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.80 0.250
50 1.00 1.01 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.248
70 1.00 1.04 1.02 1.00 0.97 0.93 0.90 0.248
95 1.01 1.07 1.07 1.05 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.240
120 1.01 1.10 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.03 0.235
150 1.01 1.14 1.16 1.16 1.15 1.13 1.11 0.235
185 1.02 1.19 1.23 1.24 1.24 1.23 1.22 0.234
240 1.04 1.27 1.33 1.36 1.38 1.38 1.38 0.232
300 1.06 1.36 1.45 1.50 1.53 1.55 1.56 0.231
Note:
This table is based on Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Rules for the Survey of Steel ships, Chapter H Electrical
Equipment Survey H2.9.6-1. Voltage Drop calculation is as follows.
1. DC circuit
R20 × K × 2 L × I × 100 L: one-way Cable Length (m)

Voltage drop (%) =
V I : Maximum Load Current (A)
V: Circuit Voltage (V)
2. AC circuit R20: DC resistance at 20˚C (Ω/m)
Single-Phase K: Temperature Coefficient at the
maximum rated conductor
⎛ R20 × K × 2 L × I × 100 ⎞ temperature
Voltage Drop (%) = ⎜ ⎟× δ 60˚C: 1.16
⎝ V ⎠ 75˚C: 1.22
80˚C: 1.24
Three-Phase 85˚C: 1.26
δ: Voltage Drop Coefficient
⎛ R20 × K × 2 L × I × 100 ⎞ 1.73
Voltage Drop (%) = ⎜ ⎟× ×δ
⎝ V ⎠ 2
E-21
9. High Frequency Cable
9-1 RG Type High Frequency Coaxial cable
Attenuation
Protective covering
Insulation material
dB/km
impedance Z0 Ω
Outer diameter
Outer Braided
Characteristic
Rating
compression
Wavelength
Outer cover
Cpacitance
Inner
rate ％
screen
μμF/m
Symbol
m/m
30 200 2,000 conductor Remarks
for cable m/m
MHz MHz MHz
RG-5/U 93 52.5 47 135 550 67 1.3 PE CC PVC 8.4

RG-6/U 66 76 48 138 560 67 0.72CW PE SC PVC 8.4
RG-8/U 97 52 35 105 450 67 7/0.72 PE C PVC 10.3
RG-8A/U 97 50 - - - 67 7/0.72 PE C PVC 10.3 General use
RG-9/U 98 51 35 102 440 67 7/0.72S PE SC PVC 10.7
10,000MHz
RG-9A/U 98 51 40 111 510 67 7/0.72S PE SS PVC 10.7
band use
RG-10/U 97 52 35 105 450 67 7/0.72 PE C PVC yes 12.0 8/U with cover
RG-10A/U 97 50 - - - 67 7/0.72 PE C PVC yes 12.0 8A/U with cover
RG-11/U 67 75 36 110 460 67 7/0.40T PE C PVC 10.3
RG-11A/U 67 75 - - - 67 7/0.42T PE C PVC 10.3 for video transfer
RG-12/U 67 75 36 110 460 67 7/0.40T PE C PVC yes 12.0 11/U with cover
RG-12A/U 67 75 - - - 67 7/0.42T PE C PVC yes 12.0 11A/U with cover
RG-13/U 67 74 36 110 460 67 7/0.40T PE CC PVC 10.7
RG-13A/U 67 75 - - - 67 7/0.42T PE C PVC 10.7 for video transfer
RG-14/U 97 52 25 75 340 67 2.6 PE CC PVC 13.8
RG-14A/U 97 50 - - - 67 2.6 PE C PVC 13.8 Medium power
RG-17/U 97 52 15 48 250 67 4.8 PE C PVC 22.1
RG-18/U 97 52 15 48 250 67 4.8 PE C PVC yes 24.0 17/U with cover
RG-19/U 97 52 11 38 210 67 6.4 PE C PVC 28.5
RG-21/U 95 53 250 660 2200 67 1.3N PE SS PVC 8.4 for attenuation
RG-22/U 53 95 56 174 - 67 7/0.39x2wire PE T PVC 10.3 symmetrical
RG-22A/U 53 95 56 174 - 67 7/0.39x2wire PE TT PVC 10.7 symmetrical
RG-26A/U 164 48 11 at 1MHz 50 19/0.30T Rub T Chloro yes 12.8 for pulse
RG-27/U 164 48 6.5 at 1MHz 19/0.47T Rub T PVC yes 17.1 For pulse
RG-34/U 71 71 23 68 320 67 7/0.72 PE C PVC 15.9
RG-35/U 71 71 15 48 250 67 2.9 PE C PVC yes 23.8
RG-55/U 94 53.5 72 195 750 67 0.81 PE TT PVC 5.2
RG-57/U 56 95 50 160 - 67 7/0.72x2 wire PE T PVC 15.8 symmetrical
RG-58/U 94 53.5 75 200 830 67 0.81 PE T PVC 5.0
RG-58A/U 94 52 81 230 900 67 19/0.17T PE T PVC 5.0
RG-59/U 69 73 60 170 690 67 0.64CW PE C PVC 6.2
RG-62/U 44 93 45 125 440 84 0.64CW PE C PVC 6.2 for small data
RG-63/U 33 125 31 88 330 84 0.64CW PE C PVC 10.3 for small data
RG-65/U 144 950 500 at 5MHz 67 0.2F PE C PVC 10.3 for delay
RG-74/U 97 52 25 75 340 67 2.6 PE CC PVC yes 15.6 14/U with cover
RG-79/U 33 125 31 88 330 84 0.64CW PE C PVC yes 15.6 63/U with cover
RG-85/U 71 71 15 48 250 67 2.9 PE C PVC yes 40 84/U with cover
7/0.72 x2
RG-86/U 26 200 16 53 - 73 wire PE - - 16.5x7.2 symmetrical
7/0.39x2
RG-111/U 53 95 56 174 - 67 PE TT PVC 42.5 22A/U with cover
wire
RG-115/U 97 50 36 105 370 72 7/0.72 x2S Tef SS F.G 9.4 for heat resistant
Symbols in table
PE : polyethylene, Rub : synthetic rubber, Tef : Teflon (polytetrafluorethylene), C :single annealed copper wire braided sheath
with lead cover, CC : double annealed copper braided sheath, CL : single annealed copper braided sheath with lead cover,
S : silver plated annealed copper wire, T : tinned annealed copper wire, CW : copper welded (or cladded) steel wire, N :
Nichrome wire, PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride, Chloro : chloroprene (neoprene), F.G : fiber glass
E-22
9-2 Symbol for RG cable
RG type high frequency coaxial cables are specified by US military specification “MIL-C-17
(or the Defense Ministry specification (DSP C 3102) in Japan).
RG - □□□ □ ／Ｕ
Use (Universal )
Revision number （A, B, C …..）
Serial number
Category （Radio Guide）
General layer of RG Cable

center conductor
center conductor
outer outer
insulator sheath insulator sheath
conductor conductor
Single solid center conductor Twisted center conductor
9-3 Cables for High frequency use except RG Cable
Attenuation
Protective covering
Insulation material
dB/km
impedance Z0 Ω
Outer diameter
Outer Braided
Rating
Characteristic
compression
Wavelength
Outer cover
Cpacitance
Inner
rate ％
screen
μμF/m
Symbol
m/m
30 200 2,000 conductor Remarks
for cable MHz MHz MHz m/m
3C-2V 67 75 200 67 0.5T PE C PVC 5.8

3C-2Z 67 75 200 67 0.5T PE C 3.8
5C-2L 67 75 135 67 0.8T PE CL PVC 9.9
5C-2W 67 75 135 67 0.8T PE CL PVC 8.2
5C-2V 67 75 135 67 0.8T PE C PVC 7.5
5C-2Z 67 75 135 67 0.8T PE C 5.5
Similar to
7C-2V 67 75 100 67 7/1.2T PE C PVC 10.2
RG-12AU
10C-2V 67 75 85 67 7/1.5T PE C PVC 13.4
5D-2V 100 50 131 67 0.8T PE C PVC 7.5
8D-2V 100 50 95 67 7/2.4T PE C PVC 11.5
Cables for High frequency use except RG Cable specified by JIS C 3501 are shown.
Symbol for Cables for High frequency use except RG Cable

３ C ２ V
First number : Inner diameter of outer conductor (mm)

Second symbol : C : Z０ = 75Ω, D : Z０ = 50Ω,
Third symbol : Insulation、２: polyethylene filled
Last symbol : V : single outer conductor + PVC covering
L : single outer conductor + lead covering +PVC covering
W: double outer conductor+ PVC covering
Ｚ : single outer conductor (without PVC covering )
PVC covering parallel feeder
Wavelength
Gap between Characteristics
Purpose Conductor compress coefficient
conductors Impedance
%
Feeder cable for TV 7 x 0.29 m/m abt 9 m/m 300Ω ± 15 85
200Ω Feeder 7 x 0.70 m/m abt 17 m/m 200Ω ± 10 75
150Ω Feeder abt 6 m/m 140Ω ± 10 75
E-23
10. Attenuation curves of High Frequency cables
10-1 RG type high frequency coaxial cable
Attenuation
Frequency (MHz)
(cited from Mitsubishi Cable Industry standard product )
10-2 50ΩPVC insulation braided covering 10-3 75ΩPVC insulation braided covering
coaxial cable coaxial cable
Attenuation Attenuation
Cables meeting JIS C 3501 (cited from Mitsubishi Cable Industry standard product )
E-24
11. List of Cables provided by JRC and Special Cable
11-1 JRC Provided Cable List Oct.2008
Equipment Standard Maximum
Name Cable number Interconnection 1 Interconnection 2 Purpose Cable edge treatment Remarks
Model name length length
Drum 300 m
Radar JMA-9100/7100 2695110056 Display Antenna Antenna Control and Signal 37m 65m Cutting
Refer to cable outline drawings
Drum 300 m
Radar JMA-9100/7100 2695111153 Display Interswitch Interswitch Control and Signal 10m 50m Cutting
Several
XX=10,20,30,40,50,65 (m)
Radar JMA-5300MKII CFQ-6912-XX Display Antenna Antenna Control and Signal cable 65m Connector
types
Several
RJ-45 connector necessary
ECDIS JAN-701B/901B H-7ZCNA0483 ECDIS Display HUB,Radar Data Signal transmission cable 15m Cutting
types
Several
ECDIS JAN-701B/901B H-2695110006 ECDIS Display Radar Display Radar Signal cable 10m Cutting
types
Several
3C-2V Six
ECDIS JAN-701B/901B 6CXBV ECDIS Display Remote display Unit Video Signal cable 30m Cutting
BNC connector necessary
types
E-25
Record Control
VDR/S-VDR JCY-1800/1850 6CXBV Radar Image Signal - 30m Cutting Refer to a specification
unit
Record Control Waterproofing relay
VDR JCY-1800 H-7ZCAF0200 Capsule data communication - 30m Cutting Refer to a specification
Unit box
Record control Waterproofing relay
S-VDR JCY-1850 H-7ZCNA4021 Capsule data communication - 30m Cutting
Unit box
Record control Data acquisition Refer to a specification and cable
VDR/S-VDR JCY-1800/1850 H-7ZCNA0483 Data communication - 30m Cutting
Unit Unit outline drawings
Display control
Echo Sounder JFE-680/380 CFQ-9129 Joint box Transducer 10m Both-ends connector Fixed length
Unit
Display control
Echo Sounder JFE-680/380 CFQ-9130 Joint box Power supply 10m Both-ends connector Fixed length
Unit
Display control
Echo Sounder JFE-680/380 CFQ-9133 Joint box Signal 10m Both-ends connector Fixed length
Unit
Equipment Standard Maximum
Name Cable number Interconnection 1 Interconnection 2 Purpose Cable edge treatment Remarks
Model name length length
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-8921 Display Unit Other apparatus GPS data 3m One side Connector
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-3598B Display Unit Power supply Power supply 2m One side Connector
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-8921-1 Display Unit Other apparatus GPS data 10m One side Connector
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-3598B-1 Display Unit Power supply Power suppliy 10m One side Connector
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ8921-XX Display Unit Other apparatus GPS data One side Connector XX=15,20
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ3598B-XX Display Unit Power supply Power supply One side Connector XX=15,20
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-8773 Display Unit Receiver Extension of receive data 15m Both sides connectors
system
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-8919 Display Unit Receiver Receive data 5m One side Connector
system
DGPS navigational Power supply / other
JLR-7700MKII CFQ-8410 Display Unit Power supply /GPS data for 1.5m One side Connector
system equipment
DGPS navigational
JLR-7700MKII 2164111240 Display Unit Receiver Receive data 50m Cutting
system
Plotter Plotter 33-298 Control Unit Other equipment Air navigation data 3m One side Connector
E-26
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-7257 Display Unit - Power supply 2 - Cutting Φ6
Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-7248 Sensor Unit Display Unit Connection cable 10 - Connector
refert to cable outline drawing
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-5374 Display - Data 3 - Cutting Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-5404 Display Unit - Data 3 - Cutting Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-7249 Sensor Unit Display Unit Extension cable of data 20 - Connector Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-7250 Sensor Display Unit Cable for beacon connection 0.4 - Connector Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ7249-10 Sensor Display Unit Extension cable of data 10 - Connector Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-7251 Sensor Display Unit Y cable for Sub display 1.5 - Connector Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ-5469 Display Unit Radar Data 10 - Cutting Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ5404-15 Display Unit - Data 15 - Cutting Φ7
GPS Compass JLR-20/30 CFQ5374-15 Display Unit - Data 15 - Cutting Φ7

Equipment Standard Maximum Cable edge
Name Cable number Interconnection 1 Interconnection 2 Purpose Remarks
Model name length length treatment
Communication between IME-EME,
Inmarsat JUE-85 CFQ-5922A* IME EME 30m 50m Connector *=3,4,5
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-95SA CFQ-5924A* IME EME 30m 30m Connector *=15,3
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-95VM CFQ-5924A* IME EME 15m 30m Connector *=15,3
and DC
Communication between BDE-ADE,
Inmarsat JUE-410F CFQ-3922A* BDE ADE 50m 50m Connector *=15,2,25,3,35,4,45,5
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-410F CFQ-3923A* BDE ADE - 100m Connector *=7,1
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-33 CFQ-5924A* BDE ADE 30m - Connector *=15,3
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-33 CFQ-3923A* BDE ADE - - Connector *=35,4,45,5
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-250 CFQ-5924A* BDE ADE 30m - Connector *=15,3
and DC
Inmarsat JUE-250 CFQ-3923A* BDE ADE - - Connector *=35,4,45,5
and DC
One side
International VHF JHS-770S/780D H-7ZCJD0299A Controller Transceiver Cable for controller 5m
Connector
International VHF JHS-770S/780D CFQ-5397 Hand set Controller Extension cable for Hand set 10m Connector
E-27
International VHF JHS-770S/780D CFQ-5398 Hand set Controller Extension cable for Hand set 20m Connector
NAVTEX NCR-333 H-7ZCJD0254A Printer NAVTEX receiver Printer control 1.5m Connector DPU-414, NKG-91
NAVTEX NCR-333 7ZCJD0270A Printer NAVTEX receiver Printer control 10m Connector DPU-414, NKG-91
One side
NAVTEX NCR-333 H-7ZCJD0257C Printer NAVTEX receiver Printer power supply 1.5m DPU-414
Connector
One side
AIS JHS-182 H-7ZCJD0214A Controller Connetion Unit Control 10m
Connector
One side
AIS JHS-182 CFQ-6961 Connection unit PilotPlug Pilot plug 20m Connector: PilotPlug.
Connector
11-2 Special Cable
E-28
E-29
JMA-5300MKII RADAR
E-30
JUE-85 INMARSAT-C
E-31
JUE-95A/JUE-95VM/JUE-33/JUE-250
INMARSAT
E-32
JUE-410F FLEET 77 INMARSAT
E-33
Sectional view
JLR-20/30 GPS COMPASS
E-34
Cable Pair
Shield
P1
P4 P2
P3
Drain wire
Pair 1st cable 2nd cable *
1 BLUE WHITE/BLUE
2 ORANGE WHITE/ORANGE
3 GREEN WHITE/GREEN
4 BROWN WHITE/BROWN
Specification of Ethernet cable: Code: H-7ZCNA0483
JCY-1800 VDR / JCY-1850 S-VDR
E-35
12. Logic Circuit IC
The basic element of logical circuits is as follows.
- Gate circuit (AND, NOT, OR, Exclusive OR)
- Memory circuit (Flip-Flop)
12-1 AND Circuit

The example of an AND sign and 2 input AND
Output side
Input side
Truth table of 2 input AND
Input Output
Only when all the inputs are H that an output is

set to H.
12-2 NOT Circuit

Since the reversed state of an input is obtained through this circuit, it is also called “INVERTER”.
Input Output Input Output
As shown in the figures above, a mark “O” means that a signal is reversed (NOT).
This mark “O” is not used independently of others but used together with logic input or output.
12-3 OR Circuit
The example of OR sign and 2 input OR Input Output
Input side
Output side
Only when at least one of inputs is H, output is H.
E-36
12-4 EXCLUSlVE OR Circuit
Example of a symbol of an Exclusive OR and 2 input Exclusive OR
Input side
Output side
Truth Table
Input Output
Only when all the inputs are L or H, output is L.

This point different from OR circuit.
12-5 NAND, NOR Circuit

Truth Table
NAND is combined togher with AND and NOT.
NOR is combined togther with NOT and OR. Input Output
When all the inputs are H, an output is L.

Input Output
Only when at least one of inputs is H, an output is L .
12-6 Flip-flop Circuit

12-6-1 R-S Flip-Flop (R-S is the abbreviation for Reset-Set).
Input S
Input Output
Input R
Output Q
Output Q
* : negation
: The previous state is held.
E-37
12-6-2 J-K Flip-Flop
Clock CK
Input Output Input J
Input K
Output Q
Q0, Q0: The previous state is held. Output Q

Q'0, Q0: The previous state is reversed.
* :H or L
↓: Falling
12-6-3 T type Flip-Flop (Trigger Flip-Flop)
Input T
Input Output
Output Q
Output Q
Q0, Q0: The previous state is held.

Q'0, Q0: The previous state is reversed.
12-6-4 D type Fip-Flop (Delayed Flip-Flop)
Input CK
Input Output
Input D
Output Q
* :H or L Output Q
E-38
12-7 Latch Circuit
This logic circuit is requisite for microcomputers to store data for a certain period.
Input G
Input Output Input D
Output Q
Output Q
* :H or L
12-8 Decoder
Binary-coded information inputted into a decoder are decoded and its output are determined.
It is used well as a chip selector for selection of ROM and RAM,
12-9 Buffer
It does not reverse inputs unlike inverters.
Since only up to 10 gates cannot be connected to a terminal of In standard TTC-IC. Therefore, a
buffer is used for connecting more than 10 gates.
12-10 Tristate Buffer

Tri menas “3” in Latin and a tristate is a kind of buffer which has three states.
Three-state corresponds to H, L and High impedance.
12-11 Application of Flip-Flop Circuit

12-11-1 Counter
A counter counts the number of pulses coming in. Normally, a counter means an up-counter, but
there is also an up-down counter which counts down from the number set to a certain number.
12-11-2 Ripple counter (asynchronous counter)
Composition is simple.
Time-delay occurs.
12-11-3 Synchronous counter
Since it operate simultaneously with clock input, time-delay does not occur.
12-11-4 Shift register
It is used for conversion between parallel data and serial data.
There are functions of storing data into a memory and time-delaying data otherwise.
E-39
13. Decibel (DB) Calculation Table
Voltage and current: dB= 20log10 [Amplification ratio or Attenuation ratio]
Electric power: dB=l0logl0 [Amplification ratio or Attenuation ratio]
dB dB
Amplification Attenuation Amplification Attenuation
Voltage and ratio ratio Voltage and ratio ratio
Power Power
current current
E-40
14. Decibel Conversion Table
E-41
15. Capacitance of Various Antennas
15-1 Capacitance of Two- Rowed Antenna
E-42
15-2 Capacity of Vertical Antenna
15-3 Unit Capacitance of One-row horizontal antenna
16. Configuration Factor of Antenna

Effective Height He (m)
=α
Maximum antenna height H (m)
A value (α) obtained from the above formula is called “Configuration Factor”.
Effective height is obtained from the following formula by using a field intensity measuring
instrument.
λ (m): Wavelength
D (m): Distance
E (V/m) : Electric Field intensity
Io (A): Current at an antenna base
* in the case of electric field intensity at a point of 1 km far and a frequency of 500 kHz, effective
height is obtained from the following formula below.
(V/m) E : Field intensity
E-43
17. Battery List (exclusively uesd for each Product)
LIST OF JRC BACKUP BATTERY
Equipment
Type Maker Battery model JRC code Shape size/validity Remarks
model
JSS-710
Yuasa 3/V80H0747763 5ZBAE00075 φ15.5×18.0mm
LOCAL CONT
JSS-710/720
Panasonic CR2032 5ZBCJ00012 φ20×3.2mm New type
Rx-CPU 2SET
JSS-710/720
CR2032-THB 5ZBBJ00001 φ20×3..2mm Old type
Rx-CPU 2SET
JSS-710/720
Toshiba 17500V-C 5ZBBJ00009 φ17×50mm
NDZ-800
JSS-800
Yuasa 3/V80H0747763 5ZBAE00075 φ15.5×18.0mm
LOCAL CONT
JSS-800
VL2320/1HF 5ZBBD00006 φ23×2.0mm Secondary
NCH-801/2
MF/HF
MF/HF JSS-800
Panasonic CR2032 5ZBCJ00012 φ20×3.2mm New type
Rx-CPU 2SET
JSS-800
CR2032-THB 5ZBBJ00001 φ20×3..2mm Old type
Rx-CPU 2SET
JSS-825
Panasonic CR2032 5ZBCJ00012 φ20×3.2mm
CPU
JSS-825
IVR-2025 φ20×2.5mm
DTE
JSS-850
Toshiba ER17500VC 5ZBBJ00014 φ17×50mm 2 pcs
HOST/CONT
JSS-850
Panasonic CR2032 5ZBBA00006 φ17×50mm
DTE
JSS-296 NDZ-127J1
NDZ-127J
Toshiba 17500V-C 5ZBBJ00009 φ17×50mm B：: not
used
JSB-78
CPU/TUNE
JSB-110
SSB TEL Panasonic CR2032-1HS 5ZBAB00047 φ20.0×3.2mm 2 PCS
JSB-178
JSB-186
E-44
Equipment
model
SSB TEL JSB-210 Panasonic CR2032 5ZBCJ00012 φ20×3.2mm 2 PCS
JHS-31
JHS-32A/B
VHF Not used
JHS-33
JHS-770/780
NCR-300
NCR-330
NAVTEX Not used
NCR-700
NCR-333
JUE-300B/345
JUE-310B
JUE-410F
JUE-33/250 Not used
INMRSAT JUE-75A/C
JUE-85
JUE-95
INM-C DTE
17500V-C 5ZBBJ00009 φ17×50mm
INM-B DTE
JAX-830 Yuasa 3-H70FT-A 5ZBAE00075 φ15.5×18.0mm
INM FAX
JAX-831
Yuasa 2-51FT-A 5ZBAE00065 φ15.0×14.0mm
CKK-526
JAX-831
IVR2430THE 5ZBBJ00011 φ24.5×3.0mm
CKK-526A/B
INM FAX
JAX-831
Panasonic VL2330/1HF 5ZBAB00067 φ23×30mm
CKK-526C
JHS-180
AIS Not used
JHS-182
DL9126 4 years after

JCY-1000 JRC NBK-129A
-48EPML manufactured
periodical 4 years after

VDR/ JCY-1700/S JRC 7ZXJD0094
exchange parts manufactured
SVDR
periodical 4 years after

JCY-1800 /1850 JRC 7ZXJD0095
exchange parts manufactured
6 years after
NDH-288A/B 7ZZJD0056 7ZZJD0056
manufactured
BECON
for VDR
6 years after
NDH-316/317 7ZZJD0057 7ZZJD0057
manufactured
E-45
Equipment
model
JAX-9/9A Toshiba ER4VP 5ZBBA00013 φ14.5×29.5mm
JAX-9B Panasonic CR2032 5ZBCJ00012 φ20×3.2mm
WX FAX
JAX-39 Toshiba ER4VP 5ZBBA00013 φ14.5×29.5mm
JAX-79
JAX-90 Toshiba ER4VP 5ZBBA00013
JAX-91
VHF
TRANS JHV-621 JRC NBB-102 NBB-102
CEIVER
JHV-647T JRC NBB-116 NBB-116
Not
JHP-44M01T JRC NBB-141 NBB-141 68W38D63H explosion
proof
UHF
TRANS
CEIVER
explosion
JHP-44E01T JRC NBB-143 NBB-143 68W38D63H
proof
JHS-410A
JRC NBB-248 NBB-248 62H40D58.5H
JHS-412P
JHS-413 JRC NBB-511 NBB-511 62H40D58.5H
UHF TRANS
CEIVER
JHS-430 JRC ＢＰ227ＦＭ 7ZBJD0008
JHS-7
Secondary JRC NBB-248 NBB-248 62W55D64.5H
battery
TWO WAY
VHF
JHS-7
5 years
Primary battery
JRC NBB-389 NBB-389 after
invalid if label 62H40D58.5H
installed
removed
E-46
Equipment
model
JQX-10A
JRC NBB-345A NBB-345A φ35.0×190mm
JQX-20A
SART
JQX-30A JRC NBB-441 NBB-441 φ34×120mm
3 years
JQE-2A JRC NBB-184A 6ZXSC75014 65W65D126H after
installed
4 years
Normal parts 7ZZSC0021 after
installed
Release sensor JRC
4 years
HK-approved 7ZZSC0022 after
installed
5 years
EPIRB JQE-3A JRC NBB-303A 6ZZSC00023 70W34D123H after
installed
4 years
Normal parts 7ZZSC0023 after
installed
Release sensor JRC
4 years
HK-approved 7ZZSC0024 after
installed
5 years
JQE-103A JRC P-35 7ZZSC0082 after
installed
2 years
Normal parts 7ZZSC0080 H20-YSE/HAMMAR after
installed
EPIRB Release sensor JRC
2 years
HK-approved 7ZZSC0081 H20-YSE/HAMMAR after
installed
JSD-27 Sanyo CR2032-FT6-1 5ZBAD00096 φ21.0×3.2mm

27MHz
1W DSB
JSD-280A Not used
JST-135
CR2032-FT6-1
HF 5ZBAD0009
Sanyo Same as φ21.0×3.2mm
RADIO 6
JST-145 above
JMA-2100
Series
JMA-2200
Series
Sanyo 5ZBAD00096 φ21.0×3.2mm
CR2032-FT6-1
JMA-2213
JMA-3253/4
JMA-3111
RADAR JMA-3200
Series
JMA-3500 Maxell ER3N4 5ZBAU00006 φ14.5×30.8mm
Series
JMA-3600
Series
JMA-3700
Sanyo CR12600SE-T1 5ZBAD00076 φ12.0×59.0mm
Series
E-47
Equipment
model
JMA-3900
Maxell ER3N4 5ZBAU00006 φ14.5×30.8mm
series
JMA-5100
Sanyo CR2477-1VC φ24×7.7mm
series
JMA-5300
Panasonic CR2450 φ24×5.0mm
series
JMA-6000
series
Maxell ER6 5ZBAU00003 φ14.5×54.3mm
JMA-8000
series
JMA-7000
series
New IMO
Sanyo CR2032-FT6-1 5ZBAD00096 φ21.0×3.2mm
rule
JMA-9000
RADAR
series
JMA-9100 ５ＺＢＣＪ
series 00012
JMA-9700
Sanyo CR2032-FT6-1 5ZBAD00096 φ21.0×3.2mm
series
JMA-9800M1 ５ＺＢＣＪ
series 00012
JMA-9800M2
Panasonic CR2477-1FT 5ZBBD00011 φ24×7.7mm
series
JMA-9800M3 ５ＺＢＣＪ
series 00012
JMA-9900 ５ＺＢＣＪ
series 00012
JMA-3810
Panasonic CR2032-T14-1 5ZBAD00089 φ20×3.2mm
JMA-3811
RADAR JMA-3253/4 Sanyo CR2032-FT6-1 5ZBAD00096 φ21.0×3.2mm
JMA-7736
series
E-48
Equipment
model
NCA-780/781 Maxell ER6 5ZBAU00003 φ14.5×54.3mm
Radar ５ＺＢＣＪ
00012
JMA-900
series
JRC CBD-1626 CBD-1626 UPS
JAN-1290
JAN-1397/1497 CBD-1446A CBD-1446A UPS
JAN-3598 JRC
JAN-901/701 CBD-1626 CBD-1626 UPS
JAN-901B/701B CBD-1831 CBD-1831 UPS

ECDIS
Mother
JAN-1290 CR14250-SE
board
５ＺＢＣＪ Mother
JAN-1290 Panasonic CR2032
00012 board
JAN-1397/1497
５ＺＢＣＪ Mother
Panasonic CR2032
00012 board
JAN-3598
JLR-4110/M2 Panasonic CR2032-1HS 5ZBAB00047 φ20.0×3.2mm
Same GPS core

as above
JLR-6000M2 Panasonic CR2032-1HS 5ZBAB00047 Refer to JLR-4110/M2 φ20.0×3.2mm
GPS
Same GPS core Refer to same GPS
as above core as above
JLR-6800 Panasonic CR2032-1HS 5ZBAB00047 Refer to JLR-4110/M2 φ20.0×3.2mm
Same GPS core Refer to same GPS

as above core as above
JLR-7700/M2 Toshiba CR2032-THD 5ZBBJ00006 φ20.0×3.2mm
E-49
Equipment
model
JLU-128 ER3N4 5ZBAU00006 φ14.5×30.8mm

Maxell
GPS
J-NAV500 Toshiba CR2032-THD 5ZBBJ00006 φ20.0×3.2mm
JLR-10 Toshiba CR2032-THD 5ZBBJ00006 φ20.0×3.2mm DISPLY
Panasonic CR2354-1VC 5ZBAB00108 φ23.0×5.4mm NNN-10
GPS
COMPAS
Panasonic CR2477-1VC 5ZBAB00012 φ24.0×77.7mm NNN-10
JLR-20/30
Panasonic BR-2/3AGE2P 5ZBCJ00010 φ17×33.5mm SENSOR
SENSOR
NWU-51 Sanyo CR12600SE-T1 5ZBAD00076 φ12×59mm
NWU-52 Sanyo CR1/3N-FT1 5ZBAD00043 φ11.6×10.8mm
NWU-52A
NWU-53
COLOR CR12600SE-FT3
Sanyo 5ZBAD00081 φ12×59mm
PLOTTER NWU-53A Same as above
NWU-300
NWU-700
NWU-800
JLZ-700 Maxell ER3N4 5ZBAU00006 φ14.5×30.8mm
ＪＬＺ-800
ＪＬＺ-900
JFV-60/61
JFV-82/86
Sanyo CR2032-T9-2 5ZBAD00073 φ20.5×3.2mm
FISH
FINDER JFV-90/91
JFV-100/100M2 Sanyo CR2430-FT 5ZBVD00001 φ25×3.0mm
E-50
Equipment
model
JFV-120 Sanyo CR2032-T9-2 5ZBAD00073 φ20.5×3.2mm
To be
JFV-200 Seiko S-22S12i10 5DEAK00016 NVRAM 98BSAL0001
reformed
FISH
FINDER
JFV-216/230
Sanyo CR2430-FT 5ZBVD00001 φ25×3.0mm
/231
JFV-250 Not used
JFV-850/8010 Sanyo CR2032-1VC1 5VBAB00059 φ20×3.2mm
JFV-130/HP Not used
JFC-130/HP Not used
JFE-570S/570SD Not used

ECHO
SOUNDER
JFE-582 Not used
ECHO
JFE-380/680 Sanyo CR2032L/B 5ZBCJ00012 φ20×3.2mm
SOUNDER
ＪＬＮ-201/202/203 Not used

DOPPLER
LOG
JLN-205 Not used
ＪＬＮ-520/530 Sanyo CR2032-P5-2 5ZBAD00077 φ20×3.2mm

DOPPLER
SONAR
ＪＬＮ-550 Not used
5ZBBC00001
Hitachi/ Lead
ＪＣＶ-26 HP3-6/NP3-6 /5ZBAE0008 135W35D57H
Yuasa shielded
OCEAN 0
GRAPHIC
JCV-36 PC BAT exist
E-51
18. Conversion Table for Various Units
1. Length 1 Sun（寸）=0.030303 m 1 Chou （町）=109.09m 1 Mile = 1609.344 m
1 ken（間）=1.8182 m 1 Ri（里） =3927.3 m 1 NM (Nautical Mile) =1852 m
In Ft Yd cm m km
Shaku （尺） (Inch) (Foot) (Yard) (Centimeter) (Meter) (Kilometer)
2
2. Area 1a (Are) = 100 m 1 Acre =4046.86 m2
2
1ha (Hectare) =10,000 m
尺 2 In2 ft2 yd2 cm2 m2
(square inch) (square foot) (square yard) (square centimeter) (square meter) Summary
(square shaku)
1 tsubo = 3.305785-m2
1 Se = 99.174-m2
1 Chou = 9917.4m2
3. Cubic Content 1000 cm3 = 1t(ton) = dm3 1pint = 0.56825 t

1 OZ (Ounce) =28.412 cm3 1 bushel = 36.368 t
gal gal ft3 dm
3
m3
Koku (石) (gallon) (U.S.) (gallon) (U.K.) (cubic foot) (cubic decimeter) (cubic meter) Summary
1Gou (合) = 0.180386 t
1 Shou (升) =1.80386 t
4. Weight 1 OZ (Ounce) = 28.3495G, 1ct (Carat(U.S.)), (Karat (U.K.)) = 200 mg
lb kg t
kan 貫 (ton) Summary
kin 斤 (pound) (kilogram)
1 long ton (L/T) (U.K.) =1.016047t
1 short ton (U.S.) =0.90718486t
5. Speed
ft/s Mil/h kn m/s km/h

(knot) (kilometer per hour) Summary
(foot per second) (mile per hour) (meter per second)
6. Pressure
atm. 2
2
lb/in (pound per Mercurial column Water column
bar kgW/cm
(m: meter) Summary
(atmospheric pressure) (kilogram weight per square inch) (m: meter)
square centimeter)
1 at
(Technical Atmosphere)
7. Power
kcal/s HP (U.K.) ft.lb/s kgM/S kW(kilowatt) =103J/S

(kilogram.meter per (Joule per second) Summary
(kilocalorie per second) (horsepower) (foot. pound per second) second
PS(horse strength) =75.0001 kgm/s
ditto =0.7355kW
8. Work or Energy
Kcal HP (U.K.) ft/lb Kg.m kWh J (Joule) Summary

(kilogramme calorie) (horsepower.hour) (foot.pound) (kilogram.meter) (kWh) = 10 7 (erg)
E-52
19. Organization of IMO
Assembly
Council MSC (Maritime Safety COMSAR (Radio Communication

Committee) and Search and Rescue)
NAV (Safety of Navigation)
MEPC (Marine Environment

Protection Committee)
SLF (Stability and Load Lines and
Fishing vessels Safety)
DE (Ship Design and Equipment)
TTC (Technical
Co-operation Committee)
DSC (Dangerous Goods, Solid
Cargos and Containers)
FP (Fire Protection)
FAL
(Facilitation Committee)
STW (Standards of Training and
Watchkeeping)
BCH (Bulk Liquids and Gases)
LEG (Legal Committee) FSI (Flag State Implementation)
General Secretariat
E-53
20. Organization of ITU-R
SG1 :No.1 Study Group
PP : Plenipotentiary RA : Radiocommunication Management of
ITU-T Conference Assembly spectrum
For Uppermost decision
-making Settling the subjects of
held every 3 or 4 years studies and approval of
ITU-D recommendation SG3 :No.3 Study Group
Radio wave propagation
WRC : World Radiocommunication

Conferences RAG :Radiocommunication
Advisory Group
Development of Radio Regulations Planning
(RR) SG4 :No.4 Study Group
Satellite Communication
RRC : Regional Radiocommunication

Conference
CEPT, CITEL, RCC, APT, ABU, ATU etc.
Land communication
RRB : Radio Regulation Board

CPM : Conference Preparatory Meeting
Broadcasting
RB : Radiocommunication Bureau
Management of ITU-R jobs SG7 :No.7 Study Group
Science
WP5A＊
f WP5B WP5C＊ WP5D＊
Land mobile- Radio positioning, Station communication IMT system
Radiocommunication Fixed Wireless
Aeronautical mobile- systems
Amateur mobile- Radiocommunication
Radiocomunication (HF station
Marine mobile- Fixed /Land Mobile
Amateur satellite- Radiocommunication Communication)
Radiocommunication
Note : SG: Study Group, WP: Working Party

＊
: WP5A/5C/5D may be incorporated into 2 groups.
E-54
21. Measures for Environment
Environmental pollution caused by Industrial activities broke out in the wide area. As a result,
it expanded into the Global Environmental Problems. The International Chamber of Commerce
announced “the International Charter of Sustainable Development” in 1996 to resolve the Global
Environmental Problems. And then in 1996, "the Environmental Management System ISO 14001
standard 1st edition” was published through it etc.
"The Environmental Management System” was standardized as an Internationally Standard
for Product Management system based on Environmental Program.
Japan Radio Co., Ltd. acquired a certification of ISO 14001 in 1998, and has been promoting
reduction of loads to the environment together with company’s activities, aiming at a sustainable
company.
Acquired a certification (February, 1998) of the environmental

management system (ISO 14001), and Developing environmental
activities.
1. Environmental Plan Environmental

2. Environmental Purpose Management
and Target System
Operation of Environmental
Management System
3. States of Environment-related Law and other State’s

Directives for JRC to pay attention to.
21-1 Environmental Plan

[Basic Philosophy]
Japan Radio Co., Ltd. (hereafter referred to as "the Company") recognizes that preservation of
“Earth Environment” is one of important tasks common to human beings and develops activitiies,
taking into account Earth Enviroment at all stages of business.
[Basic Policy]
(1) The company’s business activities, products and services are in accordance with the Lows
related to Environment and others required by Society
(2) Through the company’s business activities, products and services, the conservation of
resources, energy and the reduction in wastes will be carried out. Especially, the expansion of
products which are manufactured, taking account of environment, is to be promoted.
(3) Through a sustainable improvement of the company’s business activities, products and
services, “Environmental Management system” is to be established in order to prevent
environmental pollution.
(4) An environmental goal and a target are set on “the Environmental Management System”
established by the company, and every effort is to be made for the company to reach the goal
and attain the target.
E-55
(5) The environmental purpose and an environmental goal are set up in the environmental
management system which a company defines, and make an effort of the best for the
achievement at it.The environmental purpose and an environmental goal shall be improved
periodically.
(6) About this environmental plan containing basic philosophy and a basic policy, in order to
obtain an understanding and cooperation, carry out common knowledge thoroughness at all the
people that work for all workers and a company.In addition, release this environmental plan also
to external through a homepage etc.
21-2 Environmental Purpose and Target

(1) Aims at expansion of products for which environment is taken into account.
- The application rate of more than “90%” of Type II Environmental level of our company will
be attained by the year of 2008. However, products, which are not applicable due to
customers’ specification, are excepted.
- Reduction of hazardous substances (Substances pointed out by RoHS* are not used for
products) and expansion of Non-RoHS products is carried out continuously.
- Hazardous substance content managing system will be established by 2010.
(2) Promotion of green procurement.
- Green procurement of 80% for all the materials, parts, equipment, products, etc., which
constitute products for sales, will be attained by 2010.
(3) Promotion of Global Warming prevention.
- The amount of Energy consumption (electric power, city gas, heavy oil: its equivalent in
carbon dioxide) per manufacturing output is reduced by 2010 to less than the actual result
(0.122 ton CO2 / million yen) in 1990.
(4) Improvement of recycling rate.
- The recycling rate of waste will be increased to not less than 90% by 2010.
(5) Reduction of the amount of final disposals of waste.
- The amount of the final disposal of wastes discharged from manufacturing yards of our
company is reduced by 2010 to not less than 60% of the amount in 1996.
(6) Following environment-related laws and regulations and other social needs.
- Observance of reference values required by laws and customer demands.
21-3 States of Environment-related Laws and Directives of Foreign Countries

to be followed
(1) Promotion Law for Preventing Global Warming and Energy Conservation Law
The first commitment period (2008-2012) of the Kyoto Protocol has begun, but it is assumed
that various demands and regulations may increase. The emission of Green House Gas from
Industrial sections (factories etc.) has decreased a little, but the emission of Green House Gas
from other sections has increased very much. As a result, the Ministry of the Environment and
the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry have started a study of the review of “the
Achievement Plan for the Kyoto Protocol”.
As a trend of legal controls, the Promotion Law for Preventing Global Warming and the Energy
Conservation Law were revised partly and these were entered into force at 1 April, 2006. As
measures for factories and yards, grouping of the previous “Heat and Electricity” was abolished
and the designated factories were to be specified by a combined amount of “Heat and
E-56
Electricity” (its equivalent in crude oil). In our company, Mitaka factory is “the Designated Class I
Factory” and Saitama factory is “the Designated Cass II Factory”. These factories are required
to promote the conservation of energy. As measures for transportation, shippers, which have a
transportation volume of 30 millions ton/kg per year, have been required to register the volume
of transportation as a specified shipper since April, 2007. The amount of our company’s
transportation does not correspond to a specified shipper.
(2) Waste Disposal and Public Cleansing Law (in Japan)

When industrial waste discharging companies entrust the disposal of industrial wastes, they are
required to fill in “Type of industrial waste, Quantity, Form and Packing type, name of collection/
transport company entrusted, name of disposal company entrusted, planned final disposal place,
cautions on handling, etc. in the Industrial Waste Management sheet (manifest) and to grasp the
flow of wastes and manage wastes and observe if the treatment of wastes is proper.
Furthermore, in section 3, clause 6th of Article 12 of the law, the above-mentioned "industrial
waste management sheet (manifesto)" issuers are required to draw up a report about the
industrial waste management sheet, and submit it to governors of the administrative divisions of
Japan or to mayors of the ordinance-designated cities. In addition, industrial waste discharging
companies are required to ascertain that works of industrial waste collection/transport and
disposal, which are entrusted, are within a handling ranges of industrial waste
collection/transport and disposal company entrusted and meet entrust requirements. And then,
trusters are obliged to make a contract in writing.
(3) RoHS (Europe) Directive

RoHS Directive "the Europe Directive which prohibits the use of lead, mercury, cadmium,
sexavalent chrome and two kinds (PBB, PBDE) of fire retardant for electric and electronic
equipment" was entered into force from July 1, 2006. Since Member States shall take
resoponsibility for bringing into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions
(Certificate Form or Assement Method contained) necessary to comply with this Directive,
persons concerned ask the relavent Admistrative Agency about those laws etc. UK Department
for Businness & Regulatory Reform preparaed a Guideline for 25 Member States, but now each
Menber State are expected to prepare laws. Procedure based on “Presumption of Compatibility”
is likely to be established based on "presumption of conformity."
It has been decided that Category 8 (Medical equipment) and Category 9 (Contorl and
Measuring equipment) are to be included in RoHS Directivethe. There are many opinions about
commencing time. And there are items for exclusion of application, for example, substance used
for a special sensor and lead for radiation shileding are taken.
(4) J-Moss (Japanese version RoHS Directive)

When electronic and electric equipment (7 items such as television set, electric refrigerator,
electric washing machine, unit type air-conditioner, microwave oven, clothes dryer, and personal
computer) are produced or imported after 2 July 2006, it is necessary to affix “Orange Marking”
on a product and indicate the contents on website if each content of 6 substances of RoHS
exceed the restricted level.
(5) Chinese version RoHS

Other hazardous substances (to be clarified concretely later on) subject to Chinese version
RoHS, in addition to RoHS 6 substances, are included in the substances which are restricted by
E-57
the law of the Chinese version RoHS. The whole of electronic and electric equipment (However,
refrigerator, washing machine and air-conditioner are excepted.) and packing materials used in
distribution are included in products subject to Chinese version RoHS. After 1 March 2009, a
label of the content subject to Chinese version RoHS, recyclable /non-recyclable, including a
mark which specifies a period of safe use, shall be put on a product (if no space for a label on a
product, it may be described in an instruction manual for the product.).
(6) EuP Directive

European EuP Directive “Directive for establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign
requirements for energy-using products (DIRECTIVE 2005/32/EC)” was entered into force on 1
June 2007 as a domestic law of each Member State. Notice should be taken that implementing
rules are going to be enacted for each product filed, and subjects are not necessarily end
products but parts can be included. Since EuP is also one of the Directives which guarantee CE
conformity marking to meet safety rules, measures has also to be taken beyond environmental
measures.
EuP requirement is on the basis of a Life Cycle concept (LCA: Life Cycle Assessment), and
there are items which can be indicated by a measurable physical value (environmental load)
and a certain particular environmental aspect at a special life stage of a life cycle, for example, a
particular reference value is set to standby mode electricity in use. Targeted product field and
regulations are subject to implementing measures which are provided by EU committee
separately.
(7) REACH Directive

The European Parliament and of the council have adopted Directive (2006/121/EC) &
Regulation (EC No 1907/2006) (the Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH)) on 18 Dec 2006. The Regulation entered into force on 1 July 2007.
All chemicals of more than 1 ton per year manufactured in EU and imported to EU are required
to be registered in three phases, on the basis of the treatment of these chemicals, by 2018.
About 30 thousands of chemicals are assumed to be registered. A goal of REACH is to be able
to trace the composition of chemicals, which are placed on the EU market, up to a substance
level, and is to be able to identify the manufacturers of such substances (establishment of a big
database).
(8) Korean version RoHS

The Korean version RoHS was formally enforced from 1 January 2008, as "Act for Resource
Recycling of Electrical and Electronic Equipment and Vehicles”.
The content of the Law is ”Restriction on the use of hazardous substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment and Vehicles”, and is “Establishment of Recycling System for Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment and End-of-Life Vehicles”, and the hazardous material
content and types of substances which are restricted are the same as EU RoHS.
Producers and importers should announce “the hazardous content level and the status of
observance of a recycling rate, which is annually declared, to “Operation and Management
Information system, which was established by the Ministry of the Environment, or broadcast it
on their website and notify the President of Operation Management Organization of it.
(9) U.S. Environment-related Movement

In the stage where the federal government is holding a public hearing in the Standing
E-58
Committee on Science and Technology of the House of Representatives, none of the
environment-related directive by the federal government is settled yet.
However, since the law of restriction on chemical substances and waste of electrical and
electronic equipment recycling, etc. was enacted in each state individually; the notification in
accordance with each environment-related regulation in each state is required.
21-4 Engineer’s Attitude at shipyards etc.

Since the service section of US, including domestic and foreign service agencies, gets in contact
with shipyards or ships directly, each person concerned has to recognize the influence caused by
oneself to environment and observe the law and take actions.
In maintaining and/or repairing, packing materials remain as unnecessary materials after

unpacking and the treatment of cable ends leaves residues, these residues, such as recyclable
materials, flammable materials, nonflammable materials (including metal) and hazardous
materials (buttery etc.), should be sorted and taken back to your office, and those should be sorted
out and disposed of (including scrapping) in accordance with the company’s rules.
Various things, such as global warming, ozone layer depletion, forestdecline, desertification,
marine pollution, etc. were caused, and environment is getting worse. In order not to leave over
negative legacy to the future, many things such as saving electricity and water, waste sorting, etc.
should be carried out nearby. Each person should consider environment and observe rules
concerned and take care of the earth.
21-5 Restriction of certain Hazardous substances in Electronic Equipment in

the world
Nowadays, restriction of the use of hazardous materials in electric and electronic equipment has
become stricter in the world. European Directive RoHS (the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment) is well known in the world, restricting
and prohibiting the use of hazardous materials (mercury, cadmium, lead, Chromium VI, PBB or
PBDE). The similar regulation such as China RoHS is implemented in China. In Europe, Directive
on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) is also implemented to reduce and recycle
these wastes. REACH which restricts the chemicals in Europe entered into force on 1 June 2007,
all of its Titles apply by on 1 June 2009. In accordance with the world’s trend of restriction of
hazardous materials, JRC has devoted itself to enhancing the Green Procurement to prohibit the
use of hazardous materials to its products.
Secondly, regarding shipbreaking (The word “Ship Recycling” has recently been used instead of
shipbreaking or ship scrapping because the efficiency of recycling of ship is so high compared with
the efficiency relating to the recycling of cars etc.), in the 1980’s, demolition of ships was active
and Shipping Industry used to use the private form of contract for the sale of vessels. In 1987,
BIMCO prepared “SALESCDRAP 87” as a form for sale of vessels for scrapping. After that, the
issues of environment of ship scrapping yards and their worker’s safety and health was often
pointed out amongst countries, and then organizations related to Shipping Industry co-operated to
develop the “Industry Code of Practice on Ship Recycling” (Hazardous materials are listed in
it.) and accepted it in 2001. Accordingly, BIMCO reviewed “SALESCDRAP 87” and published it
namely DemolishCOM in 2001. Green Passport is introduced in “Industry Code of Practice
on Ship Recycling” for shipbuilders to use it for new ship building. However, such Code or form
was not legally binding instrument. At the same time, from the point of view of inhibition of
E-59
movement of hazardous materials to other countries through sale of ships, and from the point of
view of sound environment, safety and health at ship scrapping yards, Parties to Basel Convention
developed ”Technical Guidelines for the Environmentally Sound Management of the Full
and Partial Dismantling of Ships” (Hazardous materials are listed in it. It is referred to as “the
Guidelines”) and accepted it in 2002. This “the guidelines” is not mandatory as well, but Parties to
the Basel Convention are encouraged to recommend it. IMO, in 1998, started to consider the
issues related to environment, safety and health at ship scrapping yards on the basis of “the
Industry Code” issued by the Shipping Industry and “the Guidelines” issued by the Parties to the
Basel Convention, IMO prepared “IMO Guidelines on Ship Recycling” and accepted it (IMO
resolution A.962(23)) in 2003. This includes the Hazardous Materials Lists annexed to
aforementioned “ the Industry Code” and “the Guidelines”. Green passport is cited from the annex
to “Industry Code” to this Guideline which recommends shipbuilders to minimize the hazardous
materials at design stage and construction stage of new ship building. As for even the existing
ships, shipowners are required to make every effort to minimize the hazardous materials and
hazardous wastes aboard the exiting ships as well. For new ships, Green passport for individual
ship should be prepared by shipbuilders and shipowners during shipbuilding, and for the existing
ships, after commissioning, shipowners maintain it for the life of the ship, and when sold for
recycling to recycling yard, it is to be handed over to recycling yard. Manufacturers may be
required to co-operate with shipbuilders and/or shipowners and to submit the information of the
hazardous materials in equipment to shipbuilders and/or shipowners if required.
Guideline etc. related to ship recycling, differ from RoHS etc. and is not to inhibit the hazardous
materials, but it is intended to maintain the sound environment and workers’ safety and health at
recycling yards. IMO guideline shows the list of hazardous materials and their locations and
amounts according to each item indicated in Green passport.
Green Passport
Green Passport is comprised of three parts such as Part 1, Part 2 and Part 3. (Detail is omitted)
(1) Part 1 (Potentially hazardous materials in the ship’s structure and equipment)
1A. Asbestos
1B. Paint (on vessel’s structure) - Additives
1C. Plastic Materials
1D. Materials containing PCBs, PCTs, PBBs at levels of 50mg/kg or more
1E. Gases sealed in ship’s equipment or machinery
1F. Chemicals in ship’s equipment or machinery
1G. Other Substances (e.g. Mercury, Radioactive materials etc.) inherent in ship’s machinery,
equipment or fittings
(2) Part 2 (Operationally generated wastes)
2A. Dry Tank Residues
2B. Bulk (non-oily) waste
2C. Oily Waste/Oily Residues
(3) PART 3 (Stores)
3A. Gases in store
3B. Chemicals in store
3C. Other Packaged items in store
Manufacturers of navigational equipment should take into account hazardous materials at design
stage and/or production stage and at Green Procurement stage and pay attention particularly to
handling of equipment in which hazardous materials are included. If the hazardous material is
included, persons concerned should be informed of the way of handling of such equipment. Take
E-60
radar wave oscillator for instance, as it corresponds to radioactive materials in 1G of Part 1,
attention should be paid to handling it. After equipment or parts or component etc. including the
hazardous materials, is replaced, removed one(s) should be managed according to the company’s
rule for the handling of hazardous materials.
As the aforementioned guidelines are not legally binding instrument, in order to accomplish that
ship recycling yards should recycle ships at their sound environment keeping worker’s safety and
health under the legally binding instruments, the Convention on ship recycling has been
developed by IMO in time for adoption of it in 2009. All conditions of adoption of it assumed to be
achieved in 2011 and if so, it will enter into force in 2012.
21-6 RoHS Marking and Affixing RoHS Marking on JRC Products

In order to recognize whether JRC products conform to the RoHS requirements, RoHS Marking is
shown as a sample below.
(1) RoHS marking
(2) Affixing RoHS marking on a product name plate
(3) Indication of RoHS marking on a UNIT
E-61
22. Maintenance Guideline of Ship Electronic Device
Since the Japan Marine Equipment Association has published “Navigation Equipment and
Radiocommunication Equipment Maintenance Guideline”, for reference to maintainable period of
products, it is introduced in this handbook together with JRC Product List.
(The permission for printing of this document was obtained from the Japan Marine Equipment
Association.)
1 July, 2008
Guidelines for Navigation and Radio Communication Equipment Maintenance

Japan Marine Equipment Association
Navigation Equipment Group
Unlike production of consumer equipment and automobiles, production of navigation and Radio
Communication equipment used in the maritime industry could be described as “multi-product and
low-volume”. In addition, with the rapid innovation in technology taking place today, there have been
dramatic changes in and obsolescence of the parts - especially electrical and electronic parts - which
comprise such equipment and the period of availability relating to these key components from parts
manufacturers has been declining every year.
Under these circumstances it has been a challenge for equipment manufacturers to secure parts necessary
for repair work in carrying out product maintenance and there have been cases where the problem has
hampered this task within relatively short timeframes after discontinuation of equipment production,
greatly inconveniencing users in the process.
This policy, “Guidelines for Navigation and Radio Communication Equipment Maintenance” (see Note)
and related arrangements and preparations have been developed and established by our Group in effort to
minimize this problem and provide assurance to equipment users.
Note: This policy applies to the products for ocean-going and coastal vessels only and does not
apply to the products for fishing and pleasure crafts.
Applicable Equipment
In principle, this policy includes all types of navigation and Radio Communication equipment for
ocean-going and coastal vessels but excludes the following categories.
a. Equipment manufactured to special customer specifications.
b. Certain equipment such as satellite system-based emergency position indicating
radio beacons (satellite EPIRB), etc., which has less than a 10-year service life.
c. Equipment which utilizes consumer products such as personal computers, etc.
Maintenance Support
Maintenance support should be assured on all equipment for a minimum period of ten years from the end of
production. In addition, ongoing maintenance support should be provided beyond this period, depending
on the availability of the parts necessary for equipment repair. In cases where such parts are no longer
readily procurable and if requested by the user, the equipment manufacturer should consult with the user
regarding relevant aspects such as delivery and pricing of the required parts in coping with this issue on an
individual basis.
However there may be unavoidable circumstances where maintenance support on equipment cannot be
provided because of the unavailability of the required parts or other factors.
Information Disclosure
Information pertaining to discontinuation of specific equipment and maintenance periods should be
provided as appropriate on the equipment manufacturer’s website, in instruction manuals, etc.
Prior information should be furnished in cases where the manufacturer may be unable to provide
maintenance support on equipment because of the unavailability of the required parts or other factors.
E-62
Other
These Guidelines have been established in agreement with each member company and reflects the views of
the Group. These Guidelines do not in any way compel individual companies to deal with individual
cases, nor are they intended to bind the companies in any manner.
E-63
JRC Service parts supply status list for discontinued models
As of March 2009
Discontinued Service Parts
Product name Model Year supply status* Replacement Model
MF/HF Radio Equipment JSS-710 2002 X” JSS-896

NAVTEX Receiver NCR-300A 2000 X NCR-333
VHF Radio Telephone JHS-31 1995 N/A JHS-770S/780D
VHF Radio Telephone JHS-32A 2003 X JHS-770S/780D
VHF Radio Telephone JHS-33A 2003 X JHS-770S/780D

UHF Transceiver
JHV-459T 1992 N/A JHS-400A
(Base Station)
JHP-44E01T
UHF Transceiver 2000 N/A JHS-430
JHP-44MO1T
UHF Transceiver JHS-410A 2001 N/A JHS-430
Public Addressor NVA-1700 Series 1991 N/A NVA-1800MK2G/H
Multi Coupler NAJ-1007 1995 N/A NAJ-106
EPIRB JQE-2A 1994 N/A JQE-103
EPIRB JQE-2A (HK) 1996 N/A JQE-103
EPIRB JQE-2A-E 1996 N/A JQE-103
SART JQX-10A 1998 X” TRON SART20
SART JQX-20A 1999 N/A TRON SART20

JUE-33(F33)
INMARSAT-M JUE-200M 1999 N/A
JUE-250(FB250)
JUE-410F(F77)
INMARSAT-B JUE-300B 1999 X”
JUE-250(FB250)
INMARSAT-C JUE-75A 1996 N/A JUE-85
INMARSAT -FAX JAX-830 1993 N/A FAX-2820
RADAR JMA-6000 Series 1995 N/A JMA-7100 Series
RADAR JMA-8000 Series 1994 N/A JMA-9100 Series
RADAR JMA-8000MK2 Series 1996 N/A JMA-9100 Series
RADAR JMA-3728 1999 N/A JMA-5300MK2
RADAR JMA-7000 Series 2005 X” JMA-7100 Series
RADAR JMA-7700 Series 2004 X” JMA-5300MK2
E-64
Discontinued Service Parts
Product name Model Year supply status* Replacement Model
ECDIS JAN-1290 2002 X” JAN-701B
ECDIS JAN-1397 2000 X” JAN-901B
ECDIS JAN-3598 2003 X JAN-901B
WEATHER FAX JAX-39 2001 N/A JAX-9B
WEATHER FAX JAX-78 1989 N/A JAX-91
WEATHER FAX JAX-79 1989 N/A JAX-91
WEATHER FAX JAX-9 1993 N/A JAX-9B
GPS Navigator JLR-4110 1994 N/A JLR-7700MK2

NWZ-4551
GPS Navigator JLR-4500 Series 1994 N/A
+JLR-4340
GPS Navigator JLR-4110MK2 2002 N/A JLR-7700MK2
GPS Navigator JLR-6000 1993 N/A JLR-7700MK2
GPS Navigator JLR-6000MK2 1996 N/A JLR-7700MK2
GPS Navigator JLR-6800 1998 X” JLR-7700MK2
GPS Navigator JLR-7700 2001 X JLR-7700MK2
GPS Printer NKG-22 2002 N/A NKG-84
GPS Data Buffer NQA-602/602DC 2004 N/A NQA-4251
ECHO SOUNDER JFE-570S 2001 X” JFE-380/680
ECHO SOUNDER JFE-570SD 1999 X” JFE-380/680
DOPPLER SONAR JLN-520 2002 X” JLN-550
DOPPLER SONAR JLN-530 2002 X” JLN-550
SPEED LOG JLN-201 1984 N/A JLN-205
*note： Service parts stock status code as follows.

X ： Available all service parts.
X” ： Available service parts except some limited parts.
N/A ： Not Available.
E-65
Bibliography and Reference Data ( titles of honor omitted )
1. Radio law, Ship Safety Law for Telecommunication Class
2. Shipborne Electric Equipment Installation Technical Course
AIS/VDR/GPS course (Published in 2008)
The Ship’s Electric Installation Contractor’s Association of Japan
3. Electric Equipmenrt Design / Fitting data Charts (Published in March, 2001)
The Ship’s Electric Installation Contractor’s Association of Japan
4. INMARSAT System Outline (Published in July, 2007)
work of Eiji Chiba / supervised by Masayuki Yasunaga
The Association for Promotion of Telecommunications of Japan (Denkitsushin Shinkou-Kai)
Reference Homepage
1. the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications
2. the Japan Meteorological Agency
3. Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
4. COSPAS-SARSAT
5. INMARSAT
We would like to thank you very much for the cooperation of the organs concerned and
associations, etc. in editing this booklet.
Editor's postscript
It took six months after the kickoff of this booklet edition to manage to finish and issue it at last.
The newest rules and technology were incorporated and most of the items are outlined and it is
possible for each person concerned to make efforts for further information. Moreover, nowadays,
customers’ demands are rather severe, and high quality but inexpensive services are required,
and to satisfy them, it is important that we in charge of installation, repair, etc. should make much
more efforts for contributing to the ship’s relief and safety and make daily efforts to be able to
obtain customers’ reliance.
Since in recent years "Earth Environment" has been reported in news, JRC’s management for
“Earth Environment” is incorporated in the edition of this handbook to have readers understand the
importance of “Earth Environment” somehow or other. It comes from our desires for readers to
think about things which peoples in the world can do for “Earth Environment” prevention and act.
Finally, we greatly appreciate many peoples’ cooperation and instruction in the edition of this
“Marine Products Maintenance Handbook”. Editor
The reproduction of this handbook is forbidden without permission.

Marine Products Maintenance Handbook November, 2009 the first edition < Not for Sale >
Edition and issue

Japan Radio Co., Ltd.
Marine Electronics Division
Marine Service Department
1-18-7, Osaki, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032
TEL: 03-3492-2192 (Main telephone number)
FAX: 03-3779-1420
E-mail: [email protected]

7ztwa0002

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7ztwa0002

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7ztwa0002

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreword

Marine Engineering Department

D. Navigation and Fishing System

(6) - a Feel the victim’s pulse.

Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head

(1) Raise the victim’s head. Support

② (2) Cover his mouth as widely as

(3) Blow into lung.

Fig. 1 Mouth-to-mouth respiration

Fig. 2 Cardiac massage

Safety belt Use a safety belt above the height of 2 m

Put a sling hook of safety belt on place 2 m higher than waist

Use proper tools and do not use temporary tools.

Be careful enough not to drop your tools below.

7 Transportation Do not lift heavy equipment etc. over 30 kg alone.

dangerous cargos(Tanker etc.) Do not put on hobnailed shoes.

Do not smoke at nonsmoking areas.

Use worklights with metal-protective gaurd and bring flashlight(s).

6-1 Observance of Radio regulations and rules concerned

6-2 Observance of rules

6-3 No permission to transmit radio waves by unqualified persons

6-4 Dummy antenna may be used during adjustment of transmitters if possible.

6-5 Whatever equipment may be operated, distress signals should not be

1. Entery into Force

2. Background of GMDSS Introduction

3. Outline of GMDSS Introduction

Communication patterns in GMDSS operation

Homing signal Wrecked ship Satellite EPIRB - Since the position of a

6-2 General radiocommunications

6-3 DSC ( Digital selective calling )

6-4 INMARSAT Ship Earth Station

6-5 NBDP ( Narrow Band Direct Printing telegraphy )

6-6 NAVTEX receiver

6-7 MSI ( Maritime Safety Information ) receiver

6-8 EGC ( Enhanced Group Call )

6-10 HF band MSl receiver

6-12 Satellite EPIRB: Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon using

6-13 Radar Transponder for Search and Rescue

6-14 AIS ( Automatic Identification System )

6-15 SSAS ( Ship Security Alert System )

6-16 VDR ( Voyage Data Recorder )

6-17 LRIT ( Long Range Identification and Tracking of ships )

7-2 Requirements for ships and life-saving appliances

7-4 Terms and definitions

7-5 Safety of navigation

Voyage data recorders (VDR)

20 100 150 300 500 1,000 3,000 10,000 50,000

20 100 150 300 500 1,000 3,000 10,000 50,000

Passenger Distress alert receiving funciton is fitted

Minimum operational display area

Passenger for a ship of 50,000 GT or upwards, both

(1) JMA-5200 MKII series (18 cm) MSC.192(79)/IEC 62388

JAN-901B MSC.232 (82)/ IEC 61174

International passenger ships JLR-7700Mk2 MSC.114(73)/IEC 61108-1

JCY-1850 IMO A.861(20)/IEC 61996-1SN.

Long-Range Identification and JUE-85 MSC.202 (81) Carriage Requirements

(1) Duplication of It means that an auxiliary radio equipment is fitted.

＊ The details refer to a SOLAS CHAPTER IV Radiocommunications Regulation 15

A4 Passenger ships (a) NBDP, R/T, DSC, DSC W/R by HF and MF